JP6211552B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to game operation control of a gaming machine.

  A gaming machine, for example, a ball game machine, performs a lottery on winning when a winning is made at a start opening, performs a stunning symbol variation display game with a variation display operation of a decorative symbol, and the lottery in the game It is configured to generate various notice effects that reflect the results of the above, encouraging the player to have an expectation of winning the game, and enhance the game entertainment. As such a notice effect, a so-called “reach effect” or “pseudo-continuous effect” is known (for example, Patent Document 1 below).

JP 2010-22540 A

  If the notice effects as described above are various, it will be an attractive gaming machine that will motivate the player. However, if the announcement effect is varied, the control program and control data required for this increase, and the control burden on the gaming machine such as consuming memory capacity increases.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control burden related to the notice effect.

  The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) game control means for comprehensively controlling game operation processing related to game progress;
A symbol display means for executing a stunning symbol variation display game accompanied by a game symbol variation display operation and deriving and displaying a display result;
Effect control means for comprehensively controlling the effect operation processing related to the effect including the change display operation of the game symbol with respect to the symbol display means,
After a specific display result is derived and displayed on the symbol display means, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous manner for the player,
The game control means includes
Lottery means for executing lottery for a plurality of types of hits based on predetermined execution conditions;
With respect to a variation pattern related to a variation display operation of the game symbol executed in relation to a lottery result by the lottery means, one or a plurality of types of hit variation patterns corresponding to the case where the winning is lottery is determined by the lottery means. A plurality of types of fluctuation pattern distribution tables including a hit variation pattern distribution table and a loss variation pattern distribution table that defines one or a plurality of types of loss variation patterns corresponding to cases where the winning is not lottery by the lottery means. When,
A variation pattern determining means for determining any variation pattern distribution table from the plurality of types of variation pattern distribution tables and determining the variation pattern based on the determined variation pattern distribution table; ,
The production control means includes
Regarding the effects to be executed in relation to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means, a hit effect selection table in which one or more types of effects related to the hit variation pattern are defined, and the loss variation pattern A plurality of types of production selection tables including a loss production selection table that defines one or more types of productions;
An effect mode determining means for determining an effect selection table from among the plurality of types of effect selection tables, and determining an effect based on the determined effect selection table;
Production execution control means for executing and controlling the production determined by the production mode decision means,
The variation pattern determining means includes
The common hit variation pattern distribution table is determined when at least the first hit among the plurality of types of wins is drawn by lottery by the lottery means and when the second win is selected. Configured,
The production mode determining means includes
When the first winning or the second winning is drawn by lottery by the lottery means, the winning effect selection table corresponding to each of the first winning and the second winning, A gaming machine configured to determine an effect selection table corresponding to a winning lottery.
The hit effect selection table corresponding to the first hit and the hit effect selection table corresponding to the second hit can determine a common effect for the same hit variation pattern by the effect mode determining means. The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the game machine is configured such that the determined ratio is different.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the control burden related to the notice effect.

It is a perspective view of the front side which shows the external appearance of the bullet ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the front side of the game board of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control apparatus of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the game state transition of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the prefetch notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 starting port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electrically-powered article management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process of this invention. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a command reception process at the time of winning in the received command analysis process in FIG. 19. 20 is a flowchart showing a hit end command reception process in the received command analysis process in FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing variation pattern designation command reception processing in the command analysis processing in FIG. 19. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol designation | designated command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous notice effect process in FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation | designated number table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for jackpot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table for jackpots concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the command at the time of winning (winning time) and the winning fluctuation pattern designation | designated command which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the command at the time of winning (at the time of a loss) and loss variation pattern designation | designated command which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the decoration design designation | designated command which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the normal middle hit fluctuation pattern distribution table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the normal middle loss fluctuation pattern distribution table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the ST middle variation pattern distribution table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the loss variation pattern distribution table during ST which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the accessory movement production | presentation lottery table A (15R probability variation big hit) which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the accessory movement production | presentation lottery table B (10R probability variation big hit) which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the accessory movement production | presentation lottery table C (4R probability variation big hit) which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the accessory movement production | presentation lottery table D (at the time of a loss) which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the accessory movement operation | movement aspect lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement timing lottery table of the accessory movement operation | movement aspect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the notice effect lottery table designation | designated table based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the notice effect (pre-notice effect) concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the notice effect (post-notice effect) which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the notice effect which concerns on other embodiment (2nd Embodiment) of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the notice effect which concerns on other embodiment (2nd Embodiment) of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the notice effect which concerns on other embodiment (2nd Embodiment) of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the 1st color element regulation between the notice effects which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the 2nd color element regulation between the notice effects which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure where it uses for description of the sound production relevant to the 1st color element regulation between the notice productions concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure where it uses for description of the sound production relevant to the 2nd color element regulation between the notice productions concerning one embodiment of the present invention.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a ball game machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of Configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the outline | summary of a structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, the structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game is stored in a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted, and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is faced to the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting a transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When the key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the glass door 6 is locked to the front frame 2. When operated to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed below the glass door 6. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

  The upper tray unit 8 includes a ball removal button 14 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the pachinko hall island facility side. On the other hand, a ball lending button 11 for requesting payout of a game ball and a card return button 12 for requesting return of a valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

  In addition, the upper tray unit 8 is configured so that a player can operate it, and the “frame effect button 13 (used to bring about a change in a specific effect (for example, player participation type effect)) before and after the operation. The operation means for production) ”is provided. For example, when a specific effect occurs, the frame effect button 13 is operable (input reception is possible) when the built-in lamp is lit during a predetermined input reception period, and when the built-in lamp is lit (input reception period). It acts as a production operation means for causing a change in the production by pressing the middle button.

  In addition, examples of the operation means for production include a button type, a jog dial type, a touch sensor type using a non-contact type sensor, a touch panel type using a liquid crystal display device, and the like in any case. There is no particular limitation as long as it can be used to give some change to the effect when the operation is performed (provides a change in the effect before and after the operation). Further, the type and the number of installed operation means for production are not particularly limited.

  A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. Speakers 46 that produce sound effects (sound effects) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 that provide a light effect by decoration of light are provided at various locations on the glass door 6.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 that guides the launched game ball as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed. It is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

  In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) A liquid crystal display device 36 (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is provided that is capable of variable display and stop display of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and right symbol (corresponding to the right display area). It has been. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of an effect control unit 24 described later.

  Further, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and is a member that enables the flow path of game balls to be distributed to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls. Acts as a channel distribution means). In the present embodiment, the game ball 3 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 3a so that the flow path of the game ball is formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) of the game area 3a due to the presence of the center decoration 48. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center ornament 48 has a shape bulging slightly to the right.

  The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and forms a front mounting plate 48a that is fixed to the game board 3 by a fixing screw or the like, and forms an outer periphery of the center decoration 48, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. An armor frame portion 48b surrounding the screen is integrally provided. The armor frame portion 48b protrudes substantially from the front mounting plate 48a to the front side, and prevents the game ball from entering the inside, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side. The game balls driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left down flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 and the right down flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either. Such a center ornament 48 functions as a game ball drop direction changing member (drop direction changing means) that changes the fall direction of the game ball.

  Although not shown in the figure, the center decoration 48 is provided with a game ball that is entered from a entrance (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame 48b at the front lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the horizontal direction. The stage is provided so that it can freely roll and drop from the center in the left-right direction (starting port guide path) or from both the left and right sides. In addition, the center ornament 48 is provided with a movable body accessory (a clock board 81, a flower-shaped accessory 90, etc., which will be described later) that has a visual effect according to its operation mode.

  In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section, and a 7-segment display (with dots) is started with the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) which are arranged side by side in correspondence with the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of “special symbol” expressed by 7 segments (variation display operation in which variation start and variation stop are set as one set). It has become. The liquid crystal display device 36 is a device that displays a decorative symbol by image in a synchronized manner in time with the variation display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. At the same time, a decorative symbol variation display game is executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  In the various function display units, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display) 38c including a 7-segment display (with dots) is disposed next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The combination was called the display of the number of balls with special action 1, the number of balls with special action 2, the number of balls with special action 2, the variable time shortening function is active (short time), and the high probability state (high probability) This is because it is an on-hold / short-time / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions called status notification.

  The various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, a normal symbol change display operation expressed by two LEDs (for example, seesaw is alternately turned on and off alternately, and it is determined whether or not it is stopped by either side being lit). As a result, the normal symbol variation display game is executed. In addition, a round number display device 39b in which three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a is provided. This round number display device 39b functions as a “specified round notification means” for notifying the specified number of rounds related to the big hit (details of “big hit” will be described later). The specified number of rounds is notified.

  Below the center decoration 48, an upper start port 34 (first special symbol start port: first starter) and a lower start port 35 (second special symbol starter: second starter) are provided. The normal variation winning device 41 is provided at the top and bottom, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start opening sensor 34a and lower start opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the game ball are formed inside each. ing.

  The upper start port 34 which is the first special symbol start port is a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 1”) in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). This is a prize winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the variable display operation in some cases, which is abbreviated as “Special Figure 1”, and does not have a starting opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). It is configured as a winning device. In the present embodiment, a game ball dropping direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a is operated to the upper start port 34 to the left-down flow path 3b. The game balls that have flowed down the game are easy to win, whereas the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c have a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to win.

  The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variation type winning device that can vary the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by means of the starting port opening / closing means, and specifically, a second special symbol starting port. A certain lower starting port 35 is configured as a so-called “electric tulip type” winning device including a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that can be opened or enlarged. The lower start opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 2”) in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). The award area relating to the start condition of the variable display operation of the variable display operation of the lower start opening 35 is determined according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable blade piece 47. It is converted into an open state (easy winning state) that facilitates winning and a closed state (difficulty state that makes winning difficult) or impossible to win than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable blade piece 47 is inactive, a closed state (a state in which a prize cannot be awarded) in which a prize cannot be awarded to the lower start port 35 is maintained.

  On both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are four general winning ports 43, three on the left side and one on the right side, and a total of four general winning ports for detecting the passage of game balls. A sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  Further, a normal symbol start opening 37 including a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally right above the normal variation winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. . The normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) is a winning port related to a normal symbol variation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and a normal symbol starting port for detecting a passing game ball is provided therein. A sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be formed only in the left flow path 3b, or may be formed in each of both flow paths.

  In the middle of the path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, a special variable winning that is configured such that the big winning port 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 50 is formed therein.

  Around the big prize opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. Yes. And if the big prize opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the big prize opening closed state), by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55, the downstream guide part ( A part of the upper side 55a) is formed. In the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to move the flowing game balls toward the big prize opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the big prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, and thereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the big prize opening 50 (downward direction). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the special winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on the special winning opening in a predetermined arrangement (not shown). By the game nail, it is led in the direction of the tulip-type normal variation winning device 41 (lower start opening 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (start opening open state), a game ball can win the lower start opening 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the special winning opening 50 is open (large winning opening opened state), the game ball is guided into the special winning opening 50. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided to the mouth 34 side or is not guided. Therefore, in the “large winning opening closed state”, it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable blade 47 of the normal variation winning apparatus 41 is operated.

  When the winning means described above belong to which of the left and right flow paths, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can be won, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b Has a top start port 34, a bottom start port 35, and three general winning ports 43 on the left side. The winning means belonging to the right flow down path 3c include the top start port 34, the bottom start port 35, and the normal symbol start port. 37, a large winning opening 50, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

  The lower start port 35 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c as long as the movable blade piece 47 is open (start port open state), and a prize can be awarded from either the left or right flow down path. It has become. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 has the operating condition for the passage (winning) of the game ball to the normal symbol start opening 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, it is substantially the right flow It can be said that it belongs only to the path 3c.

  In addition, the upper start port 34 generally belongs only to the left flow down route 3b or the left flow down route 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball from the right flow down route 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nail and other game parts in the game area 3a is the same as that of the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b (including the game ball that has passed through the stage of the center decoration 48). However, the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c are arranged so as to form a guide path that makes it difficult or impossible to guide the game ball to the upper start opening 34.

  Further, the big winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game balls from the right flow path 3c can win.

  Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. The detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game that has entered the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a ball. The winning detection switch can be constituted by a non-contact switch such as a photo switch or a proximity switch, or a contact switch such as a micro switch.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning holes provided in the gaming area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of winning balls per winning ball (for example, three for the upper start opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, 13 for the large winning opening 40, 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3)). Note that the game balls that have not won each winning opening are discharged from the gaming area 3 a through the out opening 49. Here, “winning” is not a structure in which a winning opening takes a game ball inside, or a winning opening takes a gaming ball inside, but a winning opening made of a pass-through gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning slot, a winning prize is displayed at the winning slot. It is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to the winning is also referred to as “winning ball”.

<Moving object>
In the area of the game board, a plurality of movable objects that provide visual effects are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of the game ball. In the present example, a first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory) 80 is disposed at an upper right side in the center case 48, that is, at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c. A second movable body accessory (flower type accessory 90) is arranged on the side. Further, the push button type frame effect button 13 is constituted by a third movable body accessory (rotating lamp 62). By such an operation pattern of the movable object, a “movable body effect” that can exert a visual effect is produced.

(First movable body accessory 80)
The first movable body accessory includes a clock panel portion (numerical display portion) 81 composed of a numerical display portion divided into twelve numerical sectors with numerals of Roman letters “I” to “XII”, and this watch. It has a clock hand 82 composed of a short hand and a long hand that can rotate on the board 81 and can indicate the hour and minute as required, and is configured as a clock-type accessory 80 as a whole. The clock panel 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division location (number sector from Roman letters “I” to “XII”) indicated by the short hand, or the number sector itself is composed of a full-color LED. The number sectors marked with the Roman letters “I” to “XII” can individually emit light in different colors.

  The timepiece-type accessory 80 functions as a “main actor” that operates under predetermined conditions in the case of a big hit or a loss. The clock-type accessory 80 is a winning combination for a player when the operation mode of the clock hands 82 of the clock-type accessory 80 and / or the number sector of the clock panel 81 is colored with a predetermined “color and number”. It works to show expectations. For example, the clock hands 82 are configured such that the winning expectation increases in the order of their rotation speeds, for example, “non-rotation, low-speed rotation, high-speed rotation”, and for the clock panel portion (number display portion) 81, It can be configured such that the winning expectation increases in the order of the emission colors of the LEDs in the number sector in the order of white (normal color), blue, yellow, green, red, and danger pattern (D pattern). Further, the winning winning expectation degree can be notified by the combination of the rotational speed of the clock hands 82 and the light emission color of the LED of the number sector in the clock panel (number display unit) 81. For example, the number of winning colors increases in the order of the light emission colors of LEDs in the number sector in the order of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and danger pattern (D pattern). The winning expectation is increased in the order of rotation speed (for example, non-rotation / blue, low-speed rotation / blue, high-speed rotation / blue).

  In the present embodiment, the clock hands 82 of the clock-type accessory 80 continue to rotate at a low speed or at a high speed for a predetermined period during the symbol variation display game, but the clock hands 82 stop during the period. Further, the winning expectation degree may be indicated by the number of the number sector indicated by the short hand of the stopped clock hand 82 or by the number and the color of the number sector to be colored. Further, when the light emission color of the LED of the number sector in the clock board portion (number display portion) 81 emits a rainbow color (premium color), it can be configured so that the big hit confirmation can be notified.

(Second movable body accessory 90)
The second movable body accessory 90 includes a first movable body 91 in which a flower crown A2 including a plurality of petals is arranged around the flower heart A1, and the flower heart A1 and the flower crown A2 can be moved vertically (moved down). And a second movable body 92 configured to attach a bud B1 positioned around the outside of the flower crown A2 to the tip of the stem B2, and to move the bud B1 and the stem B2 in the left-right direction (projecting movement). The In the case of this embodiment, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are located near one side (right side) of the liquid crystal screen and can operate independently of each other.

  When describing the operation mode, the first movable body 91 is normally located at a home position (original position) above the solid line position (a combined position described later) in FIG. 2 with respect to the liquid crystal screen, and the second movable body. 92 is normally located at the home position (original position) on the right side of the solid line position in FIG. 2 with respect to the liquid crystal screen. The first movable body 91 can move independently from the original position above so that the flower crown A2 comes to the solid line position in the upper right of the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 2, and the second movable body 92 independently moves to the right home position ( It is possible to move so that 萼 B1 comes from the original position) to the solid line position in FIG. When both the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 operate simultaneously and move to the solid line position (combined position) in FIG. 2, the corolla A2 and the eyelid B1 are overlapped and merged, and around the floral center A1. A flower crown A2 is arranged on the outside, and a bud B1 is arranged around the outside to form a “flower-shaped part” in which the flower cover is doubled. In this sense, the second movable body accessory 90 is also referred to as a “flower type accessory”.

  The flower-shaped accessory 90 functions as a “sub-object” that operates under predetermined conditions in the case of a big hit or a loss. When the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are combined, the first movable body 91 (flower heart A1 and flower crown A2) rotates at the tip of the stem portion B2 of the second movable body 92 and the translucent flower heart. A1, the corolla A2 and the bud B1 are illuminated from behind by a lamp or a full-color LED and lightly shines beautifully. These actions increase the expectation of winning the game for the player. When the symbol variation display operation is stopped (the symbol variation display game is ended), the flower-shaped accessory 90 returns to the origin position from the effect position (merged position) indicated by the solid line in FIG.

  In the case of this embodiment, the first movable body 91 can be independently moved from the upper original position to the solid line position (merged position) in FIG. 2, and the second movable body 92 is independently moved from the right home position (original position). It can be moved to the solid line position (merged position) in FIG. However, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 may appear or protrude in the liquid crystal screen area and may be combined there. When configured in this way, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are normally stationary at the original position (not shown) defined on the edge inside the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen. However, when a big hit winning ball or a loser winning ball is generated and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable body 91 is moved from the upper side to the lower side, and the second movable body 92 is moved from the right direction to the liquid crystal screen. It moves to an effect position (a position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 2) covering a part of the screen, and both are united. An effect effect with impact is exhibited by the operation mode of such a movable body accessory. Details of the operation mode type (movable body combination operation mode type) of the second movable body accessory 90 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Third movable object)
The third movable body accessory comprises a rotating lamp 62 including a lamp (or LED) 62a as a light source and a reflecting mirror 62b as a reflector that reflects light from the lamp 62a. By rotating, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source is changed. This third movable body accessory acts as an effect means for making a big hit confirmation advance notice (a so-called “one-shot notification effect” for notifying the accuracy). In the case of making one notification, for example, a notification sound (determined sound) is generated simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display game or after a predetermined time, and the rotating lamp 63 is operated for a predetermined time. That is, the lamp 62 a of the rotating lamp 62 continues to be lit and the reflecting mirror 62 b is continuously rotated by the stepping motor 63. Thus, the player can shockly know that the winning game is won before the result of the symbol variation display game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment receives an effect control command from the main control unit (main control means) 20 that performs overall game operation control and the main control unit 20, and receives images, light, and sound. A production control unit (production control unit) 24 for overall control of production operation control (production appearance control for production unit), a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 for performing prize ball payout control, and an external power source A power supply board (power supply control means) 31 that generates and supplies power necessary for the gaming machine from (not shown) is mainly configured. In addition, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. In FIG. 3, the power supply route is omitted.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), a ROM 202 (main control ROM), and a RAM 203 (main control RAM). As a whole, a microcomputer (equivalent to a Z80 system) ).

  The ROM 202 functions as storage means (main control side storage means) for storing game data related to game operation control, and stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. ing. The RAM 203 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter used for a specific lottery (for example, a variation pattern lottery related to a special symbol), and functions as a random number generating means for generating a random number in software.

  Although not shown in the figure, the main control unit 20 provides a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit), which gives a periodic interrupt, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) and a time measurement function to the Z80 system, and a CPU. It also has an interrupt controller circuit, a counter circuit, etc. that exhibit an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal. The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number within a certain range in hardware, and a sampling circuit that samples a random value from the random number generation circuit at a predetermined timing, and as a whole a 16-bit counter work. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, thereby obtaining the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random value (random number size: 65536), and winning the random value Use for lottery.

  The main control unit 20 detects the passage of the upper start opening 34a for detecting the winning to the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening sensor 35a for detecting the winning to the lower start opening 35, and the normal symbol start opening 37. The normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning at the big winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 43, and the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 ( A fraud detection sensor 99 for detecting a goto action) is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these.

  The cheating detection sensor 99 functions as cheating detection means for detecting cheating (going action) with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and although not shown, a vibration sensor (vibration detection means), a magnetic sensor (magnetism detection means) Various sensors such as a radio wave sensor (radio wave detection means) can be included. The main control unit 20 includes abnormality determination means for determining whether an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine based on the detection information from the fraud detection sensor 99.

  These fraud detection sensors are generally placed at the right place in the gaming machine so that fraudulent acts can be detected effectively in consideration of the game characteristics related to pachinko gaming machines and the position of the game board surface. Is done. Based on the detection signal from the fraud detection sensor 99, the main control unit 20 monitors whether or not there has been a fraudulent action, and executes a predetermined error process when it is determined that the fraudulent act has occurred. ing.

  Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. And the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbol. The main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and can transmit a control signal for display control of the normal symbol.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a composite display device 38c, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of various information displayed on the main display unit 38c. The main control unit 20 is connected to a round number display device 39b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of a specified round number by jackpot.

  Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a frame external concentration terminal board 21, and the main control unit 20 provides information on the game progress (for example, jackpot winning information, prize ball number information, symbol variation display game execution number information, etc.). Can be transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21. The hall computer HC is a management computer that manages the operating status of pachinko hall gaming machines based on the above-mentioned information sent from the main controller 20, and is arranged outside the gaming machine.

  The main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information related to the special symbol variation display game and information related to errors to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. Such a production control command from the main control unit 20 is produced by one-way communication in order to prevent an illegal signal due to an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 20 via the production control unit 24. It is transmitted to the control unit 24.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a payout control board (payout control part) 29. The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control part) 28 for controlling the launching device 32, and a game ball payout. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19. The main control unit 20 can send a payout control command (a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. On the other hand, the payout control board 29 can transmit information related to the payout operation state (payout state signal) to the main control unit 20. This payout state signal detects, for example, various detection sensors formed in the game ball payout device 19 (replenishment detection sensors for detecting insufficient supply of game balls and game balls (prize balls) paid out from the game ball payout device 19). State signal such as a payout shortage signal and a prize ball counting signal. Based on the payout state signal, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not the game ball payout device 19 is functioning normally, for example, whether or not the game ball payout device 19 is clogged, and the winning ball is correctly paid out. It is monitored whether or not.

  Further, the dispensing control board 29 can transmit a firing control signal to the firing control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization to a launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the launch control signal, and realizes a game ball launch operation by operating the launch operation handle 15. .

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 includes a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), and is mainly configured by a microcomputer with a ROM 242 (production control ROM) and a RAM 243 (production control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a sound source IC, CTC, and timer interrupt, a counter circuit for generating random numbers in hardware, and the like are provided. The ROM 242 functions as storage means (effect control side storage means) for storing game data related to effect operation control, and stores various data necessary for effect operation control in addition to the effect control program in which the effect control procedure is described. Has been. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for producing an effect is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter for effect lottery random numbers used for effect lottery, and functions as a random number generating means for generating random numbers in software.

  The main roles of the production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection of production based on production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, decorative lamps. 45, light emission control of various LEDs (production LED: not shown), operation control of a movable body accessory, and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit mainly controls an effect (image display effect) by the liquid crystal display device 36, and controls video output processing (VDP) that controls overall image output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and VDP. The image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) for image development processing, the VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data developed by the VDP, and the control necessary for the VDP to perform display control A liquid crystal control CPU that outputs data, a liquid crystal control ROM that stores a program describing display control operation procedures of the liquid crystal control CPU and various data necessary for the display control, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory And it is composed around.

  In addition to the image display effect, the effect control unit 24 displays a light effect, a sound effect, a movable object effect by a movable object, etc. Part) 81 and an optical display control unit for the optical display device 45a including various LEDs, an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, various movable body accessories (clock-type accessory 80, flower type) A driving control unit (motor driving circuit) for the movable body accessory motors 61, 61a, 61b, and 63 for operating the accessory 90, the rotating lamp 62, and the like. The production control unit 24 can transmit control signals related to the production means to these control units.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection switch 97 for the clock hand 82 and position detection switches 97a and 97b for the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 of the flower-shaped accessory 90. 24 can receive detection signals from these. The effect control unit 24 controls the operation mode while monitoring the current operation position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position) of the movable body accessory based on the detection signals from the position detection switches 97, 97a, 97b. In addition, the malfunction of the movable body accessory (whether or not it is a normal operation (for example, whether or not it has correctly returned to the origin position after the operation)) is monitored.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a frame effect button 13 that can be operated by the player, and the effect control unit 24 can receive an operation detection signal from the frame effect button 13.

  The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and controls various effect means at a necessary timing. Then, make the desired production appear. Thereby, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking driving of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns are developed in time series. As a result, a “direction scenario” in a broad sense is realized.

  The effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and an event (EVENT) of 1-byte length. In order to distinguish MODE from EVENT, MODE Bit 7 is Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time elapses from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after the elapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second time of the strobe signal is transmitted after the elapse of the predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (production control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process executed periodically). Even in such a case, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol change display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, the main control unit 20 The “big hit lottery” is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner to start the special symbol variation display game. Derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning to the upper start opening 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning to the lower start opening 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the big hit lottery result regarding the upper start port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result regarding the lower start port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that a game ball has entered the upper start opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the lower start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol variation display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game in the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, if the big win lottery result is “big hit” after the predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the predetermined “big hit” is given. In this mode, in other cases, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined “losing” mode, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived and displayed.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, “special symbol 1” and “special symbol 2” are simply referred to as “special symbols” (sometimes abbreviated as “special symbol”), and “special symbol variation display game 1” and “special symbol” The symbol variation display game 2 ”is simply referred to as“ special symbol variation display game ”.

  In addition, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying the decorative symbol (proactive game symbol) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Various developments are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorated design is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning ornamental symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

  Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is “big hit” (when the big hit lottery result is “hit”), the decoration symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. In the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol is a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right”. In each display area of “”, the display pattern in which the decorative symbol reflects “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” display areas, the three decorative symbols are “7”, “7”, “ 7 ”display state).

  When this “big hit” is reached, specifically, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated accordingly. As a result, the symbol pattern of “hit” is derived and displayed. Thereafter, the special prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable prize-winning device 52 is actuated to open and close the open door 52b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby opening and closing the special prize opening 50, and from the normal gaming state. However, a special game state (big hit game) advantageous to the player occurs. In this jackpot game, the number of game balls that have won a prize at the big prize opening (the big prize opening) until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) elapses by the opening door 52b. 50 (the number of winning balls) is a predetermined number (maximum number of winnings: the maximum number of winning balls allowed for an opened winning opening is increased by one operation of an accessory: for example, 9) Until the value reaches the predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 15 rounds) where the winning area is opened or expanded and the big winning opening is closed when either of these conditions is met. Round) repeated. The condition for closing the special winning opening 50 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time of the special winning opening or only based on the number of game balls won in the special winning opening. Also good.

  When the jackpot game is started, an opening effect for informing that the jackpot is started is performed first, and after the opening effect is finished, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. Then, after the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending effect for notifying that the jackpot is finished is performed, and thereby the jackpot game is finished. That is, the jackpot game is roughly composed of game periods of an opening effect, a round game, and an ending effect. However, the round game execution period excluding the opening effect period and the ending effect period in the closed state of the big prize opening may be regarded as a big hit game period.

  Regarding the information necessary for the execution of the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 is based on the fact that a game ball enters (wins) the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35. Whether the game is detected by the upper start sensor 34a or the lower start sensor 35a and the start condition (the start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, whether the game is “big hit” or “lost” 'Lottery lottery (win / fail type lottery)', and if it is a 'big hit', the big hit type is drawn, and if it is 'losing', the lottery type is drawn. A big hit lottery including 'is performed, and based on the lottery result information, a variation pattern of the special symbol and a special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as the effect control command for specifying the processing state, a “variation pattern designation command” including at least the change pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information on the winning lottery result information, the change time of the special symbol, etc.) is provided on the effect control unit 24 side. Send to. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, in order to enrich the production variations, the “decorative design designation command” including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information (information on the hit type)) is also transmitted to the production control unit 24. ing.

  The special symbol variation pattern information may include information designating the occurrence of a specific notice effect (such as a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect described later). To explain in detail, the fluctuation patterns of special symbols are broadly divided into “winning fluctuation pattern” in the case of winning and “losing fluctuation pattern” in the case of losing according to the winning lottery result or the big win lottery result. Examples of the variation pattern include a variation pattern for specifying a reach effect (reach variation pattern) that specifies the occurrence of a reach effect, a variation pattern for specifying a non-reach effect (normal variation pattern) that does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect, Fluctuation pattern for designating pseudo-continuous productions that specify combined generation of production and reach production (variation for designating pseudo-continuous productions that specify the generation of pseudo-continuous reach variation patterns, the generation of pseudo-continuous productions, and not the generation of reach productions Multiple types of variation patterns are included, such as patterns (normal variation patterns with pseudo-continuations), and the variation time for each variation pattern Basically, the reach variation pattern type is a variation pattern that specifies reach production or pseudo-continuous production that wins the expectation of winning big wins, so the variation time is longer than the normal variation pattern in relation to the production time. It has been established.

  The effect control unit 24 performs time series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. Deciding the contents to be developed (effect scenario) and the decoration pattern (decoration stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the decoration pattern fluctuation display game by changing the decoration symbols according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbols Is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols by the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game are in progress. Are substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED, etc. are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the passing (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37, “main lottery” is performed by the random number lottery in the main control unit 20. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol displayed on the LED is displayed in a normal symbol display device 39a in a variable manner to start a normal symbol variation display game. After a certain period of time, the result is converted into a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is “per assistance”, the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is turned on in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are on, or “O” and “ The display is stopped when the “○” side LED among the LEDs representing “x” is in a lighting state).

  When this "subsidiary hit" is reached, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, thereby opening the movable blade 47 in a reverse "C" shape and opening the lower start port 35. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to enter a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (opening opening state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as “general power open game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this open electric game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 won the open time of the lower start opening 35 until a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses or the lower start opening 35 was won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when one of these conditions is satisfied, the lower start opening 35 is closed a predetermined number of times (for example, , Up to 2 times). The condition for closing the lower start opening 35 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the lower start opening, or only based on the number of game balls won in the lower start opening. Also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are provided a plurality of types of “per assistance (1 to 3 per assistance)” having different contents of the open-circuit game. Specifically, when “1 per assist” is selected (two “◯” LEDs are lit), the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (the operating time during which the lower starting port 35 is opened by the movable blade piece 47) Is set long (for example, 5.8 seconds through open time: long open (long open)), and when “2 per assist” is won (one “○” LED on the left is lit), lower start port The opening time of 35 is set to be shorter than 3 per assistance (for example, 1.0 second through the opening time: middle opening (middle opening)), and when “3 per assistance” is won (one “○ on the right side” "LED is lit", and the opening time of the lower start port 35 is set to be shorter than 2 per assist (for example, 0.2 seconds through the opening time: short opening (short opening)). In other words, the benefits per 1 to 3 per assistance are different depending on the length of the opening time of the lower start opening 35 (the winning rate to the lower start opening 35) given to the player.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the regular symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the open-circuit game, the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35 or the normal symbol start port 37, when a winning occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start sensor 34a, the lower start sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied As a data relating to the right to start the variable display game, except for the data related to the variable display, the maximum storage number (for example, a maximum of four) which is a predetermined upper limit value is reserved and stored. . The on-hold hold data that has not been subjected to the symbol variation display operation or a game ball related to the hold data is also referred to as an “operation hold ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a holding provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the indicator.

  Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls relating to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are held as the fixed number of times of change of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reserve memory number) of the number of the operation reservation balls regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited, and the maximum reserve memory number of each symbol may be different (for example, The maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 1 side is 4, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 2 side is 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the normal symbol side is 6, etc.). Moreover, regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the symbol side where the profit obtained by the big hit lottery is relatively high may be set. In this embodiment, the jackpot lottery related to the special symbol 2 is configured to obtain a jackpot type that is relatively profitable for the player. For example, the maximum number of reserved memory on the special symbol 1 side is two. The maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 2 side may be set to 4 more than that.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the jackpot that is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a “probability variation (hereinafter, abbreviated as“ probability variation ”) function” that the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) serves as a function unit. There are two types, a probability changing function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol probability changing function”) and a probability changing function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol probability changing function”).

  The special symbol probability changing function changes the probability of winning a lottery from a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/3 of 19.9). Is a function that generates an advantageous “high probability state”. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the big hit lottery probability is high, so that the big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming state expected by the player is a gaming state in which this special symbol probability changing function is operating. The details of the operation start condition and the operation end condition of the special symbol probability changing function will be described later.

  The normal symbol probability changing function changes the low probability (for example, 2/256) from the low probability (for example, 2/256) that the lottery probability per auxiliary is a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a higher probability (for example, 255/256) than the normal gaming state. This is a function for generating an advantageous “probability change state per auxiliary”. Under the game state in which this normal symbol probability changing function is operating (probability per assist change state), since the lottery probability per auxiliary is in a high probability state, auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and open-game games frequently occur. Thus, the operating rate is improved so that the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol probability changing function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time-shortening function described later, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time-shortening function. This is the same condition as the operation end condition.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a “variable time reduction (hereinafter referred to as“ time reduction ”) function” that the main control unit 20 takes on as a function unit. There are two types of time-shortening functions relating to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol time-shortening functions”) and time-shortening functions relating to ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol time-shortening functions”).

  The special symbol time reduction function shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed (average fluctuation time of the special symbol)). This is a function that generates a special symbol short-time state. Under the gaming state in which the special symbol time reduction function is activated (special symbol short time state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the variation without reach) Is reduced from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), a lottery number improvement state is achieved in which the number of big lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the special symbol short-time state does not occur, This is due to the control process.

  The normal symbol time shortening function is the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of normal symbols to the final display (average fluctuation time of normal symbols)) This is a function to generate a shortened "normal symbol time short state". Under the game state in which the normal symbol short-time function is activated (normal symbol short-time state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 10 seconds to 1 second). In other words, the number of lotteries is improved so that the number of lotteries per auxiliary time per unit time is improved as compared with the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the normal symbol short-time state does not occur. This is due to the control process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol short-time function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol short-time function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol short-time function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as a function unit.

  The open extension function is a function for generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time and the number of opening times of the movable blade piece 47) of the movable blade piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 is extended. is there. This open extended state is referred to as a so-called “electric chew support state”. Under the gaming state (open extended state) in which the open extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, for example. The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from once (when the opening extension function is not in operation) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved so that the operating rate is improved. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same condition as the operation start condition of the special symbol time shortening function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time shortening function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions. Therefore, during the open extended state, the normal symbol probability changing function and the normal symbol time-shortening function also act, so that a gaming state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved occurs.

  By operating one or more types of the functions as described above, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Here, in this embodiment, the operation start conditions of the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function, so each function operates at the same opportunity. Will do. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function, the special symbol time shortening function, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time shortening function, and the open extension function are referred to as “probability changing state”. A gaming state from which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is referred to as a “short-time state”, and a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability changing function is activated is referred to as a “latent probability varying state (latent probability or latent probability state)”, and not all functions are in operation. The (non-operating) state is referred to as “normal gaming state”. Therefore, when paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, if the gaming state is “short-time state” or “normal gaming state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “low probability state” and the gaming state becomes “latency probability”. In the case of “state” or “probability change state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. In addition, during the big hit related to the condition device operation, a winning game is generated when the big prize opening is opened and closed, but all the functions are deactivated for the above functions, and basically the same gaming state as the normal gaming state described above Placed below.

(3-2-1. High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function. Will operate at the same opportunity. However, when attention is paid to the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time-shortening function, and the open extension function, respectively, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operating rate of the movable blade piece 47 is improved. Since the operating rate is improved and the winning frequency at the lower start opening 35 is increased, the gaming condition is that the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the big win lottery result is higher than the normal gaming state. "Base gaming state (starting condition improved state)". The “high base gaming state” here refers to a gaming state when a function relating to a normal symbol is activated, and a function relating to a special symbol, that is, at least one of a special symbol probability changing function and a special symbol time-shortening function is activated. It is different from the game state when doing.

  On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol short-time function) individually, when the above special symbol probability changing function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state” which is higher than the normal gaming state. When the special symbol short-time function is activated, the special symbol variation display game has a “special symbol short-time state” in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is earlier than the normal gaming state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the “high base gaming state” in which the starting frequency of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, as an example of the “high base game state”, an electric chew support state to which at least an extension function is provided is treated as a “high base game state”. Under the electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normally variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Therefore, the game state is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the electronic chew support state is not set (low base game state). Focusing on the presence / absence of the electric chew support state, if the game state is “normal game state” or “latent probability state”, “no electric chew support state” (hereinafter referred to as “no electric support state”) is obtained. When the game state is “time-short state” or “probability change state”, the state is “electric chew support state present (hereinafter referred to as“ electric support state ”)”. In addition, the gaming state that pays attention to the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support Is referred to as “internal gaming state”.

  Here, in this embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal game state, one internal game state is further classified and managed. For example, the probability change states include a plurality of types of probability change states such as “first half of ST” and “second half of ST”, and are managed as different game states. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the probability variation state is terminated when the number of executions of the symbol variation display game is completed 84 times without winning a jackpot, and “ST” “First half” means that the symbol variation display game has 77 rotations from the start of the probability variation state, and “second half of ST” means that after the 77 rotations of the first half of ST, the symbol variation display game has 7 rotations that are the remaining number of times of the probability variation state. Refers to the game period until the end.

  As a result, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability or the presence or absence of electric support, etc. When paying attention to the “gaming state”, the special symbol variation pattern is the same “probability variation state”, but the game states “variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern to be described later) regarding“ first half of ST ”and“ second half of ST ”. The target variation pattern can be selected from among the variation pattern types (one or a plurality of types of variation patterns) corresponding to the distribution designation number (Tcode)) (see FIG. 27).

  Further, due to this, on the production control unit 24 side, “first half of ST (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)“ 01H ”)” and “second half of ST (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)“ 02H ”). The production mode corresponding to “)” is provided, and the production under the production mode can be executed. Details of the production mode, the transition conditions of each gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol designating the content of the production will be described later.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the types of the “internal gaming state” include a normal gaming state (normal state) and a probability variation state, a gaming state (variation pattern selection mode) relating to determination of a variation pattern of a special symbol, In this case, the types of “variation pattern selection mode” when focusing on the determination of the production include “normal state”, “first half of ST”, and “second half of ST”, which are larger than the types of internal gaming state. In this way, the “internal gaming state” when focusing on each function related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of electric support, and the “gaming state ( By managing the “variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)))” as different, the variation pattern distribution designation number even under the same internal gaming state (for example, the probability variation state). A special symbol variation pattern corresponding to (for example, the first half of ST and the second half of ST) can be selected. As a result, the variation time of the symbol variation display game (game digestion time) and effects related thereto can be greatly changed, and variations of effects under the same internal gaming state can be enriched. For convenience of explanation, unless otherwise specified in this specification, the game state (variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern change mode) when focusing on the above-mentioned internal gaming state and the determination of the variation pattern of special symbols (decision of production)) In some cases, it is simply referred to as “gaming state” without distinction from the minute designation number (Tcode))).

<4. About winning>
Next, “winning” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. Type per hit)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs a big hit lottery (win lottery) for multiple types of hits. The hit types include multiple types of hits such as “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “4R probability variation big hit”, and the like. Although not shown, at least one “small hit” can be included.

  Among these hits, “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, and “4R probability variation big hit” are hits belonging to the “big hit” type that triggers the operation of the condition device, and “small hit” is the operation trigger of the condition device. It is a hit that belongs to the “non-big hit” type. Here, the “condition device” is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, in which a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or a game ball is displayed. The one that operates when it passes a specific area in the big prize opening. Each of the hits belonging to the above-mentioned “big hit” type and the hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type (small hits) both have an opportunity to shift to a special gaming state (winning game) with opening / closing operation of the big prize opening (occurrence trigger) It is a hit. Therefore, hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type are different from simple “losing”.

  Among the hits belonging to the above-mentioned type of “big hit”, “15R-probable big hit”, “10R-probable big hit”, and “4R-probable big hit” are game states that have at least a high-probability state (this book) In the embodiment, the jackpot belongs to the “probability jackpot” to be shifted to the probability changing state). The “small hit” is a hit type for continuing the gaming state at the time of winning. The “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type, but for convenience of explanation, unless otherwise necessary, it is treated as one of the big hit types in the same row without being distinguished from the above big hit.

(4-2. Per game)
Next, the winning game based on each hit described above will be described.

(4-2-1.15R winning game with a promising big hit)
A winning game with 15R probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15R probability variable jackpot game") is a big hit with a specified number of rounds of 15 rounds. The time is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long open time”. Here, the “long open time” means that there is a possibility that the number of winnings in the big winning opening within the time will reach the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) (the possibility of reaching the maximum number of winnings is sufficient). It is determined as a time span.

  After the round game is started and the grand prize opening 50 is opened, when the above maximum opening time elapses, the big prize opening 50 is closed and the current round game is finished, and the prescribed round number of 15 rounds is reached. If not, after a predetermined time (interval between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. However, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, if the number of game balls (the number of winning balls) won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, nine), the big winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game is over and a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. In other words, when the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed, or when the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the opened big prize opening is met Is closed and the game is shifted to the next round game with a predetermined interval time (10R probability variable big hit game described later (10R probability variable big hit game), 4R probability variable big hit winning game (4R probability variable change) The same applies to jackpot games).

  The above-mentioned “interval time between rounds” between round games is “remaining ball discharge time” and “interval time before opening” after the remaining ball discharge time elapses until the next round game starts. Consists of. The above “remaining ball discharge time” refers to an extra time (for example, 1980 ms) for discharging the remaining balls inside the big winning opening after the closing of the big winning opening. As the time width, the big winning opening is closed. Sufficient time is required until the game ball won immediately before passing through a winning detection switch (large winning opening sensor 52a) formed in the large winning opening. Also, the “interval before opening” means that after the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time has passed and the remaining balls in the big winning opening are considered discharged, the big winning opening in the next round game is released. A time width (for example, 20 ms) that defines the interval interval. Even if the big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball during the pre-opening interval, the game ball is regarded as an illegal prize due to an illegal act and is treated as invalid.

(4-2-2.10R winning game with a promising big hit)
The winning game with 10R probability variable big hit (hereinafter referred to as “10R probability variable big hit game”) is the same as the content of the 15R probability variable big hit game described above except that the prescribed number of rounds is ten. Therefore, the 10R probability variable big hit game is a big hit game to which a relatively lower profit is given than the 15R probability variable big hit game (in this embodiment, there is a difference in the number of winning balls for five rounds).

(4-2-2-3.4R winning game with a probable big hit)
The winning game by 4R probability variable big hit (hereinafter referred to as “4R probability variable big hit game”) is the same as the contents of the 15R probability variable big hit game and the 10R probability variable big hit game described above, except that the specified number of rounds is four. Therefore, the 4R probability variable big hit game is a big hit game to which a relatively lower profit is given than the 15R probability variable big hit game or the 10R probability variable big hit game.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots having different numbers of prescribed rounds are provided, and thereby the profit state (for example, the number of prize balls that a player can obtain during the jackpot game) is configured to be different. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. By setting the maximum opening time of the big prize opening to different opening times according to the type of jackpot, or depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum number of winning prizes is set to a different number. By setting, the profit state by the big hit game may be varied. For example, there are multiple types of jackpots with the same number of rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to a long opening time for one jackpot game and shorter than that for other jackpot games. Time (eg, 10 seconds) "can be set. In addition, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to the first maximum winning number (for example, 9) in one big win game, and the second maximum winning number (for example, smaller than that in the other big winning game, for example, 4).

(4-3. Playing state after winning game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the gaming state to be transferred after each winning game will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state that shifts after each winning game.

(Game state after 4-3-1.15R probable big hit game ends)
After the 15R probability variation big hit game, as shown in the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the win, it shifts to the “probability changed state”. In this “probable change state”, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of special symbol variation display operations (hereinafter abbreviated as “special symbol variation frequency”) is a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, The total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (total variation number of the special symbols 1 and 2)): for example, 84 times) until the end or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times ("big hit “Until it is confirmed” may be when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (or after it is confirmed and displayed), or may be a case where a big win is won by a big win lottery. When the special symbol variation display game is finished without the big hit being determined within the predetermined number of times and the special symbol variation display game is terminated, the probability variation state is terminated, and the next game starts “normal (internal game). State is adapted to be shifts to the normal game state) ".

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not win a big hit (except for “small win” that does not trigger an internal gaming state transition) after the game state has a jackpot lottery probability of at least a high probability. When the special symbol variation display game is finished a predetermined number of times, the high probability state is terminated and the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a low probability (the number cut probability variation machine (ST machine)). Hereinafter, the upper limit number of the special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation number) in which the high probability state is continued is referred to as “specified ST number” as necessary.

(4-3-2.10R, gaming state after 4R probability variation big hit game)
After 10R probability variation big hit game or 4R probability variation big hit game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the win, the game state transitions to the “probability changed state”. It is the same as the case.

  When “small hit” is provided, after the small hit game, the internal gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is. That is, the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small win is not performed. For this reason, both the internal game state at the time of winning the small hit and the internal game state after the small hit game are the same internal game state. This is different from “big hit” in which the transition control of the internal gaming state can be performed. In addition, while the transition control of the “internal gaming state” due to the small win is not performed, the “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) ))) 'Transition control can be performed. If such a transition mode is used, for example, when the gaming state after the small hit game and the gaming state after the other big hit game are shifted to the same gaming state (variation pattern selection mode), the same effect is obtained on both sides. It can be made to stay in the production mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the “short-time state” is not generated even if any jackpot is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, another big hit (non-probability variable big hit: short time big hit) that generates a “time-short state” after the big hit game may be provided. In this case, as a condition for ending the short-time state, for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is a predetermined number (for example, the same number (for example, 84 times) or a different number of times (for example, 100 times) It can be a condition until the end or until the big hit is confirmed or won within the predetermined number of times. Further, the number of prescribed rounds of the above “short-time hit” is not particularly limited and can be determined as appropriate.

  Further, another big hit (latency big hit) that generates a latent state after the big hit game may be provided. In this case, as a condition for ending the latent probability state, for example, until the number of times of execution of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 84 times the same as the number of times the probability variation state continues), or within the predetermined number of times It can be a condition until the big hit is confirmed or won. Further, the number of prescribed rounds of the “latency probability hit” is not particularly limited and can be determined as appropriate.

  In this embodiment, at least when the game is shifted to the high probability state, the special symbol variation display game is executed until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (the number of specified STs), or the big hit is confirmed or won in the predetermined number of times. It was explained that the high probability state continues until However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other jackpots (non-ST probability variable jackpots) that maintain a high probability state until the next jackpot is confirmed or won regardless of the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game may be provided. . In addition, there may be provided a “normal jackpot” that does not give any benefit after winning a game and is a trigger for transition to a normal gaming state.

  In addition, “ST probability change big hit” that becomes a transition opportunity to the “number cut probability change state” like the probability change big hit of this embodiment, “latent probability big hit” that becomes a transition opportunity to the above-mentioned small hit and latent state, One or more types of “time and big jackpots” that trigger the transition, “non-ST probability jackpots” that trigger the transition to the non-ST probability change state, and “normal jackpots” that trigger the transition to the normal gaming state must be included. It is possible to freely determine which hit is provided according to game play (for example, a plurality of types of probability variation hits, one type of latent probability hits, one type of time-short hits, etc.). In addition, in what game state and internal game state, what game state and internal game state to shift to when a big win is won can be appropriately determined according to game characteristics.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, an effect mode (effect state) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes that provide effects related to the gaming state, and is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. Specifically, in the above-mentioned production mode, the “normal production mode” that produces an effect related to this during the “normal state” stay, and the “probability production mode” that produces the production related to this during the “probable change state” stay. A plurality of types of effect modes corresponding to each gaming state are provided. In the case of the present embodiment, in the “probability change effect mode”, effects related to “first half ST mode (first probability change effect mode)” and effects related to “second half ST” appear. "ST latter half production mode (second probability variation production mode)" is included.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) includes a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) designates a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the current gaming state (including the internal gaming state), or the gaming state Including information related to the gaming state managed by the main control unit side such as “designating that the game is to be transferred” (for example, a specific production control command (for example, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a gaming state designation command, Main control unit 20 side based on a short-time end command, a predetermined command transmitted during a hit (such as “big hit start interval command (big hit start command)”, “big hit end interval command (big hit end command)”)) In a form that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed in the above, the transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes is possible. The production control unit 24 has a function unit (production state management means) for managing the production mode related to the gaming state. The production control unit 24 (production state management means) grasps the internal game state and variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) managed on the main control unit 20 side by the specific production control command, and the main control unit The production mode can be managed while maintaining consistency with the 20 side.

  In each production mode, the above-mentioned “normal production mode”, “first ST production mode”, and “second half of ST” are provided so that it is possible to grasp the player's stay in the production mode corresponding to the game state. In each “effect mode”, the background display (background effect) as the background of the decorative symbol variation display screen is switched to a different background effect. For example, under the “normal effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season 'winter' (for example, a background effect that displays a background image of a snowy mountain: the fourth background effect) or a background effect reminiscent of the season 'spring' (for example, A background effect that displays the background image of the cherry tree: the first effect is switched to the first effect, and the background effect is reminiscent of the season 'summer' under the “first half effect mode” (for example, a background that displays a sea background image) Production: second background production) and under the “ST second half production mode”, a background production reminiscent of the season 'Autumn' (for example, a background production displaying a background image of autumnal leaves: a third background production) Each is controlled to switch, and this suggests the skill state during the stay.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “background effect” is not limited to suggesting a game state, but a decorative pattern of a different pattern corresponding to each effect mode (for example, the normal effect mode is a Chinese numeral, the first ST effect mode is a Roman numeral, In the ST second half effect mode, a game state can be suggested by using a decorative pattern displaying Greek numerals) or changing a sound effect or a light effect.

  In addition, in the case where the above-mentioned short and large hits and latent big hits are provided so that transition to other game states such as a short time state and a latent state is possible, an effect mode for making effects related to these game states may be provided. (For example, a time reduction effect mode, a latent effect effect mode, etc.). Also, when the above-mentioned short and big hits, latent big hits, small hits, etc. are provided, in order to conceal the internal gaming state such as the probability of the big hit lottery probability, for example, the performance modes after the short and big hits and after other probable big hits are the same It can comprise so that transfer control is possible to production mode (secret production mode).

  Specifically, when the internal game state is “normal game state” and “win / short time hit” is won, the game state can be shifted to “first ST effect mode” after the short time hit game and the internal game state can be concealed. it can. In this case, after the symbol variation display game is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, after 77 times that will be transferred to the second half of ST), the mode is changed to the “time reduction effect mode” that produces an effect related to the time reduction state. The player can be notified that the time has been shortened. In addition, since the entity of the “first half staging mode” after the time-short hit is not the real “first half staging mode” after the probable big hit, it is the “first half staging mode” of Gase. “ST first half production mode”. Focusing on this point, the probability of occurrence of a specific effect (expected effect) is different between the “real ST first half production mode (high accuracy)” and the “gase ST first half production mode (low accuracy)”. In addition, it may be configured to give the player an inference element as to whether or not the state is a high probability state.

(5-2. Production means)
In addition, various effects by the pachinko gaming machine 1 are displayed by the rendering means provided in the gaming machine. Such directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means that can exert a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, and tactile sensations. Light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45 and an LED device, a speaker 46, and the like Sound generating device, production display device such as the liquid crystal display device 36, the first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory 80), the second movable body accessory (flower-type accessory 90), and the third movable A movable body such as a body accessory (rotary lamp 62), a vibration device that transmits vibration to the operator's body, a wind pressure device that applies a wind pressure to the player's body, or a visual presentation effect is exhibited by its operation. A movable body accessory is a representative example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eye like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes an image-independent display device (for example, a 7-segment display). The term “image display device” refers mainly to a type that produces an effect by displaying an image, and a device that produces an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device. In addition, the operation of the frame effect button 13 (manual operation means) is not performed in a specific period (for example, a predetermined operation effective period during the notice effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for winning a big hit) in an inoperable state (for example, the frame effect) The button 13 may not be pressed), or a special effect unit that is placed in an operation difficult state (for example, it is difficult to press the frame effect button 13) may be provided. An apparatus may be provided.

<6. Notice production>
Next, the notice effect will be described. The effect control unit 24, under the above-described effect mode, the contents of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, the variation pattern information included in at least the variation pattern designation command (for example, winning lottery result, reach effect) On the basis of the presence / absence of the symbol and the variation time of the special symbol, etc.), a function unit (preliminary appearance appearance control means) that controls various notice effects related to the effect mode and the jackpot lottery result is provided. The notice appearance appearance control means of the present embodiment includes information included in the “variation pattern designation command” and / or “decoration symbol designation command” (for example, winning lottery result information, presence / absence of reach production, special stop symbol type information (hit Based on the classification information), the special symbol variation time information, etc.), various announcement effects can be controlled.

  Such a notice effect mode suggests (notifies) the reliability or expectation level (hereinafter referred to as “winning expectation degree”) of whether or not the winning type has been won, and the player's winning expectation to the winning type It works as a “scoring effect” to give a sense of feeling (expectation of winning per win). Typical examples of the notice effect include “reach effect”, “pseudo-continuous effect”, “prefetching notice effect”, “notice effect using color elements (character notice effect, cut-in notice effect)”, “ Sound production associated with color elements ”.

  The “winning expectation degree” varies depending on the appearance rate (selection rate) of the performance and the gaming state. For example, the degree of expectation of winning a win in a reach production, which will be described later, mainly changes depending on the appearance rate (selection rate) of the reach production. Specifically, the expectation of winning a win when one reach effect (for example, SP reach) appears is the ratio of the reach effect including the time of a big win and the loss (total appearance rate of the reach effect) ) In the case of a big hit, it is indicated by the ratio (the appearance rate of the reach effect at the time of winning). In other words, the winning degree expectation level for the reach production is indicated by “appearance rate of the reach production at the time of winning / total appearance rate of the reach production”. The selection rate for reach production is set. Hereinafter, the notice effect according to the present embodiment will be described.

(6-1. Reach production)
The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode with a reach state (variable display mode with a reach state: reach change pattern). Specifically, a final game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. Such a production aspect. This “reach state” means that some of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the middle of the decorative symbol variation display game will generate a big hit (winning win) before the result of the decorative symbol variation display game is derived. It is a display mode in which a decorative pattern that has not yet been derived and displayed is displayed in a state that constitutes a part of the display mode to be displayed, in other words, a display mode that indicates the occurrence of jackpot is easy to be derived A variation display mode that can be reminiscent of a player (that there is a possibility of winning a big hit). For example, when the combination of decorative symbols indicating the occurrence of a big hit (winning winning) is “7 (left symbol)”, “7 (middle symbol)”, and “7 (right symbol)”, the decorative symbol is displayed on a predetermined hit effective line. A part of the display mode indicating that the jackpot has been generated (winning win) (for example, “7” is displayed for the left symbol and the right symbol) )) The decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed (here, the middle symbol that does not form the hearing state (reach symbol)) is stopped, oscillated, enlarged or reduced, or deformed continuously for a predetermined period of time. The state where the possibility of big hits continues before the result is displayed and the state. Therefore, even if the reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol variation display game does not necessarily become “big hit”, but the finally derived result is a stop display mode (for example, “7 (Left symbol) "" 7 (middle symbol) "" 7 (right symbol) "), the game result of this time is" lost ".

  The above “reach production” is a notice (suggestion) of the degree of expectation of winning a win (there is a possibility of a big win (including the fact that it will be a big win)). Reach production is included. For example, when a specific reach effect appears, there is a case in which a winning expectation degree is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect ('normal reach (N reach) effect) appears. Such a specific reach production is called 'super reach (SP reach)'. Many of these “SP reach” have a relatively long production time (fluctuation time) than N reach in order to win a winning expectation to win.

  Such “reach production” includes N reach and SP reach via the reach state as described above, as well as passing from the N reach to the SP reach, or from one SP reach to another SP reach (one Step-up reach production (development type reach production) that gradually develops to SP reach that has a higher expectation of winning than SP reach). In addition, the “reach production” is dressed like a non-reach production (so-called “normal fluctuation”) that does not go through the reach state, and gives the player an impression of loss fluctuation, but the final derived result (decoration pattern) ) Is a stop display mode that indicates a big hit, a reach effect that suddenly strikes the player's intention (sudden hit reach effect), a predetermined fluctuation time, a big hit, via or without a reach state A premium reach effect (full-reach reach effect) in which a variable display is performed while maintaining the display mode (win display mode) indicating and a big win winning decision (predetermined) is announced with the variable display ) Can be included.

  The reach effects of this embodiment are provided with the following types of reach effects. First, when the reach production is roughly classified, the “N reach type (N reach 1-2), SP reach type (SP reach A, SP), which is exclusively used during normal times, according to the gaming state (fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)). (Reach B, SP reach C, special reach (full rotation reach)) ”,“ during ST reach D, E, F, G ”, etc. are provided (see FIGS. 30 and 31).

  The degree of expectation of winning winning in the reach production varies mainly depending on the selection rate of the reach production and the gaming state. For example, among the normal reach types, it is related to the big win lottery result so that the winning winning expectation is high in the relationship of “N reach 1 <reach N2 <SP reach A <SP reach B <SP reach C <special reach”. The selection rate (appearance rate) is determined. Also, for example, in the second half of the ST, the selection rate (in relation to the big win lottery result so that the winning winning expectation is high in the relationship of “reach during ST E <reach F during ST <reach G during ST”). (Incidence rate) is defined. In the first half of ST, a single reach production “reach D during ST” is selected (see FIGS. 36 and 37).

  The actual winning expectation degree may change depending on whether other notice effects (for example, a pre-notice effect, a post-notice effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, which will be described later) are accompanied. For this reason, for example, even when the SP reach A appears, if a notice effect with a high level of expectation for winning wins is involved, a win expectation degree equivalent to or higher than the SP reach B can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, when a reach effect appears, specifically, in the case of an effect scenario including a reach effect (in the case of an effect mode based on a reach variation pattern), a predetermined effect time width after the reach state is formed. Occurs during the reach stage after reaching the end of the reach stage through the “reach title stage” that occurs during the “reach title stage” and the “reaching stage” stage that occurs after the reach title stage. After the “design temporary stop state” of the decorative symbol to be finished is finished, the game result is derived and displayed, and thereby the symbol variation display game is finished.

  The “reach title production” refers to the production time width (for example, 4 seconds) of the “reach title production” that occurs in a predetermined production time width after the reach state is formed, and “reach production” means the reach title production. This refers to the production time span of “reach production” that will be started later. The production period of this reach production is provided with a production time width according to the reach type. In the above “reach title”, for example, a title screen for notifying what kind of reach effect is generated this time is displayed, and after the title screen is displayed for a predetermined time, the corresponding reach effect is executed. (Appears)

  Further, the “symbol temporary stop state” is the stage before the end of the reach effect and before the end of the decorative symbol variation display game (before the special symbol is fixedly displayed on the special symbol display device: FIG. In step S451, before the elapse of the special symbol accessory operation timer, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (design temporary stop state) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). In terms of performance, the game result of the current symbol variation display game is derived and displayed in this symbol temporary stop state, and the symbol variation display game (decorated symbol variation display game) is terminated after the symbol temporary stop state is completed. . However, in the “symbol temporarily stopped state”, the result of the current symbol variation display game is not necessarily derived and displayed. For example, when the “SP reach type” or “ST reach type” in the case where the big hit lottery result is a win, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a lost state (lost stop display mode) is temporarily displayed in the temporary stop state of the symbols. However, there is a case where a combination of decorative symbols (hit stop display mode) finally showing a big hit is derived and displayed as a game result (so-called “revival effect”). By using such an effect mode, a final game result can be obtained by configuring a movable object effect “both” as shown in FIG. 41 described later as a notice effect in the “design temporary stop state”. Until the symbol is derived and displayed (until the symbol variation display game is finished), the player can be given a win-winning expectation. Thus, when a reach effect occurs, the player can have a winning expectation until the final game result is derived and displayed, thereby improving the fun of the game. The “symbol temporarily stopped state” described above is different from a temporarily stopped state of a decorative symbol related to a “pseudo-continuous effect” described later (during the symbol temporary stop before the decorative symbol re-displaying operation).

  When the N reach type appears as an effect scenario (effect mode) related to the current symbol variation display game when the reach effect appears, at least “in the reach title” and “in the N reach ( When the SP reach type is displayed, it includes at least “in the reach title” and “in the SP reach” (in the SP reach production). ) ”And“ design temporary stop state ”. When the ST reach type appears, at least “in the reach title”, “during ST reach (during ST reach)”, and “design temporary stop state”, as in the SP reach type described above. It consists of production scenarios that include it.

  In this specification, for the convenience of explanation, “ST reach (during ST reach production)” of the ST reach type is handled in the same row as “SP reach (during SP reach production)” of the SP reach type. To do. Therefore, for example, the “SP reach” column shown in FIGS. 38 to 40 described later corresponds to the (acting object operation timing type), and the “ST reach” effect period corresponds to the ST reach type.

  In the above, the reach effect according to the present embodiment has been described as the occurrence of the “reach title”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can include a reach effect in which the “reach title” does not occur. For example, in the case of “N reach 1” among the N reach types, which has a relatively low winning expectation level, it is not necessary to generate “middle reach title”. With respect to the reach effect that does not generate “in the reach title”, the accessory movement effect does not occur in “in the reach title” shown in FIGS. 38 to 40 described later.

<6-2. Expected notice production>
In the present embodiment, the reach effect is routed in the process in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating a big hit is derived and displayed. For this reason, for the player, the presence or absence of the reach effect is a clue to know the possibility of a big hit. Therefore, a plurality of types of “expectation notice effects” are provided as an effect mode for notifying (implying) the possibility of the occurrence of the reach effect, in other words, as an effect mode that can clearly predict the winning expectation degree.

  This "expectation notice effect" plays a role as a sneaking effect for notifying the winning expectation degree, but a notice that a specific effect (for example, reach effect) may occur, It is also possible to play a role of notifying that the production will be confirmed. Therefore, in an effect scenario where a specific effect such as a reach effect occurs, the expected notice effect occurs before the occurrence of the specific effect, notifying the possibility of the reach effect occurring, There may be a notice. That is, the expected win expectation degree is further clarified and the player's sense of win winning expectation can be enhanced when the expected notice effect is accompanied rather than the case where the reach effect is generated alone.

  In addition, the expected notice effect may be generated in combination with one or more types of expected notice effects in one symbol variation display game (during one variation operation) in relation to the jackpot lottery result. By combining the expected announcement effect, a clearer winning expectation degree is shown. For example, if a plurality of types of expected announcement effects having a high degree of winning expectation are generated, the expected degree of winning will be further increased.

  Next, the “expectation notice effect” of this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, due to the relationship through the reach effect in the process of deriving and displaying a combination of decorative symbols indicating that it is a big hit, the present specification focuses on the occurrence timing of the “expected notice effect”. The notice effect that can occur before the reach effect is referred to as “pre-notice effect”, and the notice effect that can occur during the reach effect is referred to as “post-notice effect”.

(6-3. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
In the present embodiment, a pseudo-continuous effect (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pseudo-continuous”) is provided as an aspect of the “expected notice effect”.

  “Pseudo-ream” refers to a production mode with a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative symbol. “Pseudo variation” refers to a part or all of a decorative symbol in a decorative symbol variation display game. Is temporarily stopped (a change stop operation that looks as if it has been stopped), and the display operation is repeated once or multiple times. Thus, it is a variation display mode that expresses the appearance that the decorative symbol variation display operation is executed a plurality of times during a single symbol variation display game. This is different from a “prefetching notice effect (continuous notice effect)” described later, which is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games.

  When performing this pseudo-variation, for example, while forming a temporary reach state (a variation display mode that suggests that there is a possibility of a reach state or that a reach pattern is formed), Execute a re-variable display operation after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols that causes a loss, or replace a normal decorative pattern with a special decorative pattern (a special decoration that suggests the possibility of the occurrence of pseudo-ream) It is possible to execute a re-variable display operation after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols including a symbol (pseudo continuous activation chance symbol). Therefore, in the pseudo-continuous effect, in addition to the effect aspect that expresses as if the decorative symbol variation display operation is executed a plurality of times during the appearance of one symbol variation display game, the above-mentioned “ By using the “pseudo continuous activation chance symbol”, it is possible to include an effect mode in which one or more pseudo fluctuations are executed while suggesting the possibility of occurrence of the pseudo fluctuation to the player.

  The occurrence rate of such “pseudo trains” is basically determined such that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the winning expectation expectation. For example, according to the number of pseudo-variations, This is used as a notice effect for raising the expectation of occurrence of a relatively high reach type (SP reach).

  Therefore, in the case of an effect scenario including a reach effect (in the case of an effect mode based on a reach variation pattern with a pseudo effect), the above “pseudo-ream” occurs in the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before the reach effect). For example, one or a plurality of pseudo-variations are performed as a notice that there is a possibility of reach production or a specific reach type, and the reach state is reached after the pseudo-variation is completed. The final game result is derived and displayed via (reach effect). In the case of a production scenario that does not include a reach production (in the case of a production mode based on a normal variation pattern with pseudo-continuations), after the above pseudo variation is completed, it does not go through a reach state (reach production), that is, a normal variation. Is executed and the final game result is derived and displayed. Here, the fluctuation display operation executed after the pseudo fluctuation is completed is also referred to as “main fluctuation”. For example, when the reach state is passed, the reach effect is executed in the main fluctuation and the final movement is performed. The game result is derived and displayed. When the reach state is not passed, the normal variation is executed in this main variation, and the final game result is derived and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the expression “pseudo N times (N = 2, 3, 4)” means a series of variable display operation times N (pseudo continuous times) including the pseudo continuous and the main change. For example, when “pseudo 2 + SP reach” is described, a variation display operation mode (spurious run twice), that is, “pseudo change once + SP reach of main change”, that is, SP reach is executed after one pseudo change. Means. Accordingly, the expression “pseudo 2” means a variation display operation mode of “pseudo variation once + main variation (for example, SP reach, N reach, or normal variation)”. Similarly, the expression “pseudo 3” or “pseudo 4” means a variation display operation mode such as “pseudo variation 2 + main variation” or “pseudo variation 3 + main variation”. Moreover, what has no description about the pseudo-ream means a variable display operation mode of “no pseudo-ream”. In this specification, for convenience of explanation, a series of fluctuation display operation times including pseudo fluctuations and main fluctuations may be referred to as “pseudo continuous times”.

(6-3-1. Relationship between number of pseudo-reams and winning expectation: FIGS. 34 and 35)
Here, in the present embodiment, the fun of the game is improved by giving the following characteristic relationship between the number of pseudo-continuations and the winning expectation degree (winning expectation expectation degree). This will be described in detail below.

  Conventional gaming machines are configured such that the greater the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the winning expectation. For example, a notice is given that an SP reach type is generated with an increase in the number of quasi-reams that increases the expectation of winning the winning combination. Therefore, in a symbol variation display game with a small number of pseudo-reams (for example, pseudo 2 (pseudo variation 1 + main variation)), in particular, in a symbol variation display game in which pseudo-ream does not occur (no pseudo ream (pseudo zero)), There is a very high possibility that the winning-winning expectation is low, that is, “losing”. In addition, in the case of a symbol variation display game in which pseudo-ream does not occur, there is a high possibility that it will be “lost” even if a notice effect (high expectation effect) with high winning expectation is generated. Even if the production appears, many players give up as soon as the game is "lost" and wait for the start of the next game with a sense of cooling without expecting the game. , The game situation was.

  Therefore, as in the past, as the number of pseudo-reams increases, if the winning expectation is increased, it is dominated by the gameability such as simply waiting for the symbol variation display game with multiple pseudo-reams, In the symbol variation display game in which the pseudo-ream does not occur (pseudo-zero) or the pseudo-ream is about once (pseudo-2), the player cannot have a winning expectation and simply presents an aspect of digestion game. The game was not interesting, and the full appeal of the notice production was not fully demonstrated, resulting in a narrowing of the freedom of production. In addition, when a relatively large number of pseudo-runs occur, the player estimates that “there is a very high possibility of winning a big hit” and has an excessive sense of expectation of winning a winning combination. However, even though the expectation of winning was very high, if “losing” was derived as a game result, disappointment and disappointment due to a reaction that had an excessive expectation of winning of the winning, rather than a gaming machine Give distrust. Also, if you experience such a case multiple times, even if you lose confidence in the notice effect, or even if a large number of pseudo-recursions occur, you will be caught by the prejudice that `` probably it will be lost '', and it will be a big hit There is a risk that the excitement of the winning will be distracted, and the real thrill of the notice effect cannot be fully exhibited.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, paying attention to the reach variation pattern of “pseudo-ream zero” that does not generate a pseudo-ream, in particular, in order to give a player a winning expectation even in a symbol variation display game that does not involve a pseudo-ream, The above-mentioned conventional problems are solved by giving the following relationship between the number of pseudo-continuations and the reach production type (expected winning expectation). This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 shows a fluctuation pattern distribution table used when selecting a hit fluctuation pattern during normal operation, and FIG. 35 shows a fluctuation pattern distribution used when selecting a loss fluctuation pattern (at the start of fluctuation) during normal operation. It is a table. The processing content for selecting the variation pattern (at the start of variation) will be described later with reference to FIG. 12 (special symbol variation start processing).

(6-3-1A. Per-fluctuation pattern (normal): Fig. 34)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, regarding the SP reach type (the hit reach fluctuation pattern for SP reach production designation) that increases the expectation of winning, the selection of the hit fluctuation pattern of “no pseudo continuous” and “pseudo 2” is selected. Focusing on the rate, it is determined so as to satisfy the relationship of “pseudo 2 <no pseudo continuous (pseudo zero)”. Specifically, “Normal SP Reach A (No Pseudo-ream)” and “Pseudo 2+ Normal Medium SP Reach A (Pseudo Fluctuation 1 + Normal Normal SP Reach A)”, “Normal Medium SP Reach B ( "No pseudo-continuous)" and "Pseudo 2+ normal SP reach B (pseudo fluctuation once + normal fluctuation SP reach B)", "Normal SP reach C (no pseudo-continuous)" and "Pseudo 2+ normal SP For “reach C (pseudo fluctuation once + normal fluctuation SP reach B)”, the “pseudo 2” selection rate is set to be relatively higher than the “pseudo 2” selection rate. Yes.

  Further, when paying attention to the selection rate of the hit variation pattern of “no pseudo continuous”, “pseudo 2”, and “pseudo 3”, as shown in the figure, “pseudo 2 <no pseudo continuous (pseudo continuous zero) <pseudo 3”. (“Pseudo 2 <No pseudo run (pseudo run zero) ≦ Pseudo 3” may be satisfied). Further, when paying attention to the selection rate of the hit variation pattern of “no pseudo continuous”, “pseudo 2”, “pseudo 3”, and “pseudo 4”, “pseudo 2 <pseudo continuous (pseudo continuous zero) <pseudo 4 < The relationship is “pseudo 3”. Therefore, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the reach variation pattern in the case of winning is determined so as to satisfy at least the relationship of “pseudo 2 <no pseudo continuous (pseudo zero)”.

  In the case of the “N reach type” where the winning expectation level is lower than the SP reach type, exceptionally, the relationship of “pseudo 2 ≧ pseudo continuous (pseudo zero)”, that is, the higher the number of pseudo continuouss, Although the degree is determined to be high, the N reach can also be determined so as to satisfy the relationship of “pseudo 2 <no pseudo continuous (pseudo zero)”.

  Here, the N reach type (normal N reach 1, 2) will be described. In this embodiment, “N reach 1” is defined as a reach effect type in which both cases of pseudo-continuity exist and “N reach 2” includes cases of presence of pseudo-continuity (pseudo 2 + N reach 2) and none (N reach 2). (See FIGS. 34 and 35). As already described, the winning winning expectation between N reach types is “N reach 1 <N reach 2”. This is because in the case of winning, N reach 1 is not selected.

  In the case of losing, N reach 1 stops at a design that is more than 2 frames away from the design of the reach design. For example, if the decorative design is 1-9, if the reach design is "7" The combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is stopped at “757” or “797”. On the other hand, the N reach 2 stops at a design that is one frame shifted from the design for the reach design. For example, if the decoration design is 1 to 9, the reach design is “7”, and finally the stop display is displayed. The combination of decorative symbols to be displayed is stopped in the display mode of “767” or “787”. Thus, when N reach 2 appears rather than when N reach 1 appears, the player is given a sense of expectation that the combination of decorative symbols (hit display mode) that can notify the big hit will stop. Can be done.

  On the other hand, in the case of winning, “N reach 2” derives and displays the losing stop display mode in the symbol temporary stop state, and once the game result looks like a losing, but eventually the winning display mode is derived. There are cases in which the display mode is derived and displayed as it is in the case of being displayed (revival effect) and the temporary stop state of the symbol. The former is a case where there is a pseudo-ream, and the latter is a case where there is no pseudo-ream. Therefore, when N reach 2 with pseudo-continuity (pseudo 2 + N reach 2) occurs, the player expects a rebirth effect.

(6-3-1B. Loss Fluctuation Pattern (Normal): FIG. 35)
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35, the selection rate of the loss variation pattern (the loss reach variation pattern for designating reach production) is such that the greater the number of pseudo consecutive times (the number of pseudo variation), the higher the winning expectation degree. Selectivity is defined. Specifically, it is determined to satisfy at least the relationship of “pseudo 2 <no pseudo continuous (pseudo zero)”. In the case of the present embodiment, the relationship between the winning expectations is “no pseudo-continuation (pseudo zero) <pseudo 2 <pseudo 3 <pseudo 4”. This is different from the case where the hit variation pattern is selected.

  In addition, in the case of a loss that can be won with a higher probability than the winning winning probability, the selection rate of the “reach fluctuation pattern without pseudo-continuous” is set to be higher than the selection rate of the “variable pattern with pseudo-continuous”. In the progress of the game, the appearance frequency of “reach production without pseudo-continuation” is increased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of winning, the selection ratio of the hit reach variation pattern is determined so as to satisfy at least the relationship of “pseudo 2 <no pseudo continuous (pseudo zero)”. Even when the “reaching production without pseudo-ream” appears, the player can have a winning expectation, and the “reaching production without pseudo-ream” has an aspect of digestive gaming. Can be prevented as much as possible.

  In addition, when the number of times of pseudo reaming (number of times of pseudo variation) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times (for example, pseudo 3 or pseudo 4), the expectation of winning is relatively increased. The more you expect, the higher the winning expectation is. Thereby, even if it is a case where a pseudo | simulation remnant does not generate | occur | produce, a player can have a feeling of winning expectation, and also can greatly change the winning expectation degree by the number of pseudo reams. As a result, there are a wide variety of effects, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(6-3-1C. Pseudo-continuous reach type regulation)
Further, in the present embodiment, in view of the above-described conventional problems, the following features are given to the reach variation pattern with pseudo-continuity. This will be described in detail below.

  In the present embodiment, there are provided a plurality of types of reach variation patterns with pseudo-runs that execute the pseudo-run once or a plurality of times, thereby allowing a plurality of types of reach effects to appear. . As a characteristic configuration, paying attention to the variation pattern distribution table of FIGS. 34 and 35, among the plural types of reach variation patterns with pseudo-continuations, the number of pseudo-continuations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, pseudo 3). The number of types (number of types) of reach variation patterns with pseudo-continuations (hereinafter referred to as “high pseudo-continuous reach variation patterns”) related to the ream (in this embodiment, pseudo 4: N> 3 (N = 4)) From the number of types of quasi-ream reach variation patterns (hereinafter referred to as “low quasi-continuous reach variation patterns”) related to the quasi-ream of the predetermined number of times or less (for example, quasi-3 or less: N ≦ 3 (N = 2 to 3)) The reach variation pattern type is relatively higher in the expected win probability than the low pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern type. For example, referring to FIG. 34, those belonging to the low pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern (here, the loss fluctuation pattern) of pseudo 3 or less are “pseudo 2 + normal N reach 2” “pseudo 2 + normal SP reach A”. "Pseudo 2+ Normal SP Reach B" "Pseudo 2+ Normal SP Reach C" "Pseudo 3 + Normal SP Reach A" "Pseudo 3 + Normal SP Reach B" "Pseudo 3 + Normal SP Reach C" , And those belonging to the high pseudo continuous reach variation pattern type are “pseudo 4 + normal medium SP reach C”.

  This means that when the high pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern type is selected, the low pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern type is selected from those that are narrowed down to the reach variation pattern type with a relatively high expectation of winning winning. Means. In the example of the above-described loss, the high pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern type is composed of a reach variation pattern type with a relatively high win-winning expectation among the low pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern types (pseudo-continuous reach reach). This means that (type regulation) holds.

  Further, when focusing on the reach production that can appear, the reach production types that can be executed in relation to the low pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern type are “N reach” and “SP reach A to C” in total, The reach production type that can be executed in association with the high pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is one type of “SP reach C”. Therefore, the reach production type (SP reach C) executed in relation to the high pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern is the reach production type (N reach, SP reach A to N) executed in relation to the low pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern type. C), the winning winning expectation degree is a relatively high reach production type. As a result, when a pseudo-ream (pseudo 4) exceeding a predetermined number of pseudo-reams (here, “pseudo 3”) is generated, the reach effect that appears is a highly anticipated reach effect type (low pseudo) Among the reach types related to the continuous reach variation pattern type, only the reach effect type with a relatively high winning expectation degree) is displayed.

  In the case of winning, as shown in FIG. 35, a variation pattern designating “special reach” is included as a high pseudo continuous reach variation pattern. In this case, there are two types belonging to the high pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern type: “pseudo 4 + normal medium SP reach C” and “special reach”. This special reach is a premium reach production type that appears only in the case of a big win, and is included in the reach fluctuation pattern type with a relatively high expectation of winning win among the low pseudo-ream reach fluctuation pattern types It is not a thing but a “pseudo 4 dedicated reach fluctuation pattern”. However, even in this case, at least 'SP reach C' is included as the reach effect executed in association with the high pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern, as in the case of the above-described loss. In other words, in the case of winning, the reach effect type executed in relation to the high pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern has a relative winning expectation degree relative to the reach effect type executed in relation to the low pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern type. The reach effect type is configured to include a reach effect type that is executed in association with the low pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern type. Therefore, even in the case of winning, when a quasi-ream that exceeds a predetermined number of times occurs, as in the case of a loss, the reach effect that appears is only the highly anticipated reach effect type. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the number of types of “first reach effect type” that can appear when the number of pseudo-continuous times exceeds the predetermined number of times is “second reach” that can appear when the number of pseudo-continuous times is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. The first reach effect type is smaller than the number of types of “effect types”, and is determined as a reach type having a higher winning expectation than the second reach effect type. Further, the first reach effect type may not necessarily be the reach effect type included in the second reach effect type. In addition, the first reach production type can be determined as a reach type having a high win-winning expectation degree among the second reach production types. In this case, the first reach effect type is the reach effect type included in the second reach effect type. In consideration of game play and production mode, whether it is a low pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern when the number is less than a predetermined number of pseudo-continuous times, or a high pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern when it exceeds a predetermined number of pseudo-continuous times Can be determined as appropriate. In addition, the number of types (number of types) of these variation patterns and the number of reach effect types (number of types) executed in association therewith can be determined as appropriate.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the appearance of the reach effect type (low expectation reach effect type) having a relatively low winning expectation degree according to the number of pseudo-continuations. . As a result, despite the occurrence of a large number of pseudo-continuations, a low-reaching reach effect is generated, and the winning expectation for winning is prevented, preventing the player from falling into a cold sensation. it can. In addition, since the reach effect type changes according to the number of pseudo-reams, the reach effect type can be clearly notified according to how many times the pseudo-reams occur.

<Modified example of the number of pseudo-continuations>
In the above embodiment (first embodiment), “pseudo 4 times (pseudo fluctuation 3 times)” is the maximum number of pseudo-continuous times. “Case” means “when the number of pseudo consecutive times is a predetermined number (pseudo 4 (pseudo fluctuation 3 times))” (see FIGS. 34 and 35). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach production type that can appear when “the number of pseudo-continuous times is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (pseudo 4)”, in other words, the high pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern with “pseudo 4 or more”. As the type, a pseudo continuous reach variation pattern designating “pseudo 4 + SP reach D” and “pseudo 5 + SP reach D” can be provided. Here, for convenience of explanation, the maximum number of pseudo-continuations is set to “pseudo 5”, and the above-mentioned “SP reach D” and “special reach (occurs only in the case of hitting)” are set to, for example, pseudo 4 to pseudo 5 (pseudo fluctuation). A description will be given of an example (modified example) in which the reach effect type (3 to 4 times + main fluctuation) (reach fluctuation pattern type with pseudo-continuous 4 to 5) is used.

  In the case of this modification, in the case of losing, when the number of pseudo-continuous times is “pseudo 3 or less”, one of the four types of reach productions of “N reach and SP reach A to C” is “ In the case of “pseudo 4”, one of the two types of reach effects “SP reach C to D” can be achieved, and in the case of “pseudo 5”, “SP reach D” can appear. In the case of winning, if the number of pseudo-continuations is “pseudo 3 or less”, the reach effect of any one of the four types of “N reach and SP reach A to C” is set to “pseudo 4”. Is one of the three types of 'SP reach C to D and special reach', and in the case of "pseudo 5", one of the two types of 'SP reach D and special reach' Reach production can be made available.

  In this modification, the above-mentioned “SP reach D” and “special reach” are not selected in the reach effect type related to the pseudo 3 or less (low pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern related to the pseudo 3 or less). Although it is a type, the number of types of reach production decreases as the number of pseudo-reams increases, and the reach production type that can appear is narrowed down to the reach production type with a relatively high expectation of winning , And so on. In the above, the number of reach types has a relationship of “pseudo 2-3 (first predetermined number of times)> pseudo 4 (second predetermined number of times)> pseudo 5 (third predetermined number of times)”. In this modified example, the number of pseudo consecutive times that becomes the boundary where the reach effect is narrowed to the high expectation side is not one place (in the first embodiment, pseudo 3 is the boundary), but the first predetermined number of times (pseudo 3), In a plurality of stages, such as the second predetermined number of times (pseudo 4) and the third predetermined number of times (pseudo 5), it is narrowed down so that a reach effect type with a relatively high win-winning expectation level appears. It has become the composition which goes.

  Further, in the case where “SP reach D” is a reach production type with pseudo 2 to 5, for example, in the case of a loss, if the number of pseudo consecutive times is “pseudo 3 or less”, the “N reach and SP reach A˜ If the reach effect of any of the five types of D 'is “pseudo 4”, the reach effect of any of the two types of “SP reach C to D” is “pseudo 5”. In this case, 'SP reach D' can be displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the reach effect type executed in relation to the high pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern is the low pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern (there is a pseudo continuous relation in which the pseudo continuous number is less than or equal to the predetermined number). Of the reach performance types executed in relation to the reach variation pattern), the winning effect expectation degree is narrowed down to a relatively high reach effect type. Specifically, the reach effect type “SP reach C to D” that can appear in the case of pseudo 4 is the reach effect type “N reach and SP reach A to D” that can appear in the case of pseudo 3 or less. The reach effect type “SP reach D”, which is composed of reach effect types having a relatively high expectation of winning per win and which can appear in the case of pseudo 5, is the reach effect type “SP reach D” which can appear in the case of pseudo 4. Among the “SP reach C to D”, it is configured by a reach production type with a relatively high expectation of winning winning. Further, when paying attention to the pseudo 4 to 5, the reach effect type “SP reach C to D” that can appear in the case of the pseudo 4 to 5 is the reach effect type “N reach and N” that can appear in the case of the pseudo 3 or less. "SP reach AD" is configured with a reach production type with a relatively high expectation of winning winning.

  It should be noted that the “special reach” is preferably configured to appear only when the number of pseudo-continuous times is a predetermined number, for example, only when “pseudo 5”. If the configuration is such that the special reach can be generated only in the case of the pseudo 5, for example, when reaching the pseudo 5, the reach effect of either “SP reach D” or “special reach” appears. Therefore, expectation for the occurrence of special reach is greatly increased. And if special reach occurs, this can be alert | reported. Alternatively, the appearance of “special reach” may be confirmed only when the number of pseudo-continuations exceeds a predetermined number (only “special reach” is selected as the reach variation pattern with pseudo-5). ). In this case, when the pseudo-5 occurs, the appearance of the special reach is confirmed, and when the pseudo-ream develops to the pseudo-4, the player has a sense of tension and uplifting whether or not the pseudo-ream develops to the pseudo-5. It is possible to enjoy the pseudo-ream production. The “special reach” may be provided in one or more types.

  This embodiment can be configured as follows. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Lottery means (S311 to S314 in FIG. 10, S331 to 334 in FIG. 11, S409 and S410 in FIG. 12) for executing a lottery regarding whether or not to win, when a predetermined start condition is established,
Display means (liquid crystal display device 36) that is configured to be able to display fluctuating motions of a plurality of types of game symbols in a stunning manner and that can display and display a display result by a combination of stop symbols when the fluctuating motions are completed;
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the fluctuation pattern determining means for determining the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation action in the display means from among a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns including a plurality of kinds of reach fluctuation patterns passing through the reach state (FIG. 12 S412, FIG. 14, FIG. 33 to FIG.
Based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit, a variation display operation control unit (S059 in FIG. 8, S412 in FIG. 12, FIG. 14, an effect control unit) that controls the variation operation of the game symbol in the display unit. 24, FIG. 25), and
When the reach variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determining means, the game is configured such that after passing through the reach state, a combination of stop symbols indicating a lottery result by the lottery means can be derived and displayed on the display means. In the machine
In the plurality of types of reach variation patterns, at least one of the game symbols in the variation operation is temporarily stopped (for example, right temporary stop, middle symbol / left symbol is changing), and the game symbol is re-varied from the temporarily stopped state. A plurality of types of specific reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns with pseudo-continuations: FIGS. 34 to 37) for executing the pseudo-variation operation for performing the operation one or more times are included.
The variation display operation control means includes:
When one of the plurality of types of reach variation patterns is determined by the variation pattern determining means, the reach effect is executed to control the reach effect related to the determined reach variation pattern with respect to the display means. Including control means (main control unit 20, S412 in FIG. 12, FIG. 14, production control unit 24, FIG. 25),
The reach production control means includes:
Among the plurality of types of specific reach variation patterns, a first specific reach variation pattern type (for example, pseudo-repeated number) with the pseudo variation operation of a predetermined number of times or less (pseudo continuous number N ≦ 3: pseudo continuous number N = 2 to 3) One or a plurality of types of reach variation patterns that specify execution of the number of consecutive times 2-3: "Pseudo 2 + N normal reach 2", "Pseudo 2-3 + normal SP reach A", "Pseudo" shown in FIGS. In the case of “2-3 + normal medium SP reach B” and “pseudo 2-3 + normal medium SP reach C”, etc., a plurality of types of reach production types (for example, normal medium N reach, normal medium SP reach A to C) ), The reach effect is controlled to be executed, and exceeds the predetermined number (N = 4 or more: pseudo-continuous number N> 3). The second specific reach variation pattern type (for example, with the pseudo variation operation) ,pseudo In the case of one or a plurality of types of reach variation patterns designating the execution of the number of times 4: “pseudo 4 + normal SP reach C”, “special reach”, etc. shown in FIGS. 34 to 35), the first specific reach Reach among the types of reach production types (for example, SP reach C, special reach (in case of hit), SP reach D (modified example), etc.) that are fewer than the types of reach production executed in relation to the variation pattern type. It is configured to control the execution,
The reach effect type related to the second specific reach variation pattern is the expectation level of the reach effect type related to the first specific reach variation pattern with respect to the expectation level that the winning by the lottery means is selected. It is composed of relatively high reach production types (for example, among normal reach types, “N reach 1 <reach N2 <SP reach A <SP reach B <SP reach C <special reach”) High expectations)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The reach production type related to the second specific reach fluctuation pattern is a reach production type having a relatively high expectation level among the reach production types related to the first specific reach fluctuation pattern. , A specific reach production type (for example, special reach) that is not included in the reach production type related to the first specific reach fluctuation pattern. This specific reach production type may be a reach production type having a higher expectation than the reach production type related to the first specific reach variation pattern. Further, the specific reach production type may be a reach production that is executed only when the winning is lottery.

(6-4. Other expected announcement effects: FIGS. 44 and 45)
The “pseudo-ream” described above is an effect mode mainly relating to the decorative symbol variation display and the stop display state. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of pre-notice effects and post-notice effects are provided as the notice effect aspects different from the notice effect aspects using the fluctuating display form of decorative symbols such as the pseudo-ream. These notice effects are effect forms that do not use the decorative display variation display form, are distinguished from the pseudo-reams, and are the notice effect forms that can occur in a complex manner. Note that the notice effect described below is a notice effect that can occur in the case of an effect scenario in which a pseudo-ream occurs, and the expected winning degree is suggested by the number of pseudo-reams and the notice effect. It has come to be.

(6-4-1. Advance notice effect: Fig. 44)
First, prior notice effects 1 to 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 shows an example of the previous notice effect according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 44, previous notice effects 1-5 include a plurality of kinds of notice effects having different winning winning expectations as shown in the figure, and effect control unit 24 displays the contents of the change pattern (in the change pattern designation command). Based on the included variation pattern information), it is determined which type of the previous notice effect is to be generated, and one of the different notice effects belonging to the determined previous notice effect type is selected. .

  For convenience of explanation, in the present specification, the prior notice effects 1 to 5 and the later notice effects 1 and 2 to be described later are determined in the order of priority of the start timing in the order of the numbers. However, with regard to the previous notice effect 5, the start timing is exceptionally determined according to the constituted effect scenario, and may be started before or after or simultaneously with any of the previous notice effects 1 to 4. Further, in the present embodiment, there is a case where one expected notice effect and another expected notice effect are not generated in combination due to the nature of the effect form. In the present embodiment, the previous notice effect 1 and the previous notice effect 2 (appear at the same start timing in time series), the previous notice effect 3 and the previous notice effect 4 have the same characteristics (the same start in time series) In the presentation scenario, which is displayed at the timing and belongs to the step-up notice production mode described later), the production is selected so that these do not occur in combination.

  With regard to the start timing of the preceding notice effects 1 to 5 and the later notice effects 1 and 2 described later, in the case of an effect scenario in which all these notice effects are generated (however, the previous notice effect 1 and the previous notice effect 2 or the previous notice effect) Either one of the effects 3 and the previous notice effect 4 is selected), “the previous notice effect 1 (or the previous notice effect 2) (occurred together with the start of the symbol change display) → the previous notice effect 3 (or the previous notice effect 4) → Pre-announcement effect 5 → Reach effect → Rear notice effect 1 (occurs when the reach state is formed) → Rear notice effect 2 (occurs after a predetermined time elapses after the reach state is formed) ”. In addition, although not shown in the drawing, each expected notice effect has a predetermined effect time range. Depending on the effect time range, another notice effect may be started before one previous notice effect ends. There is. Accordingly, a plurality of types of expected announcement effects can be generated. Also, not all expected notice effects are necessarily displayed, and the expected notice effects to be displayed are determined by lottery based on the variation pattern type and the current effect mode (see FIG. 43). ).

(Preliminary notice 1)
With reference to FIG. 44, the previous notice effect 1 will be described. The prior notice effect 1 of the present embodiment belongs to a so-called “image display notice effect” in which a specific image (notice image) relating to a color element is displayed as an effect related to the jackpot lottery result. In this embodiment, a character image representing a character wearing a kimono is displayed (character appearance notice), and the expected winning degree is predicted according to the type of the character. This is a notice effect mode. Each effect (effect numbers 1 to 5) belonging to the previous notice effect 1 is a narrowly defined effect scenario in which a predetermined sound effect and / or light effect is generated with the display of a specific image. The sound effects and the light effects in these effect scenarios are the same for each effect except for the sound effect in effect number 5. It should be noted that effects belonging to other expected notice effect types are configured with a narrowly defined effect scenario including a common effect such as a predetermined sound effect, light effect, image display effect, or movable object effect by a movable object. .

  Specifically, in the previous notice effect 1, the floral pattern (in this embodiment, a pattern or pattern imitating a flower (collar) in this embodiment) and the flower are attached to the kimono worn by the character. Multiple types of image display effects with different combinations of petal colors (colors attached to petals in this embodiment) are prepared, and winning expectation is expected depending on which color element appears. The degree will be announced. The player can estimate the winning expectation degree according to the type of color of the kimono worn by the character that appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

  The combination (combination) of the patterns (or designs) and colors relating to each of the preceding notice effects (effect numbers 1 to 5) belonging to the previous notice effect 1 is such that the pattern attached to the kimono worn by the character is a white petal. "Yuri" flower (coroll) pattern (Yuri pattern character appearance notice) with yellow petals, "Chrysanthemum" flower pattern with yellow petals (Chrysanthemum pattern character appearance notice), "Oihana" flower pattern with green petals (Aoi flower pattern character notice effect), "peony" flower pattern with red petals (peony pattern character appearance notice), and "wisteria" flower pattern with petals of a danger pattern (hereinafter abbreviated as D pattern) (D pattern wisteria pattern character appearance notice) It is determined in this order of the floral pattern (combination of pattern and color) that the winning expectation is higher (see FIG. 44).

  The above “Danger pattern (D pattern)” is a generic name of a pattern in which a yellow stripe is applied to the ground yellow color, or a DANGER character is further arranged in the black stripe band. Therefore, “D pattern” belongs to a color-coded pattern and can be classified as either a color element or a pattern. However, for convenience of explanation in this specification, “D pattern” is simply compared with white, yellow, green, red, and the like. It is handled as having a possible color element “D pattern color (hereinafter referred to as“ D pattern color ”if necessary)”. In the drawings, the D pattern color is simply abbreviated as “D pattern”. Further, when the color element is white, blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern color, etc., it includes a form in which the pattern is drawn with the same color or different color on the ground color. Therefore, the color elements include (i) white, black, blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern color and no pattern, that is, “solid” form, and (ii) white, black, blue, yellow , “Green”, “red”, and “patterned” forms in which a pattern is drawn in the same color or different color on the ground of D pattern color. In the following, based on this relationship, it is simply referred to as “color element”. The above relationship can also be expressed as “color or pattern or both”.

  As will be described in detail later, for the previous notice effects 1-2, the number of color element choices is “white, yellow, green, red, D pattern color”. “Yellow, green, red, D pattern color”, three types of “green, red, D pattern color” in the post-notice effect 1, and two types of “red, D pattern color” in the post-notice effect 2 In addition, a relationship (color element regulation) is defined such that the later the appearance timing of the notice effect, the smaller the number of color element options.

  Also, in the case of the above-mentioned notice effect that handles the D pattern (notice effect related to the D pattern), for example, in the case of the previous notice effect 1, the effect number 5 “D pattern wisteria pattern character appearance notice”, only that sound effect. Has a unique sound (D-pattern dedicated sound) that tells you that a hot performance with a high level of winning expectation (here, a direction with a high expectation level of winning especially in the high-reliability notice effect) has occurred. It is configured to generate (appear). On the other hand, in the case of a notice effect (in this case, a notice effect with effect numbers 1 to 4) having a lower winning expectation than the notice effect related to the D pattern, the sound effect (sound effect) related thereto is common. The “normal sound (normal sound effect)” that is the sound production (the same sound production) is generated (see FIG. 50 described later).

  In this way, the configuration for generating the sound exclusively for the D pattern makes it easy for the player to know that the character with the D pattern has appeared, distinguishing it from other notice effects. . Therefore, even if the player is looking aside and overlooks the appearance of the D figure wisteria pattern character from the viewpoint of vision, there is an effect that the sound can be reliably recognized by sound. The configuration for generating a unique sound effect when the notice effect related to the D pattern is generated is not only the D pattern effect notice in the previous notice effect 1 (effect number 5), but also the D patterns in the other previous notice effects 2 to 5. The same applies to the notice effect (effect numbers 30, 15 and 20) and the notice effect (effect numbers 30 and 35) related to the D pattern in the later notice effects 1-2.

  In the present embodiment, among the group of effects belonging to each expected notice effect, when the jackpot lottery result is lost, it is selected with a relatively low probability (low appearance rate), and in the case of a jackpot with a relatively high probability. As a notice effect having a high winning expectation degree such as being selected (high appearance rate), the winning expectation degree is a predetermined expected value or more (in this embodiment, a notice effect having a winning expectation degree of 20% or more). The thing is called a high reliability notice effect, and the other is called a low reliability notice effect. Further, a notice effect that is determined to develop more than the reach notice effect (here, a notice effect having a winning expectation of 5% or more) will be referred to as a “reliability notice effect”. Therefore, in the case of “reliability notice effect”, a high reliability notice effect is also included.

  In the case of the previous notice effect 1, the effect number 2 “yellow chrysanthemum pattern character appearance notice (winning expectation 5%)” and the effect number 3 “green camellia flower character appearance notice (winning expectation 10) %) ”,“ Red Peony Pattern Character Appearance Notice (Direction Expectation Expected 27.5%) ”of Stage Number 4, and“ D Pattern Wisteria Pattern Character Appearance Notice (Direction Expectation Expectation Expectation 42%) ” ) ”Belongs to“ Reliability notice effect ”. In addition, among the credibility announcement effects, the production number 4 “red peony pattern character appearance notice (winning expectation expectation 27.5%)” and the production number 5 “D pattern wisteria pattern character advance notice” (A winning expectation of 42%) belongs to the above-described “high reliability notice effect”, and the other notice effects belong to the “low reliability notice effect”. That is, among the five types of color elements of “white, yellow, green, red, and D pattern color”, four types of color elements of “yellow, green, red, and D pattern color” indicate “reliability notice”. The two types of color elements “red, D pattern color” are related to “high-reliability notice effect”, and one color element “white” is “low-reliability”. This relates to the “notice effect”. When the high-reliability notice effect as described above occurs, the player expects a big win.

(Previous notice effect 2)
Next, the previous notice effect 2 will be described. The previous notice effect 2 of the present embodiment belongs to the same “image display notice effect” as the previous notice effect 1 described above, and is an image representing a launch firework opening in the night sky as a specific image (notice image) relating to a color element. Is displayed in advance, and the expected winning degree is predicted according to the type of fireworks.

  Specifically, in the previous notice effect 2, the fireworks (in this embodiment, a pattern or pattern simulating a crown as a firework) and objects of the fireworks are displayed as objects to be displayed as a notice image relating to the color element. A plurality of types of image display effects with different combinations of colors (in this embodiment, the colors attached to the fireworks) are prepared, and the expected winning degree is suggested depending on which types of fireworks appear. It has become. The player can guess the winning expectation degree based on the type of fireworks that have appeared on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

  The combination of the pattern and the color relating to each of the preceding notice effects (effect numbers 6 to 10) belonging to the previous notice effect 2 is that the fireworks are not colored (they are all given the same color). , Fireworks expressing “lily” flowers (coroll) (lily-patterned fireworks notice effect), fireworks expressing “chrysanthemum” flowers (chrysanthemum-pattern fireworks notice effect), fireworks expressing “flower” Fireworks that express the flowers of the vines, the fireworks that express the flowers of the “peony” (the notifications that give the peony patterns of the fireworks display), and the fireworks that express the flowers of the “wisteria” that has the D pattern (only black and white stripes) D pattern wisteria pattern fireworks announcement effect), and in order of these fireworks types, it is determined that the winning-winning expectation degree becomes higher (see FIG. 44).

  The D pattern (only the black and white stripe pattern) dealt with here is the “D with no hue display form” in which the hue is removed from the D pattern in the previous notice effect 1, the previous notice effect 3-5, and the later notice effect 1-2. It is a “pattern”. In other words, it is the one in which black stripes are applied to the white background of the ground, or one in which the characters DANGER are arranged in the black stripe band. Hereinafter, if necessary, this is referred to as “monochrome D pattern” and is distinguished from “D pattern” having normal color elements.

  In the present embodiment, among the launch fireworks notice effects belonging to the previous notice effect 2, those belonging to the “reliability notice effect” are the production number 7 “Chrysanthemum pattern fireworks notice effect (7% expected to win)” And the production number 8 “Ichinohana pattern launch fireworks notice effect (per-winning expectation 15%)” and the production number 9 “peony pattern launch fireworks notice effect (per-winning expectation 33.3%)” There are a total of four types of production number 10, “D pattern wisteria pattern character appearance notice (expected winning expectation 47.5%)”. In addition, those belonging to the above high-reliability notice effect include a “peony pattern launch fireworks notice effect (33.3% win expectation expectation)” of an effect number 14 and a D pattern wisteria pattern launch fireworks notice effect of an effect number 15 ( The expected win rate is 47.5%).

  Note that the notice effect belonging to the previous notice effect 2 may be a notice effect mode combining a pattern and a color, for example, a firework that adds a color to the fireworks and expresses a “lily” flower (coroll) with white petals. (Lily pattern launch fireworks notice effect), fireworks expressing yellow “chrysanthemum” flowers (chrysanthemum pattern appearing fireworks notice effect), fireworks expressing green “blossoms” flower (firework pattern appearing fireworks notice effect) , Fireworks expressing red "peony" flowers (peony-patterned fireworks display), and fireworks expressing D-colored "wisteria" flowers (D-pattern colored wisteria pattern: D-pattern colored wisteria pattern) Character notice announcement), and the winning winning expectation related to the combination of the pattern and color common to the previous notice effects 1 and 2 may be used.

(Preliminary notice 3)
Next, the previous notice effect 3 will be described. The prior notice effect 3 of the present embodiment belongs to a so-called “step-up notice effect” in which a specific effect can develop step by step, and a plurality of stages from the first effect in a predetermined order. This is a notice production mode in which the stage of the production is performed step by step, and when the stage is developed further, the winning expectation degree is higher (when the stage is developed to the final stage, the degree of winning win is the highest). In other words, when the symbol variation display game result is a big hit, it is a notice effect mode in which it develops to the effect of the earlier stage with higher probability than in the case of losing. The previous notice effect 3 is a step-up notice effect that can be developed from the first stage (lowest winning expectation level) to the fifth stage (final stage: highest expected expectation level), and a notice image relating to the color element. As the objects to be displayed, there are multiple types of image display effects for step-up notice effects that are different in the colors (colors) attached to the vases (patterns, designs). Depending on how you do it, the expected win rate is suggested. In addition, the design or pattern of the vase in the previous notice effect 3 is the same in each step notice effect. Therefore, in the preliminary announcement effect 3, the player can estimate the winning expectation mainly based on the difference in color (color) attached to the vase when it finally develops.

  Each effect (effect numbers 12 to 15) belonging to the previous notice effect 3 is a narrowly defined effect scenario in which a predetermined sound effect and / or light effect occurs with the display of a specific image (effect number 11). Is unused and empty). The previous notice effect 3 has a great feature in that there are four types (blue, yellow, red, D pattern color), which are one less color element type than the previous notice effects 1-2. Moreover, the sound effect and the light effect in these effect scenarios are the same for each effect except for the sound effect in effect number 15 (D pattern vase notice). Only the sound production of the D pattern vase notice of production number 15 is configured to generate a unique sound in order to notify that a hot production with a high winning expectation degree has occurred.

  The combination of the pattern (or design) and the color associated with each of the previous notice effects (effect numbers 12 to 15) belonging to the previous notice effect 3 is the same as the pattern attached to the vase, and the vase color is “ "Yellow" vase (Yellow vase notice stage: 1st stage (SU1)), "Green" vase (Green vase notice stage: 2nd stage (SU2)), "Red" vase (Red vase notice stage: 3 stages) Eyes (SU3)), and "D pattern" vase (D pattern vase notice effect: 4th stage (SU4)), each time it develops to the previous stage effect by the order of this vase, It is determined so that the winning winning expectation is high (see FIG. 44). Each of the effects belonging to the previous notice effect 3 has the same vase design, but is different from the previous notice effects 1, 2 and the like by changing the color attached to the vase (same or very similar). ) Expected wins related to color.

  In the present embodiment, among the notice effects belonging to the previous notice effect 3, the one belonging to the above-described reliability notice effect is the yellow vase notice effect of effect number 12 corresponding to the first stage (expected winning expectation 5%)) A green vase notice effect of stage 13 corresponding to the second stage (12.5% per win expectation expectation)) A red vase notice effect of stage No. 19 corresponding to the third stage (25% per win expectation expectation) In addition, there are four types of D pattern vase notice effect (actual winning expectation 50%) of effect number 20 corresponding to the final stage (fourth stage). In addition, those belonging to the high-reliability notice effect include a red vase notice effect of effect number 19 corresponding to the fourth stage (25% winning expectation degree) and an effect number corresponding to the final stage (fifth stage). There are 20 D pattern vase notice effects (expected winning degree of 50%).

  When the previous notice effect 3 occurs during the “pseudo-continuation”, the notice effect can be developed step by step for each number of pseudo-continuations over a plurality of times of pseudo fluctuation. For example, if the quasi-ream is 2 times (1 quasi-variation + this variability), the first-stage variability (1st quasi-rendition) will result in the first stage yellow vase notice effect, It can be set as the production aspect of developing into a second stage green vase notice production. Further, in the first fluctuating operation (the first pseudo-ream), it is possible to develop from a first stage to a multi-stage effect (for example, a second-stage green vase notice effect). In this case, in the second variation operation (main variation), it is possible to develop the effect after the stage developed in the previous variation display operation. For example, when the first variation operation (the first pseudo-ream) develops to the second stage green vase notice effect, the second variation operation (the second pseudo-ream) effect is the same as the second stage green vase notice effect. Or, it is possible to develop further to the stage beyond the red vase notice stage, which is the stage above it. When the previous notice effect 3 is selected, the effect control unit 24 determines whether to develop from the first step to the step-up notice effect of the plurality of steps based on the content of the change pattern. Selection can be made by lottery (determined by lottery) based on “variation pattern information” included in the pattern designation command.

(Preliminary notice 4)
Next, the previous notice effect 4 will be described. The prior notice effect 4 of the present embodiment belongs to the so-called “button notice effect”, and refers to a notice effect aspect in which the contents of the effect can change depending on whether or not the player has operated the frame effect button 13. This is a “player participation type” notice effect mode. In the “button notice effect”, when the frame effect button 13 is operated during a predetermined operation reception period, the currently appearing effect mode changes to another effect mode (for example, the currently displayed character display changes). Or a special sound effect is generated), and it is a notice effect form for notifying the winning expectation degree according to the type of the changed effect form. Such a “player-participation-type” performance mode can give the player a feeling as if he / she has influenced the game result, so that the fun of the game can be increased.

  The previous notice effect 4 belongs to the same “step-up notice effect” as the previous notice effect 3, but differs in the following points. The previous notice effect 4 does not necessarily start from the effect corresponding to the first stage, but may start from the effect corresponding to the intermediate stage (for example, the effect of the second stage). In addition, if the frame effect button 13 is operated during a predetermined period (button operation allowable period) during the generation of the first effect, whether the current effect is maintained (for example, the first effect is the first effect) In this case, the first stage effect is maintained even after the operation of the frame effect button 13), or whether it develops to the next stage effect (for example, when the first stage is the first stage effect, the frame effect button After 13 operations, it can be developed to the stage of the second stage without going through the stage of the next stage) (for example, if the first stage is stage 1 stage, The step-up notice effect mode is such that, after the frame effect button 13 is operated, the effect is developed to the final effect. When the step-up notice effect (in this embodiment, the previous notice effect 4) is selected as the notice effect form, the effect control unit 24 performs the first step as the step-up notice effect based on the contents of the variation pattern. It is selected (selecting by lottery based on a variation pattern) from which stage to the step-up notice effect of any stage among the plurality of stages is developed.

  As for the degree of expectation of winning a winning, the degree of expectation of winning a winning increases when the stage is advanced to an effect at a later stage, similar to the step-up notice effect of the previous notice effect 3. In the previous notice effect 4, a plurality of types of image display effects for button notice effects having different character colors of characters displayed on the screen are prepared. The degree of expectation for winning a prize is suggested depending on how it develops. The player can guess the winning expectation degree based on the difference in the character color of the dialogue when it finally develops.

  Each effect (effect numbers 17 to 20) belonging to the previous notice effect 4 is a narrowly defined effect scenario in which a predetermined sound effect and / or light effect occurs with the display of a specific image (effect number 16). Is unused and empty). Further, the sound effect and the light effect in these effect scenarios are the same for each effect, except for the sound effect in effect number 20 (D-pattern dialogue character notice). Only the sound production of the D pattern dialogue notice of the production number 20 is configured to generate a unique sound (D pattern dedicated sound) in order to let you know that a hot production with a high expectation of winning is generated. Yes.

  The combination of the pattern (here, the character image) and the color associated with each of the previous notice effects (effect numbers 16 to 20) belonging to the previous notice effect 4 is a yellow character (the line character yellow notice). Production: SU1), green letters (line letters green notice production: SU2), red letters (line letters red notice production: SU3), and D pattern letters (line letters D pattern notice production: SU4) The winning expectation degree is determined to increase in the order of the character color types (see FIG. 44). Each of the effects belonging to the previous notice effect 4 has the same dialogue, but is different from the preceding notice effects 1 to 3 in the same manner as the previous notice effect 3 (same or very similar) by changing the character color. ) Expected wins related to color. In the present embodiment, among the notice effects belonging to the previous notice effect 4, those that belong to the above-described reliability notice effect are the yellow text notice effect of the action number 17 corresponding to the first stage (winning expectation expectation 5%) Line number green notice effect of stage 18 corresponding to the second stage (winning expectation expectation degree 12.5%) Line letter red notice effect of stage number 19 corresponding to the third stage (winning expectation degree 25%) ) And line letter D pattern notice effect (actual winning expectation 50%) corresponding to the 4th stage. Also, those belonging to the above high-reliability notice effect are the line letter red notice effect of the production number 19 corresponding to the third stage (25% winning expectation degree) and the line letter of the production number 20 corresponding to the fourth stage. D pattern notice effect (expected winning expectation 50%).

  Like the previous notice effect 3, the previous notice effect 4 has four types (yellow, green, red, D pattern color), which is one less color element than the previous notice effects 1 and 2. (Color element regulation 1) has a great feature. That is, there is no white dialogue character notice effect in effect number 16. For this reason, the player who knows in advance that the color elements are narrowed from five types including “white” to four types excluding “white”, either the previous notice effect 1 or the previous notice effect 2 When the previous notice effect 4 occurs after the occurrence of the event, it is possible to estimate that the winning expectation level is further increased only by the fact. For example, after the peony pattern fireworks notice (production number 9) with the color element “red” appears as the previous notice effect 2, the green line character notice with the color element “green” (effect number 18) as the previous notice effect 4 When it appears, the color element has changed from “red” to “green” as before, so it is not considered that the winning expectation has fallen, but it is distracted by such a color element downgrade However, simply because of the fact that “preliminary notice effect 4 has occurred in addition to previous notice effect 2”, it can be determined that the winning expectation has increased, and it is possible to maintain a sense of tension.

(Preliminary notice 5)
Next, the previous notice effect 5 will be described. The prior notice effect 5 of the present embodiment is based on the operation pattern of the movable body accessory (clock-type accessory 80, flower-type accessory 90) and / or the light effect by the specific decorative lamp 45 arranged in the gaming machine. This is a notice effect mode that suggests the degree of expectation of winning a prize and is listed as an exception to the color element regulation 1 described later. Here, the expected winning degree of winning is determined by the difference in the emission color (white, blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern) of the LED of the number sector in the clock panel (number display part) 81 and the emission color of the decorative lamp 45. It has come to suggest.

  The light effect of the previous notice effect 5 is that the emission color is white (actor effect white notice effect), yellow (actor effect yellow notice effect), green (actor effect green notice effect), red (actor effect red) There are a total of five types: a notice effect) and a D pattern (an accessory effect D pattern notice effect), and the winning expectation degree is determined in order of the emission color types (see FIG. 44). Each effect belonging to the previous notice effect 5 has a winning expectation degree corresponding to the same color (same or very similar) as the previous notice effects 1 to 4 described above. However, only the sound production of the D pattern feature effect announcement of the production number 25 (movable body effect production relating to the D pattern) is a hot production with a high winning expectation expectation level (especially the winning expectation expectation level among the high reliability announcement effect) It is configured to generate a “unique sound” that indicates that a high production) has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, among the notice effects that belong to the previous notice effect 5, those that belong to the above-described reliability notice effect are the effect effect yellow notice effect of the effect number 22 (winning expectation expectation 5%) and the effect number 23. The effect production green notice effect (10% winning expectation expectation), the effect No. 24 effect red announcement effect (22.5% expectation per win expectation) and the effect No. 25 feature effect D pattern notice effect There are a total of 4 types (expected winning expectation 37.5%). In addition, those belonging to the above high-reliability notice effect include an effect number 24 for the effect effect red notice effect (winning expectation expectation level 22.5%) and an effect number 25 for the effect effect D pattern notice effect (winning expectation expectation degree) 37.5%).

  In addition, at least one of the preceding notice effects 1 to 5 is provided with a premium effect (premium effect) with a winning expectation of 100% (winning confirmed). You can also keep it. For example, it is possible to additionally provide a notice effect in which a premium image having a special color element type (for example, rainbow color) appears as a premium notice effect (premium effect) that is not selected at the time of losing. Although the selection rate can be determined as appropriate, it is preferable that the notice effect appears with a lower probability than other notice effects related to winning the big hit because the notice effect is a premium.

(6-4-2. Post-notice production: Fig. 45)
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the post-notice effect 1 and the post-notice effect 2 will be described. FIG. 45 illustrates a “post-notice effect” in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. In addition, the same point as the content described in the previous notice effect will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid redundant description.

  Post-notice effects 1-2 in this embodiment are notice effect modes that occur only in effect scenarios based on reach variation patterns (effect scenarios including reach effects). The post-notice effect 1 has three types (green, red, and D pattern color) of one less color element than the previous notice effects 3 to 4. Further, the post-notice effect 2 has three types (red and D pattern colors), which are one less color element types than the subsequent notice effect 1.

(Preliminary notice 1)
The post-notice effect 1 of this embodiment belongs to the same so-called “image appearance notice effect” as the previous notice effects 1 to 3, and a plurality of petals fall down as a specific image (notice image) related to the color element. This is a notice effect mode in which an expressed image is displayed, and the expected winning degree is suggested according to the type of the petal that falls. After this, in the notice effect 1, a plurality of types of image displays in which petals (patterns, designs) and petal colors (colors) attached to the flowers are different as objects to be displayed as the notice images related to the color elements. A stage is prepared, and the winning expectation degree is suggested depending on which kind of petal appears.

  The effect number 26 and the effect number 27 are empty among the respective notice effects belonging to the post-notice effect 1. The combination of the pattern (or design) and color relating to the production numbers 28-30 is the yellow “Chrysanthemum” petals (Chrysanthemum petal fall notice effect), the green “Chrysanthemum petals” petal (蕗 petal fall notice effect) , Red “peony” petals (peony petal fall notice effect) and D pattern “wisteria” petals (wisteria petal drop notice effect), and the winning expectation increases in the order of this petal type (See FIG. 45). The post-notice effect 1 has a winning expectation degree related to a combination of a pattern and a color common to the types of the previous notice effects 1 to 5. In the present embodiment, among the notice effects belonging to the post-notice effect 1, those belonging to the above-described reliability notice effect are those of the flower petal fall notice effect (actual winning expectation 10%) of the effect number 28 and the effect number 29. The peony petal fall notice effect (35% winning expectation expectation) and the D pattern Fuji petal fall notice effect (actual winning expectation 55%) of production number 30 are provided. In addition, those belonging to the above high-reliability notice effect include the peony petal fall notice effect of production number 29 (winning expectation expectation 35%) and the D pattern Fuji petal fall notice effect of production number 30 (winning expectation expectation 55%) ).

  There are three types of post-notice effects 1 (yellow, green, red, D pattern color), which are one less color element type than the previous notice effects 3 to 4 (color element regulation 1). That is, the production numbers 26 and 27 are empty, and there is no lily petal fall notice effect or chrysanthemum fall notice effect here. For this reason, the player who knows in advance that the color elements are narrowed down from four types including “yellow” to three types excluding “yellow”, either of the prior notice effects 3, 4 occurs. Then, when the subsequent notice effect 1 is generated, it is possible to estimate that the winning expectation level is further increased only by the fact.

  For example, when a red dialogue letter notice (effect number 19) appears as the previous notice effect 4, and when a camellia petal drop notice effect (effect number 28) appears as the later notice effect 1, as before. Instead of thinking that the winning expectation has decreased because the color element has changed from “red” to “green”, simply add “pre-notice production 4” Based on the fact that “post-notification effect 1 has occurred”, it can be determined that the degree of expectation for winning has increased, and it is possible to maintain a sense of tension.

(Post-notice production 2)
Next, the post-notice effect 2 will be described. The post-notice effect 2 of the present embodiment belongs to the same “button notice effect” as the previous notice effect 4, and depending on whether the previous notice effect player has operated the frame effect button 13 or not, This is a notice effect mode in which the contents of the effect can change. The post-notice effect 2 appears after a predetermined time of the post-notice effect 1.

  In the post-notification effect 2, a plurality of types of image display effects for button notification effects with different characters are prepared as notification effect modes, and the frame effect button 13 is operated during a predetermined operation reception period. This is a notice effect mode in which an image display effect representing a character cut-in appears, and the expected winning degree is predicted according to which type of character is cut-in displayed. The character appearing here is substantially the same as or similar to the previous notice effect 1, except that a part of the character is displayed in an enlarged cut-in display and the winning expectation is different. Is the same. However, the entire character image can be handled as a character cut-in image. For example, a character wearing a floral kimono may be cut-in displayed. In addition, there is no particular limitation on the display mode of the color elements given to the character. For example, an image (aura image) in which the character wears a colored aura as an image expressing the appearance of an aura such as afterglow around the character. May be displayed.

  In the post-notice presentation effect 2 of the present embodiment, as an object to be displayed as a notice image relating to the color element, an image of a face enlargement portion with an emphasis on the character's line of sight is a surrounding area image (for example, a character background image and / or character A display image occupying a part of the liquid crystal region (referred to as a “line-of-sight cut-in image”) and a character cut-in image are cut in and displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Depending on the color elements (colors) attached to the eye cut-in image, different types of image display effects are prepared, and the winning winning expectation is determined depending on which color element character cut-in image appears. The degree will be announced. The player can estimate the winning-winning expectation degree based on the color type of the character cut-in image that appears in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In the present embodiment, among the notice effects belonging to the subsequent notice effect 2, those belonging to the above-mentioned reliability notice effect are the red character cut-in (red) notice effect (actual winning expectation 36%) of the effect number 34, There are two types of D pattern character cut-in (D pattern) notice effect (winning expectation expectation 62.5%), and these two kinds belong to the high reliability notice effect.

  Further, the post-notice effect 2 has three types (red, D pattern color), which is one less color element type than the post-notice effect 1, (color element regulation 1). That is, the production numbers 31, 32, and 33 are vacant, and the production number 33 corresponds to the “Aoi Flower Pattern Character Appearance Advance” corresponding to the “Aoi Petal Fall Appearance Advance Prediction (Production Number 28)” of the post-notice production 1. There is no (green) notice. Therefore, in the post-notice production 2, the choice color element includes three types (green, red, and D pattern color) including “green”, and two types (red, For a player who knows in advance that the selection range has been narrowed to the side of the color element (red, D pattern color) that has a higher degree of expectation than green, the selection range is reduced to D pattern color). It is possible to estimate that the winning expectation level has been increased only by the fact that “the previous notice effect 2 has occurred after the previous notice effect 1 has occurred”.

  For example, when the post-notice effect 1 is generated and then the post-notice effect 2 is generated, the D pattern Fuji petal fall notice (effect number 30 of the post-notice effect 1) appears first, and then the peony pattern character appearance notice ( When the production number 34) of the later notice production 2 appears, it is not considered that the winning expectation has decreased because the color element has changed from “D pattern color” to “red” as before. Without being distracted by the downgrading of the color elements, it is judged that the winning expectation level has risen simply by the fact that “the post-notice effect 2 in addition to the post-notice effect 1” has occurred, and the sense of tension continues. Can be made.

  It should be noted that, in the above-described post-notice effect 1 or post-notice effect 2, it is possible to additionally provide a premium effect with a winning expectation degree of 100% (winning confirmation). For example, as a preview effect (premium effect) for premium that is not selected at the time of losing, a preview effect (for example, rainbow-colored petals fall down) that a premium image having a special color element (for example, rainbow color) appears "All kinds of petal group fall notice effect") in which a premium image expressing the above appears can be additionally provided.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a specific image (preliminary image) relating to a color element is displayed as a notice effect, the objects to be displayed as the notice image relating to the color element have different colors and / or patterns. A preview image is displayed, and the difference in the expected winning degree can be notified according to the display mode type.

  Each of the expected notice effects described above is an example of an effect aspect according to the present invention, and other effects by patterns (or designs) and / or colors that have nothing to do with these expected notice effects. Embodiments can be included.

<7. Pre-reading notice production>
In addition, in the notice effect, there is a possibility of winning a big hit for an operation holding ball (undigested operation holding ball) that has not yet been provided for execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). There is a pre-reading notice effect that informs in advance (winning expectation). Regarding the pre-reading notice effect, first, in the main control unit 20, when an operation holding ball is generated (when a start condition is satisfied), the operation holding ball is used for executing the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of a special symbol). Before being provided, a “pre-fetching determination” is performed to determine in advance the jackpot lottery result related to the operation-reserved ball (step S317 in FIG. 10, S337 in FIG. 11 (random number determination processing to special stop symbol data creation processing). ), Steps S409 (special electric accessory actuating operation determination random number determination process) to S410 (special stop symbol creation process) in FIG. 12).

  Further, using the above “pre-fetching determination” result, a special symbol variation pattern (variation pattern at the start of variation) is determined in advance in the future when the activated ball is subjected to the symbol variation display game. “Pre-reading variation pattern determination” is performed (see S319 in FIG. 10 and S339 in FIG. 11 (start-up winning random number determination process)). The variation pattern of the special symbol determined in advance is referred to as a “prefetch variation pattern”. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance whether the reach variation pattern that passes through the reach state or the normal variation pattern that does not pass through the reach state.

  Note that the prefetch variation pattern is determined using at least the winning lottery result (preliminary determination result of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery in the present embodiment), and therefore the prefetch variation pattern information transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. Is not only information such as the presence / absence of reach, the presence / absence of pseudo-reams, and the number of times, but also the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is the “hit fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a big hit (including small hits) Information on whether or not it is a “losing fluctuation pattern”. When the information on the prefetch variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs effect control processing related to the prefetch notice effect. A series of processes for determining the prefetch fluctuation pattern through the prefetch determination in this way is referred to as “prefetch determination”.

  Specifically, the main control unit 20 includes a “hold addition command” for designating the number of suspended balls at the time of pre-reading determination and a “winning command” including information on the pre-read determination result (information on at least pre-decision of the winning result). When the effect control unit 24 receives these commands, the effect control process related to the pre-reading notice effect is performed based on the information included in the command.

  The hold addition command and winning command are each composed of 2 bytes. In the case of this embodiment, the hold addition command can be specified as data on the upper byte side that can specify the special figure type information (other of the special figures 1 and 2), and the operation hold ball number information at the time of prefetch determination. The command at the time of winning is composed of data on the upper byte side for designating the winning result and data on the lower byte side that can specify the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern (FIG. 30, FIG. 30). 31).

  However, the effect control unit 24 does not necessarily cause the pre-reading notice effect to appear. If the pre-reading notice effect is determined by lottery and it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect can be executed, the timing at which the operation holding ball is generated is determined. Or, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game to be performed first, or at a predetermined timing in the game, a pre-reading notice effect for the current action-holding ball is displayed.

  Note that the “look-ahead variation pattern” obtained by the pre-reading determination when the operation holding ball is generated does not necessarily need to be the “variation pattern at the start of variation” obtained when the operation holding ball is actually subjected to the change display operation. Absent. For example, a case where the variation pattern at the start of the variation is a variation pattern designating “pseudo 2 + SP reach A” will be representatively described.

  In this case, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the type of reach production of “pseudo2 + SP reach A” but the “SP reach A” type that is the main point, specifically, “SP It can be specified that the type is “SP reach A type” in which the variation patterns of the same system called “reach A” are classified. In the case of this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the same system called “SP reach A” refers to SP reach A (no pseudo), pseudo 2 + SP reach A, pseudo 3 + SP reach A, and the like. In the pre-reading notice effect relating to this case, an effect mode related to “SP reach A type” in which the variation patterns of the same system, “SP reach A”, are grouped.

  Therefore, the main information that is notified by the pre-reading notice effect is likely to generate a scolding effect (in this case, the SP reach A type) with a high degree of expectation of winning for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future. It is information such as whether it is low, in other words, whether or not the possibility of winning a big hit is high, by informing the player in advance before such action information is digested, In addition to the current symbol variation display game, the interest of the player is improved not only for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future, but also for the fun of the game.

(7-1. Pre-reading notice effect mode: FIGS. 5 and 6)
Next, referring to FIG. 5 and FIG. 5 and 6 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the prefetching notice effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and show an example of the prefetching notice effect.

  First, referring to FIG. 5, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side is partly in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the drawing, below the display area of the decorative symbol). A holding display area 76 for displaying the number and a holding display area 77 for displaying the number of the operation holding balls on the special symbol 2 side are provided. : "O (white circle mark)" in the figure) or in the light-off state (no operation hold ball: circle in the broken line in the figure), information on the current number of operation hold balls is notified.

  The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and a maximum of four holding displays can be displayed in each holding display area 76, 77. It has become. Specifically, in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost action hold ball is the action that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among all the action hold balls in the hold display. Displayed as a holding ball. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, on-hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) each including a hold icon (icon image) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 by the same number (four) as the maximum hold storage number Special symbols 1 side), a2 to d2 (corresponds to special symbols 2 side). These hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are normally switched to the operation state (lighted state) by the same number, for example, three, as the number of operation hold balls existing when the prefetch determination is made. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of hold operations. However, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined prefetch notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). As a result, this works as a means for generating a pre-reading notice effect.

  On the left side of the on-hold display areas 76 and 77, a on-change display area 78 is provided for indicating an operation on-hold ball (hereinafter referred to as “game on hold”) that is actually used in the special symbol change display game. It has been. In the case of this embodiment, the in-fluctuation display area 78 is configured such that an image of a form in which an icon of a game execution hold K currently provided for the game appears on the icon of the seat J appears. That is, when the variation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the game running hold K. The icon moves to the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time. When the game execution hold K is placed on the seat J, basically, the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the operation related to the current symbol variation display game is performed. A pre-reading notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode) for the holding ball is notified to the player even during the game. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of winning the winning combination.

  However, in the present embodiment, a hold display mode different from the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 can appear. For example, the display color of the icon changes at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game (for example, a hold with a higher win expectation than the hold display mode displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77) The display mode is changed to a display mode), and the shape is changed to another shape (for example, a character image or an item image suggesting a winning expectation degree or a pseudo-continuous generation (pseudo-continuous number)). Thereby, the winning winning expectation degree regarding the special symbol variation display game of this time is notified more clearly.

  When receiving the hold addition command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 performs a pre-reading notice lottery for drawing whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is performed as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Do. In this pre-reading notice lottery, the action-holding ball related to the winning becomes the action-holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (for example, the holding display part b2 with hatching in FIG. 5 is applicable). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice lottery execution condition is based on the condition that there is no reach fluctuation pattern type among the pre-reading fluctuation patterns related to the existing operation holding ball. This is in order to avoid the fact that other reach effects intervene in the middle of the pre-reading notice effects that are continuously generated, the original look-ahead notice effects are cut off, and the effect of the effects becomes dilute. . The winning probability by the pre-reading notice lottery is higher than that of “losing”, and in the case of the reach type with a relatively high expectation of winning, the pre-reading notice effect is generated. Depending on whether or not to do, winning expectation degree to the big hit is shown.

  When the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons in the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon that is the object of the prefetching notice is notified from, for example, the blue color of the normal holding display. A pre-reading notice effect of “holding display changing system” is performed in which the display changes to a special holding color such as yellow, green, red, D pattern, or rainbow color. Here, the blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, and rainbow color display of the hold icon means that the winning winning expectation is high in the order of this color. In particular, the display of the rainbow color hold icon is This is a premium hold icon that displays a big hit (determined). This reserved color is determined by lottery based on the contents of the prefetch fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the “big hit” is more likely to be selected than the “losing”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation level for winning, a reserved color with a high expected level of winning is selected with a high probability. It is like that. Note that the pre-reading notice effect mode of the “holding display changing system” is not limited to changing the holding color as described above, but may be changed to an icon imitating a special character. Such “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is displayed when an operation holding ball is generated, and is therefore referred to as a “winning change system” pre-reading notice effect.

  The existing operation holding balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one operation hold ball has been consumed, the display position of the hold display portion corresponding to the existing operation hold ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although the control is performed, the above-described hold display mode different from normal continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the above-described holding display change system (winning change system) causes a dedicated notice effect to appear across multiple symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It can be said that this is an aspect of “continuous notice effect”. This continuous notice effect is executed across a plurality of symbol variation display games, and is different from the notice effect performed during one symbol variation operation like a pseudo-ream.

  In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect, the “variation start changing system” pre-reading notice effect that is triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game can be displayed. It has become. This “change start at the time of change” pre-reading notice effect is, for example, by displaying a pre-reading-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, which is executed in one or more symbol fluctuation display games, This is a pre-reading notice effect of “image display change system” in which the image is displayed continuously or continuously. In other words, the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is a symbol variation display game related to establishment of a start condition when a game ball wins a start opening and a start condition is satisfied during one symbol change display game. The right to execute is temporarily stored, and a pre-reading notice lottery is performed regarding whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is to be performed. In the case where there are a plurality of pieces, the symbol variation display game can be expressed with some relevance for all or some of the reserved memories. For example, in all or some of the symbol variation display games relating to the existing operation holding balls from the oldest operation holding ball to the operation holding ball subject to the pre-reading notice in the storage order, a pre-read-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (A preview image imitating the lightning bolt shown) is displayed. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation start change system” is the same as the “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect. It can be said that this is one aspect of the “notice effect”. Note that different look-ahead notice images may be used in each symbol variation display game.

  The execution form of the prefetch notice effect can be set as follows. For example, (a) only the winning change system (holding display changing system) is executed, (b) only the change starting change system (image display changing system) is executed, (c) winning change system and change starting change Various execution forms such as executing both of the systems can be adopted. In the present embodiment, the configurations (a) to (c) are configured to be executable. Specifically, the prefetch notice lottery effect at the time of winning and the prefetch notice effect of the change system at the start of change are each drawn independently by the prefetch notice lottery, and any of the above (i) to (c) It is determined whether to perform the pre-reading notice effect or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect itself. In other words, the pre-reading notice effect of at least one of the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change can appear (the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change can appear independently). (S714 in FIG. 22 described later).

  Therefore, even if the “previous change system” look-ahead notice effect appears, the “variation start change system” look-ahead notice effect does not necessarily appear, and vice versa. Even if the “system” prefetching notice effect appears, the “previous change system” prefetching notice effect does not necessarily appear. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect of “change system at winning (holding display changing system)” and the pre-reading notice effect of “change system at start of change (image display changing system)” may occur in duplicate (simultaneously).

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect of “change system at winning” and “change system at start of variation” can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “change system at winning” and “ Only the pre-reading notice effect of any of the “variation start change system” can be configured to appear. Further, the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 36, and may be displayed by different effect means. For example, the “change system at the time of winning a prize” is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 36 and the “change system at the start of change” is 1 Or it can be made to appear by a multiple types of movable body accessory.

  Here, as described above, because the pre-reading notice effect of the change system at the time of winning and the pre-reading notice effect of the change system at the start of variation are configured to be able to appear independently, different operation suspensions that precede and follow in time series There may be a case where the pre-reading notice effect for the sphere is executed redundantly. However, if the pre-reading notice effect for the new action-holding ball occurs repeatedly during the pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect that is currently being generated is the action-holding ball that was generated earlier in time series (the old action-holding effect) It is unclear whether it is a look-ahead notice effect for a ball) or a new look-ahead notice effect for a new action-holding ball, leading to confusion for the player or the expectation level related to the notice effect. It causes problems such as unclearness.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect for a new operation holding ball is not executed (restricted) (a processing route that bypasses S714 in FIG. 22). Specifically, during (A) the pre-reading notice of the change system at the time of winning (holding display changing system) and / or the change system at the start of change (image display changing system), the pre-reading notice for the new action-holding ball It is intended to restrict the appearance (change system at the time of winning (hold display change system) and / or change system at the start of change (image display change system) from appearing (execution). The lottery regarding the pre-reading notice effect for the ball is not executed, and preferably the pre-reading notice of the winning change system (holding display changing system) and / or the change starting change system (image display changing system). During the production, any pre-reading notice production for a new active ball is restricted.

  Further, in consideration of the point that it is not preferable that the pre-reading notice effects of the same system appear, it may be configured to limit the redundant occurrence of the pre-reading notice effects of the same system. For example, during (B) a winning change system (holding display changing system) pre-reading notice, a winning change system (holding display changing system) pre-reading notice effect for a new activated holding ball will appear. Limit. In this case, the fluctuation start time system can be unrestricted. Further, during the pre-reading notice of the change system at the start of change (image display change system), a pre-read notice effect of the change system at the start of change (image display change system) targeted for a new operation holding ball appears. Limit that. In this case, the winning change system can be unrestricted.

(7-2. Example of pre-reading notice effect: FIG. 6)
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the pre-reading notice effect mode woven by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the ornamental symbol is being varied and displayed), the upper start opening 34 is won to win the special symbol 1 side operation holding ball. Suppose that the number has become three, and among the third, the action holding ball on which the second movement start operation is executed is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (in this case, the pre-reading notice lottery and change of the winning change system) This shows a case in which a winning change was made in the pre-change notice lottery at the start. In addition, here, it is assumed that the first operation hold ball previously held and the third operation hold ball held later are operation hold balls that have not been pre-selected for the pre-reading notice lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, the production control unit 24 displays a hold display of the second operation hold ball that has been subject to the pre-read notice, and a hold display dedicated to pre-read that is different from normal (hereinafter, “dedicated hold display”). (Referred to as). At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the pre-reading notice is maintained as a normal hold display (hereinafter referred to as “normal hold display”). In the figure, when the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball subject to the pre-reading notice is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (◯) mark) to the dedicated hold display (hatched circle). Show. This notifies the player that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. FIG. 1 (1) shows that the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is finished and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “246” (the result is “lost”).

  The game progresses to (2) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation reservation ball on the special symbol 1 side which is the first (oldest operation reservation ball). The action control ball 24 digests the action hold ball, and the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each action hold ball to the left with the start of the special symbol variation display game. It is set as the hold display mode which shows the state digested by one, and the decoration symbol fluctuation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system”, a background image for the pre-reading notice effect (for example, a lightning effect by displaying a lightning image simulating lightning: a dedicated notice image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Display. Thereby, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

  Then, the game progresses to FIG. 3 (3), and the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is terminated and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “351” (the result is “lost”).

  Subsequently, the game progresses to FIG. 4 (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation holding ball, that is, the operation holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The action control unit 24 starts and digests the operation hold ball, and at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left, respectively. The decorative symbol variation display game based on the actuated holding ball is started. At this time, the “dedicated hold display” of the change system at the time of winning disappears from the screen at the time of the shift, and is terminated when the current symbol variation display game is started (with the digestion of the operation hold ball). In addition, a special notice image (in this case, lightning effect) of the change system at the start of the change is ended at the end of the generation in the symbol change display game. This figure (4) illustrates the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game.

  In this way, a series of pre-reading notice effects has been completed. After that, if there is a roaring effect (pseudo-ream or reach effect (SP reach)) that increases the chances of winning the winning prize during this symbol variation display game, the expectation for the big hit is combined with the contents of the pre-reading notice effect. The feeling will be further enhanced. In Fig. 4 (4), it was explained that the lightning effect at the beginning of the change ended at the end of the current occurrence of the symbol change display game. Since it is a symbol variation display game related to a holding ball, there is little need to generate a lightning effect in the game. Therefore, it is good also as a structure which does not show the lightning effect of a change system at the time of a fluctuation | variation start in the symbol fluctuation display game which concerns on the action reservation ball | bowl which became the prefetch notice object. In this case, the change-ahead look-ahead notice effect at the start of variation ends with the end of the “dedicated hold display” of the change system at the time of winning.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate the pre-reading notice effect as described above as one aspect of the continuous notice effect. Thereby, since the variation of production can be made rich, the fun of the game can be improved.

<Processing on Main Control Unit Side: FIGS. 7 to 18>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7-18, the game operation | movement process in the main-control part 20 side of this embodiment is demonstrated. The main control unit 20 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 7) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 8).

<8. Main process on the main control side: FIG. 7>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main process is started when the power is turned on without operating the initialization switch (RAM clear switch: not shown) as in the case of recovery from a power failure, and the initialization switch is turned on. There is a case where the power source is turned on by being operated. In any case, when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a voltage is supplied to each control board by the power supply board 31, and the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) starts the main control side main process shown in FIG. .

  In the main control side main process, the CPU 201 first executes a necessary initial setting process before the start of the gaming operation (step S011). For example, it first sets itself to an interrupt disabled state, sets it to a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), and initializes register values in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer.

  Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal which is an output signal of the RAM clear switch input through an input port (not shown) is determined (step 012). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch operated by the store clerk of the pachinko parlor. doing.

  Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the determination result in step S012 is “YES”, and the entire area of the RAM is cleared to zero (step S016). Therefore, the value of the backup flag set at the time of power-off becomes zero together with other checksum values.

  Next, a “RAM clear display command” for notifying that the RAM area has been cleared to zero is transmitted as an initialization command to each control board (step S017). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for notifying that the RAM has been cleared (step S018). When the RAM is cleared, the gaming state becomes “normal”, and when the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear display command, the RAM clear notification timer (30 seconds) displays an initialization notification effect to notify that the RAM is cleared. This is executed until the time elapses, and the production mode is set to the “normal production mode” as the production mode in the initial state.

  Next, the CTC that outputs an interrupt signal for starting the timer interrupt operation is initialized (step S019), and the CPU is set in an interrupt enabled state.

  Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number update processes are executed during that time (steps S020 to S022). In this various random number update processing (step S021), various random numbers used in special symbol variation display games and normal symbol variation display games (random numbers related to jackpot lotteries circulating through a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (used for symbol lottery) Random numbers used for changing the initial value (start value) of the random numbers for special symbol determination) and random numbers related to lottery per auxiliary (random numbers for determining per-subject winning lottery per auxiliary) The initial value random number for determination and the initial value random number for determination per auxiliary) and the random number for variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern are updated.

  In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, a special symbol determination random number counter initial value generation counter, a special symbol determination counter, and the like as various random number counters used for symbol lottery related to jackpot lottery, supplementary lottery, or variation pattern lottery, etc. There are provided a random number counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary, a random number counter for variation pattern, and the like. These counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. In the various random number update processing in step S021, the above-described special symbol determination random number counter, the two initial value generation counters for generating the initial value of the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, the fluctuation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated. Generate various soft random numbers. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as the variation pattern random number counter is 0 to 238, a value is obtained from the count value storage area for generating the variation pattern random number value in the RAM 203, and 1 is added to the obtained value. And then stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 239, zero is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes except during a timer interrupt process that is executed intermittently.

  Returning to the determination process in step S012, the description will be continued. At the time of recovery from the power failure state, the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is in the OFF state (step S012: YES). In such a case, the backup flag value is determined following the determination process in step S012 (step S013). Note that the backup flag is set to the ON state (backup flag = 5 AH ('** H' means any hexadecimal number) when the power is shut down, and is OFF (backup) The flag is reset to 00H).

  Therefore, when the power is turned on or when recovering from a power failure, the backup flag should normally be in the ON state. However, the backup flag is reset (OFF) if the predetermined processing is not completed before the power is cut off for some reason. Therefore, when the backup flag is in the OFF state (step S013: NO), the process proceeds to step S016 to return the operation of the gaming machine to the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the backup flag is in an ON state (step S013: YES), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. When the checksum value is calculated, the calculation result is compared with the stored value at the SUM address in the RAM 203 (step S014). The SUM address stores a checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation when the power is turned off. The stored calculation result is maintained by a backup power source together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match according to the determination in step S014.

  However, if the checksum operation could not be executed when the power was turned off, or even if it can be executed, the data in the work area may be damaged before the checksum operation of the main process is executed. In such a case, the determination result in step S014 is inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to a discrepancy between the determination results (step S014: NO), the process proceeds to step S016, RAM clear processing is executed, and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. On the other hand, when the checksum value obtained by the checksum calculation matches the stored value at the SUM address (step S014: YES), the stack pointer before power shutdown is restored based on the backup data, and the processing at power shutdown is performed. A game restoration process necessary for starting the game from the state is performed (step S015). Also, in the game restoration process, predetermined information for game restoration is acquired from the backup information (when the power is shut off, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 operation holding ball number information, the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) information, The internal game state information and the like) and various effect control commands (power return command) including the information are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. As a result, the effect control unit 24 is informed of the game progress state when the power is cut off, and is restored to the effect state when the power is cut off when the game is restored.

  When the game restoration process at step S015 is completed, the process proceeds to the process at step S019, the CTC is initialized and the CPU is set in the interrupt enabled state, and thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are set until an interrupt occurs. In the meantime, various random number update processes described above are executed (steps S020 to S022).

<9. Main control timer interrupt processing: Fig. 8>
Next, a timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interruption process. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 4 ms) from the CTC, and interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process.

  In FIG. 8, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring the power supply state from the power supply control board 31 (step S051). In this power abnormality check process, it is mainly monitored whether the power is normally supplied. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power interruption occurs, a backup process is performed in which predetermined game information at the time of power interruption is stored in the RAM so that the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is performed (step S052). Timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timer described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

  Next, input management processing is performed (step S053). In this input management process, information detected by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the winning counter. Here, the detection information by the various sensors is output from winning detection switches such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the like. ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal. Thereby, it is monitored for each interruption whether or not a game ball is detected (winning occurs) at each winning opening. The “winning counter” is a counter that is provided corresponding to each winning slot and counts the number of winning game balls (the number of winning balls). In the present embodiment, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, an upper start opening winning counter for the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening winning counter for the lower starting opening 35, a normal symbol starting opening winning counter for the normal pattern starting opening 37, a large A prize winning counter for the prize winning opening 50 and a prize winning counter for the general winning opening 43 for the general winning opening 43 are provided.

  Further, in this input management process, it is also monitored whether or not there is an illegal prize based on whether or not the detection information from the prize detection switch has won a prize during a period in which the prize should be allowed. For example, even though the movable wing piece 47 is not in operation, the lower start port sensor 35a detects a game ball or is not in a big hit game (even though it is not within the big winning port effective winning period). When the big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball or the like, it is regarded as an illegal prize, and a predetermined error process is performed in an error management process (step S055) described later in order to notify the outside to that effect. It has become. If an illegal winning is detected, the detection information can be invalidated and the payout of prize balls can be invalidated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a winning ball due to illegal winning.

  Next, random number management processing within a timer interrupt for periodically updating the random numbers related to each variation display game is performed (step S054). In this periodic random number update process, a special symbol determination random number or auxiliary per-subject determination random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and a process for changing the start value of the random number counter is performed each time the random number counter makes a round. For example, the value of the special symbol judgment random number counter is updated (added by +1) within a predetermined range, and the special symbol judgment random number counter initial value generation counter value is read each time the special symbol judgment random number counter makes one round. The value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter is random while the update cycle is constant.

  Next, an error management process for monitoring presence / absence of abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S055). In this error management process, an abnormality in the gaming operation state is monitored, and when an operation abnormality (error) occurs, an error process corresponding to the error type is performed. As the error processing, for example, a predetermined game operation (for example, a game ball payout operation or a game ball launch operation) is stopped, or an error notification command (error command) corresponding to the error type is produced. To notify the effect means that an error has occurred.

  Next, prize ball management processing is performed (step S056). In this prize ball management process, the data stored in the above input management process is grasped and the prize counter is checked. Control unit) 29. Upon receiving this payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning mouth (a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning mouth × the number of winning balls corresponding to the value of the winning counter) is paid out. Yes.

  Next, normal symbol management processing is performed (step S057). In this normal symbol management process, a lottery per auxiliary in the normal symbol fluctuation display game is performed, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the stop display mode of the normal symbol are determined, or blinking is repeated every predetermined time. Create normal symbol data (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol variation), and if normal symbol is not varying, create data for stop display (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol stop display) Or The normal symbol management process functions as an auxiliary game lottery unit and a normal symbol display unit (normal symbol display control unit) for controlling the normal symbol variation display operation.

  Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is performed (step S058). In this normal electric accessory management process, as a lottery per assistance regarding the assistance per assistance in the normal symbol management process (step S057), “winning lottery per assistance” in which lottery is selected for each assistance, when the winning lottery is won In this case, a “per assistance symbol lottery” is performed in which one of 1 to 3 assists is selected. Further, based on the lottery result per assistance, generation of an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a necessary for the occurrence of the open-game game and setting of the data (solenoid control data) are performed. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a in a solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable blade piece 47 is controlled. In addition, the ordinary electric accessory management process includes a lottery means for assisting to execute a lottery for one or a plurality of types of assists, and a means for controlling an auxiliary unit for performing an open control game based on the lottery result in the lottery means for assisting. Function as.

  Next, special symbol management processing is performed (step S059). In this special symbol management process (hit determination means), the big symbol lottery in the special symbol variation display game is mainly performed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (prefetch variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) based on the lottery result. And special stop symbols. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, special electric accessory management processing is performed (step S060). In this special electric accessory management process, a setting process necessary for executing and controlling the winning game corresponding to the winning winning is mainly performed based on the big winning lottery result. Details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, right notification information management processing is performed (step S061). In this right-handed notification information management process, when the high-base gaming state in which “electric support is present” occurs, right-handed instruction information (information for instructing to aim at the right flow path 3c (normal symbol start port) 37 is performed to display a “right-handed notification effect (first launch position guidance effect)” that informs 37 of the instruction information for prompting a prize))). The right-handed instruction information here is, for example, an image that prompts the player to “right-hand” on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a warning display of “right-handed”) or a right-handed sound from the speaker 46. Sound effects (eg, “Right-right” sound) are generated. This right-handed information is reported in a case where it is presumed that the player accidentally targets the launch position on the left flow path 3b side in the state where there is electric support, and in the state where there is electric support. The case where a winning occurs at the upper start opening 34, or the case where no winning occurs at the normal symbol starting opening 37 even after a predetermined time elapses. In such a case, in this right-handed notification information management process, a “right-handed instruction command” instructing execution of the right-handed notification effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives this command. The right-handed notification effect is controlled to appear.

  In addition, here, when the game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol start opening 37 under the “no electric support” state, the left-handed instruction information (information for instructing to aim at the left flow path 3b (the upper start opening 34). Processing for causing a “left-handed notification effect (second launch position guidance effect)” to be announced to indicate the winning instruction information)) is also performed. The left-handed instruction information here is the same as the right-handed instruction information described above. For example, an image that prompts the player to “left-handed” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a warning display of “left-handed”). ), Or a sound effect that prompts the user to make a right stroke (for example, a sound of “Please strike left”). In this case, in this right-handed notification information management process, a “left-handed instruction command” for instructing execution of the left-handed notification effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Upon receiving this command, the effect control unit 24 is left-handed. The notification effect is controlled to appear.

  Next, LED management processing is performed (step S062). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39a and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thereby, the change display and stop display of a normal symbol and a special symbol are performed. It should be noted that the normal symbol display data created in the normal symbol management process in step S057 and the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 9 described later) during the special symbol management process in step S059 Display data is output by this LED management process.

  Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S063). In this external terminal management process, the operation state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external concentration terminal board 21. The above-mentioned operation state information includes that a big hit game has occurred (condition device has been activated), that a small hit game has occurred, that a symbol variation display game has been executed (a special symbol variation display game has started or ended) )), Winning information (indicating that winning is made at the start opening or the big winning opening or information on the number of winning balls), and various information such as error occurrence information.

  Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S064). In this solenoid management process, an excitation signal output process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S058, and a special electric accessory management process in step S060. Excitation signal output processing for the special winning opening solenoid 52c based on the solenoid control data is performed. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b operate in a predetermined pattern, and the lower start opening 35 and the big winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

  After the processing of steps S051 to S064 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (register restoration processing), and the interrupt enabled state is set (step S065). Thus, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interruption, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interruption occurs.

<10. Special symbol management processing: Fig. 9>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S059) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process in step S059.

  In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process on the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then a special symbol on the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). 2. A starting port check process is performed (step S302). Details of the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the start opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the condition device operation flag state is then determined (step S304). The “conditional device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit game is not being played.

  When the condition device operation flag is OFF (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, when the big hit game is not being played (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol operation status (00H) ˜03H), a process related to a special symbol variation display operation is performed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, if the small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5 AH) or if the big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5 AH), the processing related to the variable symbol display operation of steps S306 to S308 is not performed. It progresses to the special symbol display data update process of step S309. Accordingly, when the big hit game is being played, the special symbol variation display operation is not performed (the special symbol display state of the special symbol display device is kept fixed after the big hit). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is “waiting (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)” or “confirming (03H)”. The processing corresponding to each is executed.

  Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H, 01H)”, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the symbol variation processing (step S307) is “confirming (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) is executed. Here, “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned “under confirmation” indicates that the special symbol has been changed and is stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, a variation display operation that sets a variation start and a variation stop of a special symbol is realized. The details of the special symbol variation start process (step S306), the special symbol variation process (step S307), and the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308 :) are respectively shown in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, and FIG. This will be described later with reference to FIG. 16B.

  When any of the processes in steps S306 to S308 is completed, a special symbol display data update process in step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. If the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blink display during special symbol stop display) is generated. The special symbol display data created here is output in the LED management process (step S62) of FIG. Thus, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S060 of FIG.

(10-1. Special Figure 1 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 10)
First, the special figure 1 starting port check process (step S301 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 starting port check process in step S301. This special figure 1 start opening check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Here, as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1, The process of adding the number of suspended balls on the special figure 1 side due to the occurrence of winning at the upper start opening 34, the process of storing various random numbers, the command at the time of winning, the process of creating / transmitting the holding addition command, etc. are performed. The special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 9), which will be described later, also serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, like the special figure 1 starting port check process. As the pre-start process for executing the symbol variation display game 2 (special figure 2 side winning process), the special pending figure 2 side operation pending ball number addition process caused by the occurrence of winning at the lower start opening 35, various random numbers Storage processing, creation processing of a pending addition command, and the like are performed, and the same processing procedure as the special figure 1 starting port check processing described below is performed.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of the operation holding balls (hereinafter referred to as “special drawing 1 operation holding balls”) according to the special symbol 1 is less than the maximum holding memory number (here, the upper limit of four). If no winning is detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to step S325 described later. If the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step (S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number (step S313), and the process proceeds to step S314.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used for the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. The reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operating reserve ball (holding data). Until the first variation display operation is performed (until the execution of the special symbol variation display game 1), it is held and stored in the order in which the start conditions are established (the winning order). The reserved memory area includes a reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (a special symbol 1 reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first reserved memory area)) and a special symbol 2 And a special figure 2 reserved storage area (second reserved storage area) corresponding to. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of activated balls to be held: n = 4 in the present embodiment). (Holding storage order is stored in the order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area,..., Holding n−1 storage area, holding n storage area).

  Of the various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number and the variation pattern random number are extracted from a random number counter that generates a random number in software corresponding to each random number. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the main process executed between the interrupt process and the interrupt process that occur intermittently in the count value storage areas corresponding to each provided in the RAM 203, The value is obtained as it is.

  On the other hand, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit (a jackpot determination random number counter: not shown) that generates a random number in hardware. The random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing when a game ball detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 34a, and the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. The CPU 201 stores this count value as a jackpot determination random number value in a storage area for the jackpot determination random value in the RAM 203 provided separately from the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (a random latch buffer for determining the operation of the special electric accessory). At a necessary timing, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the random number latch buffer for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is read and used. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value at the time of winning is stored in the special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer and the reserved storage area. May be stored as it is in the reserved storage area, and the jackpot determination random number value of the corresponding reserved storage area may be read at a necessary timing.

  Next, pre-read prohibition data (EVENT: “FFH” for prohibiting pre-reading determination is used as win command data (data corresponding to the lower byte (EVENT) of the win command) for generating a win command (details will be described later). ”) Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether the“ special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition ”is satisfied (step S316). The “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed (the prefetch prohibition data (EVENT) is processed by the process of step S315). : “FFH”) designates the pre-reading prohibition), whereby the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (see the processing route of step S316: YES). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited when the game state is accompanied by the “electric support state”, that is, when the internal game state is in the probabilistic state. Thus, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side in the gaming state with the electric support state is as follows.

  The first reason is that when the player is placed under a “power support state” such as “probability change state (during ST in the present embodiment)”, the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 is higher than the normal game state. The “high base gaming state (operating rate improvement state of the movable wing piece 47: for example, the winning probability per assist is 255/256, and the opening extension function is activated)”. When the launch position is aimed so as to win the normal symbol start opening 37 (when the aim is set so that the game ball passes through the right flow down path 3c), the number of operation reserved balls related to the special symbol 2 (hereinafter, “ It is estimated that the “special figure 2 operation holding ball” is frequently generated. On the other hand, when placed in a state without electric support, the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is low “low base gaming state (the winning probability per assist is 1/256, and the open extension function is not activated. In this embodiment, the game ball is hardly guided or guided to the upper start opening 34 side due to a falling direction changing member such as a game nail. When aiming at the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side, the game is such that it is particularly disadvantageous. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not set the launch position so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b side during the electric support state, and the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball This is because if the pre-reading determination is performed one by one for the special FIG. 1 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate, there is a problem that the control burden increases.

  The second reason is a problem of technical intervention. For example, when only a pre-reading notice effect (particularly, a pre-reading notice effect having a high winning expectation degree) is generated for the special figure 1 operation holding ball at present, if the player recognizes this, the special figure 2 action is activated. The special symbol variation display game 2 which is the priority variation side is continuously executed so that the holding ball is not interrupted, so that the special symbol 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side) can receive the maximum benefit of the big win lottery. However, the game can be progressed. In this embodiment, “10R probability variation big hit” and “15R probability variation big hit”, which have higher profits, are won with higher probability than those who have received the special symbol 2 side symbol lottery than the special symbol 1 side symbol lottery. (Details will be described later). For this reason, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the big win lottery on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 2 side) than to receive the big hit lottery on the special symbol 1 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 1 side). It is said to be expanded. Using this, when it was found that the expectation of winning a big hit in the special figure 1 holding ball was high, we received the maximum benefit from the big win lottery on the special symbol 2 side until the electric support was completed Later, a technical intervening problem arises, such as the ability to digest the special figure 1 operation holding ball related to the winning and gain a jackpot, which causes inequalities among players.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in view of the above-described problems, the section (prefetch prohibition state) in which the prefetch determination on the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side is prohibited can be switched according to the gaming state. Yes. Specifically, the main control unit 20 prohibits the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination means (for example, prefetch determination processing on the side of FIG. 1; corresponding to S317 to S323 in FIG. “First prefetch prohibition state (for example, gaming state with electric support state”) that permits prefetching judgment by judgment means (for example, prefetching judgment processing on the special figure 2 side: corresponding to S337 to S343 in FIG. 11 described later) In the case of a game state with a second prefetch prohibition state (for example, a state with no electric support), which prohibits the prefetch determination by the second prefetch determination means and permits the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination means. ”)” Is provided with a functional unit as a “prefetch prohibition state control means” that performs switching control based on a predetermined condition (for example, whether there is a current internal game state or a power support state).

  Further, the prefetching prohibition state control means switches to a third prefetching prohibition state in which prefetching judgment by the first prefetching judgment means and the second prefetching judgment means is completely prohibited based on a predetermined condition. "Pre-reading full prohibition means" can be provided. The above-mentioned “predetermined condition” includes, for example, a case where a big hit game is being played. This is because, in the case of a big hit game, since there is no change display operation of special symbols even if an operation holding ball occurs, it is not necessary to perform a pre-reading notice effect for a new operation holding ball It is.

  Also, the jackpot lottery probability may vary before and after the jackpot game. Then, during the big hit game of the present embodiment, it is once shifted to a low probability state (see S475 in FIG. 20A described later), and an operation holding ball is generated during the big hit game, and this is targeted. When prefetch determination is performed, there is a possibility that a winning lottery will occur in a low probability state at the time of prefetch determination, and a winning lottery will be performed in a high probability state at the start of fluctuation, which may lead to inconsistencies in the prefetch determination results. . However, depending on the type of jackpot that was won this time, it can be judged whether the lottery probability state after the jackpot game is high probability or low probability. In addition, the pre-reading determination may be performed on the operation holding ball generated during the big hit game. As in this embodiment, if a big win is won, a gaming machine that always shifts to a high-probability state after the big-hit game ends will perform a win determination assuming a high-probability state in the pre-reading determination, It may be configured to be able to execute the pre-reading determination for the operation holding ball generated inside, and to be able to execute the pre-reading notice effect during the big hit game.

  Returning to the description of step S316 again, if the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the process (steps S317 to S319) relating to the prefetch determination is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S320A. .

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), the process proceeds to step S317, and random number determination processing is performed (step S317). This random number determination processing is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' processing. Here, the operation holding ball of this time (here, the special symbol variation display game 1 (special figure 1) side 'Pre-fetch determination (pre-read winning determination)' is performed in advance for determining “winning lottery”.

  Specifically, the big hit determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired, and then the hit random number determination table is acquired. Then, based on the acquired jackpot determination random number value and the winning random number determination table, the winning lottery (another determination of jackpot and lose) for the current operation holding ball, that is, the current operation holding ball is changed to display the fluctuation The lottery result (the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation) of “special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process (see S409 in FIG. 12 to be described later)” executed when it is provided is prefetched and the result is acquired. To do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the state of the big hit determination flag (5AH or 00H) acquired in the random number determination processing in step S317 is taken into a general-purpose register (for example, A register) built in the CPU. Then, with the jackpot determination flag held in the register, the process exits the random number determination process and proceeds to the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318. That is, the CPU 201 does not store the winning lottery result fetched in the register in the RAM 203, but leaves this random number determination process while holding it.

  In the present embodiment, the determination result obtained in this random number determination process, that is, the data of the winning lottery result in the prefetch determination is immediately used in the subsequent “special stop symbol data creation process”, and then this data is required. There is nothing to do. Therefore, there is no problem even if the determination result is left in the register without being stored in the RAM 203 and the random number determination process is exited. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the random number determination process (the determination result of the winning determination process in the winning process (winning result related to the pre-reading determination)), and is dedicated for storing the determination result. Since it is not necessary to provide a separate storage area, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity of the ROM and RAM and reduce the control burden.

(R-1 per random number determination table)
The hit random number determination table includes a “random figure determination table for special figure 1 (not shown)” related to the special symbol fluctuation display game 1 and a “random figure determination table for special figure 2” related to the special symbol fluctuation display game 2. (Not shown) ”, during the special figure 1 start opening check process of FIG. 10“ random number determination table for special figure 1 ”, during the special figure 2 start opening check process of FIG. Reference is made to the “per random number determination table for FIG. 2”.

  In these winning random number determination tables, the winning type (whether big hit, small hit or lost) is determined for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability) and low probability state (low probability)). Are determined in association with a jackpot determination random number value (the size of the jackpot determination random number: 65536). Specifically, the jackpot determination random number value is any of the determination values. Either a big hit or a loss is determined depending on whether it belongs to or not. Therefore, even when the acquired jackpot determination random number values belong to the same determination value (the same value for the jackpot determination random number value), the current jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state. Depending on the situation, the winning type may be different, such as “big hit” on the one hand and “lost” on the other. The jackpot winning probability of this embodiment is about 1/397 in the low probability state, and about 1 / 39.7, which is about 10 times higher in the high probability state, wins the jackpot. In the case of the present embodiment, the determination area for the big win is the same for the random number determination table for special figure 1 and the random number determination table for special figure 2 (the winning probability for the big hit is the same).

  When the random number determination process in step S317 is completed, a special stop symbol data creation process is then performed (step S318). This special stop symbol data creation processing is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' processing, and here, 'prefetch determination (prefetch symbol determination: pre-determining "symbol lottery" related to the current operation holding ball. (Pre-judgment of winning (winning) type)) '. The random number determination process (step S317) to the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318) is a process related to the "pre-reading determination" in which the big hit lottery result is pre-readed.

  In the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318, first, a winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317 is acquired, and a symbol table (a big hit symbol to be described later) corresponding to the winning lottery result (a big hit or a miss) is obtained. Select a table or lose symbol table (not shown). Then, the random number value for special symbol determination acquired in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination, the symbol lottery for the current action holding ball, that is, the current action hold The lottery result (the symbol lottery result at the start of variation) of “special stop symbol creation processing (see S410 of FIG. 12 described later)” executed when the ball is subjected to the variable display operation is pre-readed.

(T-2. Symbol table)
In the symbol table, a “special symbol determination random value (the size of the special symbol determination random value: 200)” and a determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type are defined in association with each other. More specifically, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are determined depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random number value belongs to.

  The above-mentioned “special symbol determination data” is data for identifying a winning type (winning type), and specifically, any of 4R-probable big hit, 10R-probable big hit, 15R-probable big hit, and loses A to C are won. It is data for identifying whether or not. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S411 in FIG. 12 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412 and a process related to execution control of jackpot game) This is data used in the special electric accessory management process (step S060 in FIG. 6).

  The “special stop symbol number” is data for designating a special stop symbol form to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side. The In the present embodiment, for example, even in the case of the same 15R probability variation jackpot, depending on the judgment value, the display mode of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (in this embodiment, display of “7 segment”) Aspect) may be different. In this way, even if the winning type is the same, even if the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display device is determined by defining a plurality of types of special stop symbol numbers according to the special symbol determination random number value, It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish what kind of jackpot or loser the player has won.

(T-2-1. Jackpot symbol table)
The jackpot symbol table of the present embodiment includes a “big hit symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a “big hit symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2 related to the special symbol variation display game 2. 10 is referred to during the special figure 1 starting opening check process of FIG. 10, and “big hit symbol table 2” is referred to during the special figure 2 starting opening check process of FIG.

  In these jackpot symbol tables, a special symbol judgment random number value and a judgment value for determining the jackpot type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol judgment random number value is set to any judgment value. Depending on whether or not it belongs, any one of a plurality of types of jackpots is determined.

  In the jackpot symbol table 1, for example, when the special symbol determination random number value falls within the range of the determination values 0 to 139, the “4R probability variation big hit” wins (symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability): 140/200), If it falls within the range of judgment values 140 to 189, it will win the “10R probability variation big hit” (symbol selection rate: 50/200). Rate: 10/200), the jackpot type is determined by a predetermined symbol selection rate, and special symbol determination data and special stop symbol number corresponding to this are determined.

  The jackpot symbol table 2 has the same basic configuration as the above jackpot symbol table 1, but differs from the jackpot symbol table 1 in the following points. The jackpot symbol table 2 is different from the jackpot symbol table 1 in a specific jackpot symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability). Specifically, when the special symbol determination random number value falls within the range of determination values 0 to 39, the “4R probability variation big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 40/200), and belongs to the range of determination values 40 to 99. In this case, “10R probability variation big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 60/200), and in the range of the judgment value 100 to 199, “15R probability variation big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 100/200). Yes. That is, the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 2 is more likely to be selected than the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 1, which is a symbol lottery advantageous to the player. As a result, the game development is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1. In particular, in the state with the electric support, the winning probability on the lower start opening 35 side is dramatically improved and the execution chance of the special symbol variation display game 2 is increased, so that the state with the electric support is a high base game state. In addition to the symbol lottery, the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

(T-2-2. Lost design table)
In the lost symbol table of the present embodiment, the “lost symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 relating to the special symbol variation display game 1 and the “lost symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2 relating to the special symbol variation display game 2 are included. And are included.

  The lost symbol tables 1 and 2 are similar to the above jackpot symbol table configuration, depending on whether or not the special symbol determination random number value belongs to any determination area (determination value). Any one of A to C) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number corresponding thereto are determined. The lost symbol table 1 and the lost symbol table 2 have different determination values related to the winning of the loses A to C. Therefore, even if the random numbers for the special symbol determination are the same value, the lost symbol table 1 is referred to. The case where the winning symbol table 2 is referred may be different from the case where the winning symbol table 2 is referred to.

  In this embodiment, at least the winning probability of Loss B or Loss C is determined to be lower than the winning probability of Loss A, and specifically, the relationship of “Lossing A <Lossing B <Lossing C” is satisfied. The winning probability is determined. By using such a relationship, when the loss B or the loss C is won than when the loss A is won, the reach variation pattern selection rate is increased, so that the reach effect appears at an appropriate frequency. Be able to.

  This will be described representatively during the “normal” period in which the stay period is relatively long as the game progresses. In the normal state, since there is no electric support, there is almost no winning at the lower start opening 35 and frequent winning at the upper starting opening 34 occurs frequently. Description will be made by paying attention to the operation holding ball according to the symbol variation display game 1. Referring to the “Lose A, B, C in Special Figure 1” column of FIG. 33 and FIG. 35, when the operation holding ball related to the current special symbol variation display game 1 is won by “Lose A”, Only the 'normal variation pattern' type is selected. In addition, when “losing B” is won, the “N reach” type or the “SP reach A” type having a relatively high expectation degree of winning can be selected. In addition, when “losing C (winning with the lowest probability among winning types)” is won, the “SP reach B” type or “SP reach C”, which has a higher expectation than the “SP reach A” type. 'Type can be selected. As a result, in many cases of loss, an effect related to normal fluctuation appears, and a reach effect can be made appear at an appropriate frequency. In particular, in the event of a loss, the selection rate of the SP reach type with a relatively high level of winning expectation is set to a low probability, thereby preventing the player from excessively hitting the winning expectation for the big hit. Yes. In the present embodiment, it has been described that only the “normal variation pattern” type is selected when the operation holding ball related to the special symbol variation display game 1 of this time is won by “losing A” during normal times. It is not limited to this. For example, the reach variation pattern may be selectable. However, “Lose A” can be won with the highest probability among the types of loses, so it is selected when Lose A is won in order to prevent the player from being overwhelmed with the expectation of winning the jackpot. As for the reach type, it is preferable to select an N reach type with a relatively low winning expectation.

  In the process of step S318, various data obtained from the above-described symbol table (the symbol lottery result in the pre-reading determination: special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) is taken into a register included in the CPU 201 (for example, special symbol determination). The data is in the A register and the special stop symbol number is the B register.) In this state, the special stop symbol data creation process is exited, and the process proceeds to the starting port winning random number determination process in step S319. That is, the CPU 201 exits the special stop symbol data creation process while retaining the data fetched in the register provided therein, without storing the data in the RAM 203.

  In this embodiment, various data of the determination result (the symbol lottery result in the pre-reading determination) obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process this time is immediately used in the subsequent “start opening winning random number determination process”, and this No data is needed. Therefore, there is no particular problem even if the special stop symbol data creation process is exited while the determination result is stored in the register without being stored in the RAM 203. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the special stop symbol data creation process in the RAM, and does not require a dedicated storage area for storing the determination result. As a result, the memory capacity can be reduced and the control burden can be reduced.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 described above is completed, a starting port winning random number determination process in step S319 is then performed. This start opening winning random number determination process is also performed as part of the 'look-ahead determination' process, similar to the random number determination process (step S317) and the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318). 'Prefetching determination (prefetching variation pattern determination)' is performed in advance to determine the “variation pattern at the start of variation” relating to the operation hold ball.

  In the start opening winning random number determination process, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317, the “symbol lottery” result obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318, and the process in step S314. Using the obtained 'random number for variation pattern', the variation pattern at the start of variation related to the current suspended ball, that is, the "special symbol" that is executed when the current suspended ball is subjected to the variation display operation The result (variation pattern content at the start of variation) of the variation pattern creation process (see S412 in FIG. 12 to be described later) is determined in advance. Then, based on the prefetch determination result, a process for creating winning command data used for creating a “winning command” described later is performed. Here, as the winning command data, “MODE_1 (first byte (upper byte))” side command data that can specify whether the winning / losing is specified, and “EVENT (2 bytes) that can specify the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern” can be specified. The command data on the eye (lower byte) side is acquired, and the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern (excluding reserved ball number information) are specified by the winning command data determined in the starting port winning random number determination process.

  In detail, the starting opening winning random number determination process includes the following processes (a) and (b) as processes for determining the above “winning command data” for designating the pre-reading fluctuation pattern. Has been.

(A) Referring to the “variation pattern distribution table selection table” shown in FIG. 33, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317 and the “symbol obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318” Based on the “lottery” result and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), the “variation pattern allocation table (FIGS. 34 to 37)” is determined, and the “variation pattern allocation table determination process upon winning”;
(B) Referring to the “variation pattern distribution table” determined in (a) above, based on the “random number value for variation pattern” acquired in the process of step S314, the winning command data corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern is obtained. And “winning command data determination processing” to be determined.

  Here, the “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” functions as a “variation pattern selection mode” and is data for identifying the current gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 27, when the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is “00H”, it indicates “normal”, and when it is “01H”, “first half of ST”. “02H” indicates “second half of ST”. This variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is changed when there is a change in the gaming state. Therefore, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is different from data identifying the internal gaming state itself, such as a gaming state determination number (YJ) described later, in that it identifies the gaming state as described above.

(T-3. Fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table (when winning): FIG. 33)
FIG. 33 shows a variation pattern distribution table selection table. The variation pattern distribution table selection table of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of “variation pattern distribution” associated with the special symbol type, the winning type, and the number of active suspended balls, and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode). A table is defined. Specifically, based on the special symbol type, the winning type, the number of suspended balls and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), from among a plurality of types of variation pattern allocation tables (FH1-11, FB1-6). Any one “variation pattern distribution table” is determined. This variation pattern distribution table selection table is used not only when determining “winning command data” at the time of prefetch determination, but also when processing related to determination of “variation pattern designation command” at the start of variation. (See FIG. 14 showing the details of the special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412 of FIG. 12 described later), and this is a combined (common) variation pattern distribution table selection table at the time of winning and at the start of variation.

  The “variation pattern distribution table selection table” of the present embodiment is provided as a table for both prefetch determination and start of variation. Since they do not always match, it is impossible to pre-read the contents of the variation pattern at the start of the exact variation. Therefore, in the winning variation pattern distribution table determination process, the operation reservation ball is ignored (the operation reservation ball is set to zero), and the target variation pattern distribution table is selected from the variation pattern distribution table selection table. It is like that.

  For example, during normal operation, when the operation holding ball to be pre-read this time is on the special figure 1 side and is a loss A, the variation pattern distribution table “FH1” is selected regardless of the number of operation holding balls at the time of winning. Is done. However, since the number of suspended balls is taken into consideration at the start of fluctuation, one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables “FH1 to FH4” is selected (see the special figure 1 in FIG. 35, the “Lack A” column). Since all the distribution tables “FH1 to FH4” are configured to select the normal variation pattern type (see FIG. 35), the variation pattern at the start of variation is the normal variation pattern type at the time of the prefetch determination. And pre-reading determination. Therefore, there is no contradiction in the prefetch determination itself of the variation pattern type, and no particular problem occurs. In the case of the present embodiment, basically, at the time of prefetching determination, the “basic pattern” that is the gist (base) of the variation pattern of the special symbol (the variation pattern at the start of variation) is determined.

  However, depending on the selection conditions, the change pattern itself at the start of change can be determined in the prefetch determination. For example, during normal operation, the operation holding ball to be pre-read this time is on the special figure 1 side, and in the case of loss B or loss C, “FH5” or “FH6” is selected regardless of the number of operation holding balls Therefore, at the time of prefetch determination, the variation pattern itself at the start of variation can be determined ("Special Figure 1, Loss B", "Special Figure 1, Loss C" in the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 33). ", See" Lose B "and" Lose C "in FIG. 35). Thus, the configuration of the variation pattern distribution table selection table can be configured to determine the variation pattern itself at the start of variation at the time of prefetch determination. In this case, the pre-reading variation pattern designated by the winning command and the variation pattern at the start of variation designated by the variation pattern designation command can be matched. In this way, as a pre-reading variation pattern, it is possible to transmit a winning command specifying the variation pattern itself at the start of variation, rather than the basic pattern of the variation pattern at the beginning of variation, to the effect control unit 24 side. When the prefetch notice effect is displayed, a more accurate prefetch notice effect can be displayed. In addition, the degree of freedom of the prefetching notice effect is increased, and variations of the prefetching notice effect can be made rich.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted to avoid duplication, in the case of other selection conditions (for example, in the first half of ST, the operation holding ball to be pre-read this time is on the special figure 2 side, Similarly, in some cases, the content of the variation pattern at the time of the prefetch determination and the content of the variation pattern at the start of variation do not conflict (see FIGS. 33 and 34 to 37).

(T-4. Fluctuation pattern distribution table (at the time of winning): FIGS. 34 to 37)
Next, the variation pattern distribution table will be described. 34 and 36 show the variation pattern distribution table selected at the time of hitting, and FIGS. 35 and 37 show the variation pattern distribution table selected at the time of loss.

  Referring to FIGS. 34 to 37, the “variation pattern distribution table” includes a plurality of types of variation pattern allocation tables for hits “FB1 to 6” that can be selected at the time of hitting, and a plurality of types that can be selected at the time of loss. The variation pattern distribution table “FH1 to H11” is included. These variation pattern distribution tables are provided as tables for both prefetch determination and variation start. Therefore, the following data group is defined in the variation pattern distribution table.

  (A) As shown in FIGS. 34 to 37, the variation pattern distribution table includes a random number for variation pattern (magnitude of random number for variation pattern: 10000) and a winning corresponding to the contents of the prefetch variation pattern. Command data ("MODE_1" in the figure) on the upper byte (first byte) side and command data in the command data ("EVENT" in the figure) on the lower byte (second byte) for composing the command data are It is established in association. Specifically, at the time of the prefetch determination, the winning command is determined depending on which determination value (the distribution value shown in the drawing) the variation pattern random value belongs to (by lottery using the variation pattern random value). Command data for configuration is determined. Thereby, the content of the prefetch variation pattern is designated.

  (B) The variation pattern distribution table also defines data used in processing related to the determination of the “variation pattern designation command” related to the variation start processing (for details of this processing, see FIG. 14 will be described later in the special symbol variation pattern creation process). Specifically, the variation pattern distribution table includes a random number value for variation pattern, command data (“MODE — 2” in the figure) on the upper byte (first byte) side for configuring a variation pattern designation command, Command data (“EVENT” in the figure) on the byte (second byte) side is defined in association with it. Specifically, at the start of variation, a command for configuring the variation pattern designation command according to which determination value the variation pattern random value belongs to (by lottery using the variation pattern random value) Data is to be determined. As a result, the contents of the variation pattern at the start of variation are designated.

  Here, the command data on the “MODE_2 (first byte (upper byte))” side at the start of fluctuation is data that can identify the hit / miss, and “EVENT (second byte (lower byte)”. The command data of the above is data that can specify the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation, so the “variation pattern designation command” for designating the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is similar to the command at the time of winning, When the change pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 side changes the change pattern at the start of the change (special symbol) from the control data of 2 bytes including "MODE_2" and "EVENT". The fluctuation pattern).

  Here, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is shown in the figure, but actually, a determination area (in order to determine winning command data or a variation pattern designation command according to the variation pattern random value) ( (Determination value) is determined, and the command data is determined depending on to which determination value the random value for variation pattern belongs. The relationship between the distribution value and the determination value shown in the figure is as follows. For example, referring to the normal losing variation pattern distribution table “FH4” of FIG. 35 as a representative example, when referring to the distribution value from the top in the row direction from the top to the bottom of the drawing, The distribution values are described in the order of “8500”, “1000”, and “500”. The content of this is that the random number value for the variation pattern is in the range of determination values 0 to 8499 (the above distribution value “8500” Command data (MODE_1 “B0H”, MODE_2 “A0H”, EVENT “01H”) for designating “normal fluctuation 5s ('s” is an abbreviation of second (second)) ”is selected. , If belonging to the range of determination values 8500-9499 (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “1000”), command data (MODE — 1 “B0H”, MO If E_2 “A0H”, EVENT “02H”) is selected and belongs to the range of determination values 9500 to 9999 (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “500” above), command data specifying “normal fluctuation 12 s” ( MODE_1 “B0H”, MODE_2 “A0H”, and EVENT “03H”) are selected. 34 and FIGS. 36 to 37 have the same “selection rate”.

  However, as described above, for example, when the operation reservation ball to be prefetched this time is on the special figure 1 side and is a loss A, during normal operation, the variation pattern is independent of the number of operation reservation balls at the time of winning. The distribution table “FH1” is selected, and the variation pattern distribution table “FH4” is not selected at the time of prefetch determination (the “special figure 1, loss A” of the variation pattern distribution table selection table in FIG. 33). Column, see “Lose A” column in FIG. 35). Therefore, in practice, the above-described variation pattern distribution table “FH4” is a table used when determining a variation pattern designation command (for example, variation pattern distribution table “FH2” or “FH3”). The same).

  As described above, in the variation pattern distribution table, the command data constituting the command at the time of winning changes in the processing at the start of variation depending on which judgment value the variation pattern random value belongs to. Command data constituting the pattern designation command is determined.

(C-1. List of commands at the time of winning: FIG. 30, FIG. 31)
30 to 31 show a list of the winning commands. FIG. 30 shows a winning command when winning, and FIG. 31 shows a winning command when lost.

  The command at the time of winning includes prefetch determination result information obtained in a series of processing (steps S317 to S318) regarding prefetch determination, specifically, at least winning lottery result information and prefetch variation pattern information. In this embodiment, the winning command includes winning information, prefetch variation pattern contents (corresponding to the illustrated variation pattern designation content column), game state information, and the like. In the figure, for convenience of explanation, the command at the time of winning is shown as if it corresponds to all of the fluctuation patterns at the start of fluctuation, but in actuality, a part of the command at the time of winning is created. (See FIGS. 33 and 34 to 37). As already explained, when determining the winning command data, the number of balls with pending action at the time of pre-reading judgment and the number of pending actions at the start of fluctuation do not necessarily match, so refer to the variation pattern distribution table selection table at the time of winning. When selecting the target variation pattern distribution table without considering the number of active retention balls (with the operation retention ball set to zero), and when referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table at the start of variation, This is because the target variation pattern distribution table is selected in consideration of the number of balls held.

  It should be noted that as a command at the time of winning a prize, the “symbol lottery” result (prefetched symbol determination result) information (winning type information (special stop symbol number or special symbol determination data) obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 may be used. ) And pre-reading variation pattern information may be generated and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

  When the start opening winning random number determination process in step S319 is completed, a “winning command” is created based on the command data determined in the starting opening winning random number determination process (step S320A), and then the operation at the time of prefetch determination is performed. A “hold addition command” for designating the number of balls to be held is created (step S320). This “hold addition command” is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte (MODE) side for designating whether the operation holding ball to be prefetched this time is the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side, and at the time of winning a prize And the lower byte (EVENT) side for designating the number of active balls to be held. The hold addition command is used when the production control unit 24 side informs the hold display areas 76 and 77 of information relating to the current number of active hold balls or when a pre-reading notice effect is executed when an active hold ball is generated. Is used when a pre-reading notice effect (holding display change type pre-reading notice effect) for the notice target hold is displayed.

  Next, the created winning command and the pending addition command are transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S321).

  When the winning command and the hold addition command are transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives them receives a lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) regarding whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice effect based on information included in these commands. ), And if it is determined that the result is determined to be feasible (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the pre-reading notice effect for the current operation holding ball is displayed. In addition, when receiving the winning command and / or the hold addition command, the production control unit 24 notifies the start opening of the winning prize regardless of whether or not the pre-reading notice production is displayed. Can appear.

  In addition, even when there is a new winning when the number of active balls is 4 or more, a winning command for designating an overflow and a pending addition command (hereinafter referred to as “OF command”) are created. Then, it is transmitted to the production control unit 24 (step S312: YES → step S320A).

  The “OF command” is used not only for the pre-reading notice effect, but exclusively for the above “winning effect” in order to specify that it is overflow. Can be configured.

  For example, when the effect control unit 24 receives the OF command, and there is a “big hit” among the currently activated balls, a notice effect that informs that effect (within the OF winning reservation) (Notification effect) may be configured to appear (it may be determined whether or not to notify by a predetermined notification lottery). In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is a “hit”, a notice effect (notice effect during fluctuating when winning an OF) may be displayed.

  The notice effect by such an OF command is similar to the prize effect that appears when the overflow prize is generated, but the result of the symbol variation display game for which the final result has not yet been derived has been prefetched. In that respect, it plays the same role as the pre-reading notice.

  As a result, the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start opening check process in step S302 of FIG. 11 is performed.

(10-2. Special Figure 2 Starting Port Check Process: FIG. 11)
Next, the special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 starting port check process.

  The special figure 2 starting port check process, like the special figure 1 starting port check process, serves as a winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition. Here, the special symbol variation display game 2 As the pre-start process for executing the same as the flow of the special figure 1 start port check process described above, the addition process of the number of suspended balls, the storage of various random numbers, the winning command, the pending addition command Creation / transmission processing is performed. Hereinafter, the same processing contents as those in the special figure 1 start-up port check process (step S301, FIG. 10) will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331).

  If no winning detection is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331: NO), the special figure 2 start opening check process is exited without doing anything. However, when the winning of the lower start opening 35 is detected (step S331: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is 4 or more (step S332).

  When the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S332: YES), the process proceeds to step S345. On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not 4 or more, that is, when it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), the special figure 2 operation reservation balls number is incremented by 1 (+1) (step S333). Proceed to processing.

  When the processing proceeds to step S334, various random numbers (random hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and variation pattern random number) used in the special symbol variation display game 2 related to the special symbol 2 operation holding ball generated this time. The current value of the random number counter is acquired and stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (step S334). This process is the same as the process in step S314 of FIG. The special figure 2 operation hold ball is stored in the order in which the start conditions are satisfied, with the maximum hold storage number as a predetermined upper limit value, until it is used for the variable display operation of the special symbol 2.

  Next, prefetch prohibition data (lower byte “FFH”) prohibiting prefetch determination is acquired as winning command data (step S335), and it is determined whether or not the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied (step S335). S336). The “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 2 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 2 operation holding ball is not executed, and thereby the prefetch notice effect is not executed. (Step S336: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, when the game state is accompanied by a 'no power support state', that is, the internal game state is in a normal game state (including a “latent probability” when configured to generate a latent probability state) If it is, prefetch determination on the special symbol 2 side is prohibited. Thus, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 2 side when the game state is accompanied by the state without the electric support is as follows.

  If it is the “normal game state”, it is placed under the “no power support state”, and the winning rate of the lower start opening 35 is remarkably lowered. Further, as already described, in the present embodiment, when the player targets the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side in the state without the electric support, the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the left flow path 3b. This is a gameability that is disadvantageous for the player, such that the winning rate of the upper start opening 34 is significantly lower than the case where the above is determined. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not aim the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side during the state without the electric support. Therefore, in the absence of the electric support, it is not necessary to generate the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, and the prefetch determination is performed one by one for the special figure 2 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate. This is because there arises a problem that the control burden increases.

  Returning to the description of step S336 again, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the process proceeds to step S340. However, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S336: NO), the process proceeds to step S337, and random number determination processing is performed (step S337). In this random number determination process, “prefetching winning determination” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the processing method is substantially the same as the random number determination processing in step S317 during the special figure 1 starting port check processing of FIG.

  When the random number determination processing in step S337 is completed, special stop symbol data creation processing is then performed (step S338). In this special stop symbol data creation process, “prefetch symbol determination” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. The processing method is substantially the same as the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 during the special chart 1 start port check process of FIG.

  Next, a starting port winning random number determination process similar to that in the special figure 1 starting port check process is performed (step S339), a winning command and a pending addition command are created (steps S340A and S340), and these commands are effect controlled. Is transmitted to the unit 24 (step S341), and the special figure 2 starting port check process is exited.

(10-3. Special symbol variation start processing: FIG. 12)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process of FIG.

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401). If the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), Proceeding to the process of S403, the process (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the change for the operation holding ball to be used for the current change display is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S402). If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process proceeds to step S403, and the process (steps S403 to S416) related to the start of the variation of the special symbol for the suspended action ball used for the present variation display is performed. Do. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, “priority” indicating which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is to be preferentially used for the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Change order" is determined. The processing in steps S401 and S402 is performed as “priority change means” for preferentially digesting the special figure 2 operation holding ball when both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball exist. Function.

  In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball exists in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball by the priority changing means, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested, that is, The special symbol variation display game 2 is executed more preferentially than the special symbol variation display game 1. More specifically, on the condition that the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed, the first reserved storage area (first reserved storage means (the reserved storage area related to the operation reserved ball on the special symbol 1 side)). ) Is stored with the hold data relating to the special symbol 1 (first hold memory: special figure 1 operation hold ball), the second hold storage area (second hold storage means (the operation hold ball on the special symbol 2 side) If the second reserved data relating to the special symbol 2 (second reserved memory: special figure 2 operation holding ball) is not stored in the reserved memory area))), the second of the first reserved data When the second special hold data is stored in the second reserved storage area while the variable display of the first special symbol based on the previously stored reserved data is started, the first reserved The first hold data is stored in the storage area. Regardless of whether or not they are 憶, so as to start earliest variable display of the second special symbol based on the stored pending data out of the second pending data.

  In addition, when the number of operation hold balls of both the special figure 2 operation hold ball number and the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of “no operation hold ball” It becomes. This “no operation hold ball” state is when the special symbol is on standby and there is no hold memory, and the effect control unit 24 side is informed that it has entered this state, and the liquid crystal display The device 36 is controlled to switch to a demonstration screen display for waiting for customers. Therefore, when “no operation hold ball” is reached, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H)” indicating the state of “no operation hold ball”. (Step S417).

  When the determination process of step S417 is passed, that is, when the state of “no operation hold ball” is entered, and the special symbol operation status at this time is “standby (01H)” (step S417: NO: Refer to step S472 in the special symbol confirmation time process of FIG. 21A described later), and the special symbol operation status is switched to “standby (00H)” (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status: step S418). Then, a “demonstration display command” for displaying a demonstration screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. Thus, the reason for switching the special symbol operation status to “waiting (00H)”, transmitting the effect control command, and exiting the special symbol variation start process is as follows.

  If the demonstration display command is sent without condition when the number of active balls is zero, the demonstration display command is repeatedly transmitted at a period of 4 ms while the number of special figure active balls is zero. Will occur. Therefore, when the “no operation hold ball” state is reached, a demonstration display command is transmitted once, and if the demonstration display command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display command is sent to the effect control unit 24. This special symbol management process can be skipped without sending to the user.

  If the presentation control unit 24 does not receive any presentation control command (for example, a winning command or a pending addition command) related to the symbol variation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed since receiving the demonstration display command, the variation display operation is performed. Assuming that a state where the game is not performed for a certain period of time (a waiting state for waiting for customers) has occurred, the liquid crystal display device 36 performs “demo screen display” for notifying that the game is waiting.

  When the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), or when the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero but the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: YES → step) S402: NO), the process (steps S403 to S417) related to the start of the variation of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display is performed. In addition, about the process of step S403-S417 demonstrated below, when it is "NO" by determination of said step S401, it is the process for the special figure 2 action holding ball, and by determination of said step S402. If it is NO ', it will be the processing for the special figure 1 action holding ball, but the way of processing is the same, so unless there is a special need to avoid duplicate description, the action holding on the special symbol 1 side The description will be made without distinguishing whether the process is a process for a sphere or a process for an operation holding ball on the special symbol 2 side.

  When the processing proceeds to step S403, 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved balls for operation (the number of reserved balls for operation on the special symbol side used for the current variation display operation-1: step S403), and the number of reserved balls for operation after subtraction is included. A “hold subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404). With this hold subtraction command, the production control unit 24 side grasps the number of remaining operation hold balls after the current operation hold ball number digestion.

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the current variation start side. For example, if special symbol 1 is the variation start side, “00H” is indicated, and special symbol 2 is the variation start side. If there is, “01H” is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

  Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of Steps S406 to S407, the hold data (the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern use) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1. The random number is read and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage area (the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, the reserved 4 memory) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4). The hold data stored in (area) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared (step S407). That is, the hold data in the hold 1 storage area is shifted to the random number storage area for determination, and the hold data after the hold 2 storage area is numbered one by one (hold 2 storage area → hold 1 storage area, hold 3 storage). Area → holding 2 storage area, holding 4 storage area → holding 3 storage area) and overwriting, and providing an empty area in the holding 4 storage area (if no new active holding ball is generated, processing in step S407) Since the vacant area is sequentially shifted each time the operation is performed, the entire reserved storage area becomes an empty area when all the operating spheres are used. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number n of the operation reservation balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and any of the operation reservation balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is stored. Whether the area corresponds to the area is specified, and the storage of a new operation holding ball becomes possible.

  Next, remaining short time command transmission processing is performed (step S408). Here, it is determined whether or not a special symbol short-time counter (counter for counting the remaining number of times until the special symbol short-time state is terminated) described later is zero. The “remaining short time command” including the remaining short time information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. By this “remaining short time number command”, the production control unit 24 side can grasp the remaining short time number, for example, using the effect means and can notify the remaining short time number information.

  Next, a random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is performed (step S409). In this special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed using the jackpot determination random number value. The random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is “random determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “winning lottery” is performed. In this example, the “winning lottery” in “determination at the start of change” is performed for the operation holding ball used for the current change display operation. Since the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is substantially the same as the random number determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10 and step S339 in FIG. 11), it is omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication. To explain.

  Here, first, a hit random number determination table corresponding to the current variation display side is acquired based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. This winning random number determination table is the same as the winning random number determination table used in the random number determination process (step S317 in FIG. 10 and step S337 in FIG. 11). Next, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, a winning lottery based on the jackpot determination random value and the hit random number determination table is performed, and the result is stored in the hit determination flag area of the RAM 203. . Specifically, if the winning lottery results in a “big hit” win, “5 AH” is set in the big hit determination flag, and if it belongs to any other determination value, “big hit not won”, that is, “lost” As a result, “00H” is set in the big hit determination flag.

  When the random determination process for determining the special electronic component operation in step S409 is completed, a special stop symbol creating process is then performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, the “symbol lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed by using the winning lottery result and the special symbol determination random number value of the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is the same as the “special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “symbol lottery” is performed. Here, “symbol drawing” in “determination at the start of variation” is performed for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation. Since the basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation process is the same as the special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10 and step S338 in FIG. 11), the description will be made while omitting appropriately to avoid duplication. To do.

  Here, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery result (the above jackpot determination flag) obtained in the random determination processing for determining the special electronic component operation in step S409 are acquired, and based on these, the present fluctuation display side is obtained. As the symbol table corresponding to, one of the jackpot symbol tables 1-2 and the lost symbol tables 1-2 is selected. This symbol table is the same as the symbol table used in the special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11). Next, a special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random value, the “symbol selection lottery” related to the current special symbol variation display game is performed. The symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) is stored in a predetermined region (special symbol determination data storage region, special symbol stop symbol number storage region) of the RAM 203. Thereby, the winning type (winning type) related to the current special symbol variation display game is determined.

  Here, the reason why the data obtained by the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data obtained in the special stop symbol creation process (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) is obtained by the “special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11)” at the time of prefetch determination. It is not data that is immediately used in the subsequent processing and is unnecessary after that, as in the case of the data, but is necessary in the special symbol variation pattern creation processing (step S412) or the special electric accessory processing (step S60). Because it is data.

  When the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is then performed (step S411). In the game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating a game state after a winning game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Details of the game state transition preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game state transition preparation process in step S411 is completed, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then performed (step S412). This special symbol variation pattern creation process uses the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation processing, the random number for variation pattern, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) (current game state), and the number of suspended balls this time. The variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the variation display operation is determined. Then, in order to inform the effect control unit 24 of the contents of the variation pattern, a “variation pattern designation command” including variation pattern information that can specify the variation pattern content is created as an effect control command, and this is designated as the effect control unit. Transmit to 24 side. Note that the special symbol variation pattern creation process is a creation process related to the start opening winning random number determination processing (steps S319 and FIG. 11 in FIG. 10), which is one of the 'prefetch determination' processing in that the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. This is a process that works in the same way as in step S339), but here, the variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation, that is, the variation pattern at the start of variation is It is determined. Details of the special symbol variation pattern creation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, 5AH (ON state) is stored in a special symbol N changing flag (N = 1, 2) for designating that the change display is being performed (step S413). The “special symbol N changing flag” is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), the special symbol changes. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

  Next, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 (step S414) and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415).

  As shown in FIG. 32, the decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes, an upper byte (MODE) for designating the special symbol type on the variable side and a lower byte (EVENT) for designating the winning category. Therefore, the decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning category (symbol lottery result). Specifically, for the upper byte (MODE) side, “B5H” is set when the special symbol on the variable side is special symbol 1, “B6H” is set when the special symbol is 2, and the lower byte (EVENT). As for the side, “01H” to “03H” when the winning type is Loss A to C, “04H” when 15R probability variation big hit is “05H” when 10R probability variation big hit is “05H”, 4R probability variation big hit In this case, “06H” is set. In this embodiment, data that can identify the winning type is set in the lower byte (EVNET), but data that can identify the special stop symbol number or the special symbol determination data may be used. Since this decoration symbol designation command includes information related to the winning type, on the production control unit 24 side, mainly a combination of decoration symbols (design symbol for constituting the reach symbol) when forming the reach state, This is used when determining a combination of decoration symbols (decoration stop symbols) to be finally stopped and a notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game.

  Then, as the change start time setting process, the special symbol operation status is changed to “Fluctuating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the random number storage area for determination is cleared to zero (stores 00H) (step S416). ).

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) of FIG. 9 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S059) is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S060) of FIG.

(10-3-1. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 13)
Next, the gaming state transition preparation process (step S411) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first acquires a big hit determination flag and determines the state of the big hit determination flag (step S431). If the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S431: ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything.

  When the big hit determination flag is ON (= 5 AH) (step S431: = 5 AH), the big hit gaming state transition table selection table (FIG. 28) is acquired (step S432).

  Next, referring to the acquired jackpot gaming state transition table selection table, a jackpot gaming state transition table (FIG. 29) corresponding to the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the jackpot type (special symbol determination data) is acquired. (Step S433), the data determined in the gaming state transition table is stored in various buffers described later (Step S434: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these buffers are read out in the process of the jackpot ending process in FIG. 18 described later (step S509, step S592 in FIG. 18 showing the details), and are stored in predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (in each buffer). Corresponding flag storage area and counter storage area). As a result, the game state transition preparation process is exited and the process proceeds to the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) in FIG.

(T-5. Big hit game state transition table selection table: FIG. 28)
FIG. 29 shows a big hit gaming state transition table selection table. In the jackpot gaming state transition table selection table of the present embodiment, a jackpot gaming state transition table associated with the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data is defined. Specifically, the target jackpot gaming state transition table (FIG. 29) is determined based on the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data.

  Here, the “gaming state determination number (YJ)” is data for identifying the internal gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 60, when the gaming state determination number (YJ) is “00H”, “normal gaming state (no electric support, low probability)” is set to “01H "" Indicates "Probability change state (with electric support, high accuracy)". Therefore, the game state determination number (YJ) is different from the data for identifying the game state itself, such as the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), in that it identifies the internal game state as described above.

(T-6. Game state transition table for jackpot: FIG. 29)
FIG. 29 shows the above jackpot gaming state transition table. In the jackpot gaming state transition table, a plurality of types of data groups for specifying the gaming state to be transitioned after the jackpot game are defined. Specifically, the utility power release extension transition buffer, normal symbol short transition buffer, normal symbol probability transition buffer, special symbol short transition buffer, special symbol probability transition transition buffer, special symbol short transition counter buffer, Various data to be stored in the special symbol probability variation counter buffer, variation pattern allocation designation number 1 buffer, variation pattern allocation designation number 2 buffer, special symbol variation count 1 counter buffer, and special symbol variation count 2 counter buffer It has been established. When various data specified by each game state transition table are stored in each of these buffers, the game state after the end of the big hit game is specified. Further, the values stored in these buffers are read out at a necessary timing (see, for example, the jackpot end process (S592) in FIG. 18), and a predetermined flag storage area or a predetermined counter storage area provided in the RAM 203. And so on. When the various data of each buffer is stored in each storage area, the gaming state after the big hit game is determined. In this embodiment, since only “probability big hit” is provided, “JTTBL-B1” shown in FIG. 29 is a game state transition table for making transition to the “probability variation state”. Of course, when other big hits are provided, for example, when a “short time big hit” for shifting to a short-time state after a big hit game ends, or “latent big hit” for shifting to a latent state, etc., A jackpot gaming state transition table for shifting to a certain state may be provided separately. In this case, the game state determination number (YJ) may be additionally provided with a value for specifying the short time state or the latent state (for example, “02H” for the short state, “03H” or the like for the latent state). . Also, in what gaming state or internal gaming state, what game state or internal gaming state is to be transferred when any big win is won can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics.

  The role of the various buffers described above will be described below.

(General power utility opening extension transition state buffer)
The “general utility release extension transition state buffer” is used to set a general utility release extension state flag. The “general utility release extension state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the release extension function. When the flag is ON (= 5 AH), The state is “present state”, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the open extension function is inactive and “no electric support” state.

(Normal symbol short transition buffer)
The “normal symbol short time transition state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol short time state flag. The “ordinary symbol short time state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the normal symbol short time function. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the normal symbol short function is not activated and the" normal symbol non-short state ".

(Normal symbol change transition buffer)
The “normal symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol probability change state flag. The “normal symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating an auxiliary lottery probability state, that is, an operating state of the normal symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the normal symbol probability changing function is set. It indicates that the state is the “probability change state per assistance” during operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that it is a “low probability state per assistance” in which the normal symbol probability change function is not activated.

(Special symbol short transition buffer)
The “special symbol short time transition state buffer” is used to set a special symbol short time state flag. The “special symbol time reduction state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the special symbol time reduction function. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol non-time-short state is inactive.

(Special Symbol Probability Transition Status Buffer)
The “special symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability change state flag. The “special symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “high probability state during the special symbol probability changing function is operating”. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol probability changing function is not activated in a “low probability state”.

(Special design short time counter buffer)
The “special symbol short time counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol short time counter. "Special symbol time reduction counter" means the number of remaining times until the operation of the "Special symbol time reduction function" ends due to the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of executions of the special variable display game), that is, the "special symbol time reduction state" ends. This is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the operation is performed. In the present embodiment, with the end of the special symbol short-time state, the high base gaming state that is in the electric support state is also ended (see step S481 in FIG. 16B).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol probability variation counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability variation counter. The “special symbol probability variation counter” is the remaining number of times until the operation of the “special symbol probability variation function” is terminated, that is, the “high probability state” is terminated by the number of times the special symbol is changed (the number of executions of the special variation display game) It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times (remaining ST number).

(Variation pattern distribution specification number buffer)
The “variation pattern allocation designation number buffer” is used to set a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode). This “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” is game state data for specifying a game state. The “fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area of the RAM 203, and when a predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied, the value is changed to change from one gaming state to another. (The change pattern selection mode is changed). That is, the condition for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol (the condition for determining the effect) is changed. In the present embodiment, a variation pattern allocation designation number 1 buffer and a variation pattern allocation designation number 2 buffer are provided as variation pattern allocation designation number buffers, and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) includes A variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and a variation pattern allocation designation number 2 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, as the variation pattern distribution designation number buffer, the “variation pattern distribution designation number 1 buffer” that stores the set value to the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) after the end of the big hit game, and the variation pattern A “variation pattern distribution designation number 2 buffer” for storing the setting value for the distribution designation number 2 is provided, and a “variation pattern distribution designation” for storing the setting value until a predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied. “Number (Tcode)” and “Fluctuation pattern allocation designation number 2” for storing a value to be updated when a predetermined gaming state transition condition is satisfied are provided. In the case of this embodiment, the value of “variation pattern allocation designation number 1 buffer” is set as it is to “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” after the big hit game ends (the big hit end in FIG. 18 described later). Process (see step S592)), when a predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, the value of “variable pattern allocation designation number 2” is set to “variable pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)”. (See step S490 in FIG. 16B described later). Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to secure an extra storage area (predetermined area in the RAM 203) of “variation pattern distribution designation number 1” corresponding to “variation pattern distribution designation number 1 buffer”. Specifically, after the big hit game is finished, the value of “variation pattern distribution designation number 1 buffer” is set as it is to the above “variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)”, so that “variation pattern distribution” is set. It is not necessary to provide three counter storage areas of “designation number (Tcode)”, “variation pattern allocation designation number 1”, and “variation pattern allocation designation number 2”, and “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)”. And two counter storage areas of “variation pattern distribution designation number 2” are sufficient. As a result, the storage capacity / use area of the RAM 203 can be reduced, and the control burden on the gaming machine can be reduced.

  Especially in gaming machines that are installed in pachinko parlors, such as this embodiment, specifically for gaming machines that are subject to No. 7 sales under the laws on customs sales and business law, etc. Because there are restrictions on the ROM and RAM that are mounted on the main board (in this embodiment, the main control unit 20 corresponds) that controls the overall game operation according to the rules regarding the recognition of the gaming machine and the type verification in the law. (Attachment 3 of the same rule: Technical standards related to the structure of gaming machines to prevent unauthorized modification and other changes (related to Article 6)), reduction of program capacity, reduction of RAM storage capacity and usage area, etc. Has important significance.

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol variation number counter buffer” is used for setting a special symbol variation number counter. The “special symbol variation counter” is a special symbol variation count that triggers a transition from one gaming state to another gaming state (a special symbol variation count that becomes a gaming state transition condition: hereinafter “gaming state transition” It is a counter for counting the number of times). For example, 77 times is set in the special symbol variation number counter as a specified number of game state transitions to be shifted from “first half of ST” to “second half of ST” after the big hit (the big hit end process (step of FIG. 18 described later)). (See S592)). Thus, when the number of executions of the special variation display game is digested 77 times after shifting to the “first half of ST”, the “first half of ST” is shifted to “second half of ST”. Further, when the process shifts to “second half of ST”, the special symbol variation counter is set to 7 times as the specified number of game state transitions from “second half of ST” to “normal” (step S491 in FIG. 16B described later). reference). As a result, when the number of executions of the special variation display game is completed seven times after the transition to the latter half of ST, the “second half of ST” is shifted to “normal”.

  In the present embodiment, as the special symbol variation count counter buffer, the “special symbol variation count 1 counter buffer” that stores the setting value to the special symbol variation count counter after the big hit game is finished, and the special symbol variation count 2 counter are set. A “special symbol fluctuation count 2 counter buffer” is provided for storing values. In addition, the special symbol variation number counter includes a “special symbol variation counter” that directly counts the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed up to the specified number of game state transitions (in this embodiment, the special symbol variation display number), A “special symbol fluctuation frequency 2 counter” is provided for storing a value to be updated when the specified number of game state transitions is reached. In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the “special symbol variation number 1 counter buffer” is set as it is for the “special symbol variation number counter” after the end of the big hit game (a jackpot end process (step S592 in FIG. 18 described later)). When the specified number of game state transitions has been reached, the value of the “special symbol variation count 2 counter” is set for the “special symbol variation count counter” (step of FIG. 16B described later) (See S491). Thereby, for example, there is no need to secure an extra counter storage area (a predetermined area of the RAM 203) called “special symbol fluctuation frequency 1 counter” corresponding to “special symbol fluctuation frequency 1 counter buffer”. Specifically, by setting the value of the “special symbol variation number 1 counter buffer” as it is for the above “special symbol variation number counter” after the big hit game, the “special symbol variation number counter”, “special symbol variation number counter” There is no need to provide three counter storage areas called “symbol variation number 1 counter” and “special symbol variation number 2 counter”, and two counter storage areas “special symbol variation number counter” and “special symbol variation number 2 counter”. Will be enough. As a result, the storage capacity / use area of the RAM 203 can be reduced, and the control burden on the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the number of times that the probability variation state continues (specified ST number) is 84 times, and the relationship between the game period of the first half of ST (the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed) and the game period of the second half of ST is “first half of ST ( 77 times)> second half of ST (7 times) ", but the present invention is not limited to this. The game period of the first half of the ST and the game period of the second half of the ST may be the same period (first half of ST (42 times) = second half of ST (42 times)), or “first half of ST (30 times) <second half of ST (54 times)” Also good.

(10-3-2. Special symbol variation pattern creation processing (variation pattern creation processing at the start of variation): FIG. 14)
Next, the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation pattern creation processing of FIG.

  In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first obtains a “variation pattern distribution table selection table” shown in FIG. 33 (step S441).

  Next, referring to the variation pattern allocation table selection table, the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation process, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) (current game state), and the number of suspended balls (at the start of variation) Based on the number of operation reservation balls: 0 to 3 reservations (see step S403)), the target variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 34 to 37) is acquired.

  Next, the random number for the variation pattern is acquired (step S443), the variation pattern distribution table acquired in step S442 is referred to, and according to the random number for the variation pattern (by lottery using the random number for variation pattern), Command data (MODE_2 and EVENT) constituting the variation pattern designation command, addition time required for the pseudo-continuation, and “variation time table (not shown)” are acquired (step S444).

(T-3. Fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table (at the start of fluctuation): FIG. 33)
The fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 33 when used at the start of fluctuation will be described. Since the details of the variation pattern distribution table selection table have already been described, the description will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplicate description.

  At the time of start of variation, unlike the time of winning, the variation pattern distribution table is selected in consideration of the number of suspended balls (number of suspended balls at the start of variation in step S403). Specifically, based on the special symbol type, the winning type (the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation process (step S410)), the number of suspended balls, and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), a plurality of types of input variation Any one “variation pattern distribution table” is determined from the pattern distribution tables (FH1 to 11, FB1 to FB6). Here, a variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 34 to 37) for determining a variation pattern at the start of variation is selected using this variation pattern distribution table selection table.

(T-4. Fluctuation pattern distribution table (at the start of fluctuation): FIGS. 34 to 37)
Next, a variation pattern distribution table when used at the start of variation will be described. Since the details of the variation pattern distribution table have already been described, the description will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  Each variation pattern allocation table includes a plurality of types of variation patterns related to special symbols, including a special symbol type, a winning category, the number of suspended balls, a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and a random number for variation pattern (random number value). The variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns by lottery using variation pattern random numbers. Specifically, command data on the upper byte side (“MODE — 2” and lower byte side (EVENT)) for configuring the “fluctuation pattern designation command” at the start of fluctuation is determined. The variation pattern at the start of variation related to the current symbol variation display game is designated, and the variation pattern designation command itself is created in the processing of the subsequent step S447.

  Although not shown, with the determination of the variation pattern, a “variation time determination table” corresponding to the variation pattern is also determined. In this “variation time determination table”, the variation time (symbol variation display operation time) is defined. By referring to the variation time determination table corresponding to the determined variation pattern, the variation of the present variation pattern The time will be fixed. This variation time is the game time of the decorative symbol variation display game executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display time (effect time)).

<S-1. Selection process of hit fluctuation pattern (at the start of fluctuation)>
In the present embodiment, the hit variation pattern has the following characteristics. This will be described with reference to the variation pattern distribution table selection table in FIG. 33, the normal medium variation pattern distribution table in FIG. 34, and the ST medium variation pattern distribution table in FIG.

  First, the case of winning a big hit during “normal” will be described. In the present embodiment, when a big win is won during normal times, the variation pattern distribution table “FB1” or “FB2” is selected according to the winning type. Specifically, if the winning big hit is a 15R probability variable big hit, the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FB1” is selected. If the winning big hit is a 10R positive variation big hit, the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FB2” is selected. It has become so. That is, the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FB2” is a common (common) fluctuation pattern distribution table for the 10R probability variation big hit and the 4R probability variation big hit.

  In the present embodiment, a common variation pattern distribution table is selected for a plurality of types of big hits, so that the data capacity required for the variation pattern distribution table can be reduced. Especially in gaming machines that are installed in pachinko parlors, such as this embodiment, specifically for gaming machines that are subject to No. 7 sales under the laws on customs sales and business law, etc. According to the rules regarding the recognition of game machines and the type verification in law, the capacity of ROM and RAM mounted on the main board (in this embodiment, the main control unit 20 corresponds) that controls the overall game operation is limited. (Attachment 3 of the same rule, technical standards related to the structure of gaming machines to prevent unauthorized modification and other changes (related to Article 6)), reducing program capacity and RAM storage capacity / use area The reduction of this has important significance.

  However, simply selecting a common variation pattern distribution table for a plurality of types of jackpots, as shown in FIG. When the big hit is won, one of the variation patterns is selected from the common variation pattern group. Each variation pattern selection rate is also the same. In other words, in a configuration in which an effect corresponding to the variation pattern (notification effect) is simply displayed, a common variation pattern is selected when one big win is won and another big win is won. Therefore, a common effect appears in the symbol variation display game. This means that as a price to achieve a reduction in the program capacity on the main control unit 20 side, there is a problem that the production related to various big hits cannot be produced and the variation of production becomes scarce. means. Therefore, in this embodiment, this problem is solved as follows.

  In the present embodiment, a “variation pattern designation command” that can identify the variation pattern is transmitted, and subsequently, a “decorative symbol designation command” that designates the winning type is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side (step S412 in FIG. 12). , S415, FIG. 14, FIG. 32). Therefore, the effect control unit 24 side can grasp the hit type (big hit type) by the decorative symbol designation command. Therefore, on the effect control unit 24 side, for example, an effect lottery table corresponding to the hit types shown in FIGS. 38 to 40 to be described later (in this example, when a movable object effect related to the reach effect appears as a notice effect) By providing the “moving effect lottery table to be referred to” as a representative example), even if the variation pattern is the same, the effect pattern can be changed according to the hit type. It has become.

  This can be explained with a specific example as follows. Here, as an example, when the current symbol variation display game is on the side of Special Fig. 1, the hit type is “4R probability variation big hit”, and the variation pattern “normal SP reach A” is selected (hereinafter, When the symbol variation display game of this time is the special diagram 1 side, the hit type is “10R probability variation big hit”, and the variation pattern is “normal SP reach A” (Hereinafter referred to as “Case 2”) will be described as a representative example.

  In case 1 and case 2, the main control unit 20 transmits a variation pattern designation command “A103H” that designates the same variation pattern, and the decorative symbol designation command is 4R in case 1. “B506H” designating the probability variation jackpot is transmitted in the case 2, and “B505H” designating the 10R probability variation jackpot is transmitted.

  The effect control unit 24 side receives the variation pattern designation command “A103H”. However, if the decoration symbol designation command is “B506H”, it is assumed that the current big hit is “4R probability variation big hit” and the accessory shown in FIG. The movement effect lottery table C is referred to, and in the case of “B505H”, “10R probability variation big hit” is referred to, and the accessory movement effect lottery table B of FIG. 39 is referred to, and the lottery table corresponding to each big win is displayed. The production pattern to be decided is determined by lottery.

  Although the details will be described later, the effect patterns determined in FIGS. 38 to 40 are basic effect patterns (major categories of occurrence timing of the accessory movement effect), and detailed effect patterns (occurrence timing of the accessory movement effect). The detailed classification, that is, the effect mode of the accessory moving effect (the operation mode of the movable object relating to the accessory moving effect) and the specific generation timing) are determined through the effect lottery tables of FIGS. It has become.

  Here, referring to the column of “Normal SP Reach A” in the accessory movement effect lottery table B of FIG. 39 and the accessory movement effect lottery table C of FIG. 40, the accessory movement effect of the basic effect pattern is shown. The selection rate of occurrence timing (major category) is different. Specifically, the occurrence timing (major category) of the accessory movement effect in the accessory movement effect lottery table B in FIG. 39 occurs during the SP reach (in this embodiment, it occurs during the SP reach effect execution period). (If this is the case) when the symbol is generated after the temporary stop of the symbol (in this embodiment, when it is generated during the temporary stop display period after the reach effect is finished until the decorative symbol is determined and displayed) Are selected at a selection rate of “70/100”. On the other hand, the generation timing (major category) of the accessory movement effect in the accessory movement effect lottery table C in FIG. 40 is a case where the selection rate is “20/100” when it is generated during SP reach, and after the symbol temporary stop. Are selected at a selection rate of “80/100”.

  In the case 1 (4R probability variation big hit) and the case 2 (10R probability variation big hit), the selection rate of the occurrence timing of the accessory movement effect is different. The player can be given a guessing element for guessing the type of the game. This means that an effect (notice effect) related to each big win can be displayed.

  Therefore, even if the variation pattern determined on the main control unit 20 side is the same variation pattern, it is possible to vary the presentation mode selected according to the jackpot type. In other words, even if a common variation pattern is selected when one jackpot is won and another jackpot is won, in the symbol variation display game, effects related to various jackpot wins (notices) Production) can be made to appear. As a result, the program capacity on the main control unit 20 side can be reduced, and variations in production can be made various.

  Next, explanation will be given for a case where a big win is won during the “first half of ST”. In the present embodiment, when a big win is won during the first half of ST, the variation pattern distribution table “FB3” is selected regardless of the winning type. That is, a common variation pattern distribution table is selected for all big hits (here, 15R, 10R, and 4R probability big hits). In other words, a variation pattern distribution table used for all jackpots is defined.

  In this case, as in the case 1 and 2 described above, the effect selection tables shown in FIGS. 38 to 40 to be described later are selected corresponding to the hit types. An effect can be produced.

  During the “second half of ST”, the variation pattern distribution table “FB4 to FB6” corresponding to each hit is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of “normal”, a common variation pattern distribution table is selected for some of the big hits, and during the “first half of ST” during ST. In this case, a common variation pattern allocation table is selected for all big hits, and during the “second half of ST”, a variation pattern allocation table corresponding to each hit is selected. It is like that. Thereby, according to the gaming state, the variation of the notice effect that appears is enriched, and the control burden of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the variation pattern selection process on the main control unit 20 side, when selecting a variation variation pattern related to any one of a plurality of types of hits (winning types), A specific specific variation pattern distribution table is selectable between “all” and / or “between some hits (for example, 10R probability variation big hit and 4R probability variation big hit)”, while production on the production control unit 24 side In the control process, a target effect pattern is determined using an effect lottery table corresponding to each of the multiple types of hits. As a result, the control burden on the main control unit 20 side is reduced (reduction in program capacity), and even if a common variation pattern is selected when one jackpot is won and another jackpot is won, In the symbol variation display game, an effect (notice effect) related to each of the big hits can be displayed, so that the degree of freedom of the effect is not hindered.

  In the present embodiment, depending on the game state type (usually, the first half of ST, the second half of ST, etc.), a specific variation pattern distribution table common to all of a plurality of types or a part of the hit types However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern distribution table that is common to all of a plurality of types of hits may be selected regardless of the gaming state, or at least two of the types of hits in each gaming state may be selected. A common variation pattern distribution table may be selected between types of hits. Also, in any gaming state, it is possible to appropriately determine what variation pattern distribution table is shared (shared) between all or some of the multiple types of hits. .

  Further, when determining the notice effect at the time of losing, the same processing contents as in the above-described case of winning can be performed. This will be described with reference to a “variation pattern distribution table selection table” shown in FIG. 33, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 33, when selecting a loss variation pattern in the variation pattern selection process on the main control unit 20 side, with respect to the special figure 1 side, during “normal”, in the case of a loss A, the number of suspended balls is Accordingly, the variation pattern distribution table “FH1 to 4” is selected, and in the case of the loss B, the variation pattern distribution table “FH5” is selected regardless of the number of suspended balls. In the case of the loss B, the variation pattern distribution table “FH6” is selected regardless of the number of the operation suspension balls. Further, during “first half of ST” and “middle of ST”, the variation pattern distribution table “FH7” is selected for all of the loss A to the loss C regardless of the number of suspended balls.

  On the other hand, with respect to the special figure 2 side, during “normal”, the variation pattern distribution table “FH12” is selected for all of the loss A to the loss C regardless of the number of the suspended balls. In the “first half of ST”, in the case of a loss A, the variation pattern distribution table “FH7 (when the number of operation reservation balls is zero)” and the variation pattern distribution table “FH8 (( In the case of Loss B and Loss C, the common variation pattern sorting table “FH9” is used regardless of the number of pending balls. In the “second half of ST”, in the case of loss A, the same as in the “first half of ST” described above, and in the case of loss B, it fluctuates regardless of the number of suspended balls. The pattern distribution table “FH10” is selected, and in the case of the loss C, the variation pattern distribution table “FH11” is selected regardless of the number of operation-pending balls.

  Among the cases described above, for example, in the case of a loss in the “first half of ST” or “second half of the ST” on the special figure 1 side, or in the case of a loss in the “normal” or “first half of ST” on the special figure 2 side, As in the case of the “normal” hit variation pattern distribution table selection process (in the case of “normal”, the variation pattern change in the case of 15R probability variable big hit) In the case where the minute table “FB1” is 10R probability variation big hit and 4R probability variation big hit, a common variation pattern distribution table “FB2” is selected), “all of a plurality of types of loss” and / or “one of them” The common variation pattern distribution table “FH9” can be selected for “parts between types of loss”, but also in this case, in the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side, the effect corresponding to the loss type Provided selection table, you can determine the performance pattern of interest using the same.

  Specifically, it is possible to provide a “losing accessory moving effect lottery table” corresponding to each lose. For example, an “actual material movement effect lottery table D” as shown in FIG. 40A can be provided. FIG. 40A representatively shows an accessory movement effect lottery table corresponding to the lose B, and the “actual object movement effect lottery table” corresponding to the lose C is not shown in order to avoid duplication. . In this embodiment, since the reach effect is not selected in the case of the loss A (see FIGS. 35 and 37), the accessory movement effect lottery table corresponding to the lose A is not necessary and is not provided in this example.

  Further, in the case of a loss, the occurrence rate of the movable body effect is set to be relatively lower than that in the case of winning (see FIGS. 38 to 40 and FIG. 40A). In the case of losing, since the above-mentioned reviving effect is not generated, the movable body effect is not displayed after “design temporary stop” as shown in the figure.

  In the case where an accessory movement effect lottery table corresponding to each of the loss B and the loss C is provided, the occurrence rate of the movable body effect associated with each variation pattern (see the occurrence timing “none” column in FIG. 40A), The probability of occurrence during SP reach when a movable body effect is generated (see the column of “occurrence timing“ SP reach ”” in the figure) can be set to different probabilities depending on the type of loss, as in the case of winning. it can. For example, as shown in FIG. 40A, in the case of the “normal SP SP reach A” of the loss B, the generation of the movable body effect is the selection rate “90/100”, and the case where it is generated during the SP reach is the selection rate “ 10/100 ”, and when the loss C is“ normal SP reach A ”, the generation of the movable body effect is the selection rate“ 80/100 ”, and the case where it is generated during the SP reach is the selection rate“ 20/100 ”. ". As a result, in the case of a loss, the same effect as in the case of a hit, that is, the control burden on the main control unit 20 side can be reduced, and the variation of the effect in the case of a loss can be varied.

  In addition, as described above, the lost lottery table corresponding to the lost type can be omitted. For example, the accessory movement effect lottery table shown in FIG. 40A can be used in common for all types of loss (here, loss B and loss C). In particular, in the case of losing, unlike in the case of winning, it is difficult to imagine that the player enjoys guessing the losing type from the production.

  It should be noted that, regardless of the game state or depending on the game state, a specific variation pattern distribution table common to all of the losses A to C, or a part of the loss types (for example, the loss B and the loss C). A common specific variation pattern distribution table may be selected. In this case, in the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side, an effect lottery table (not shown) corresponding to each of the loss A to the loss C is provided in the same way as in the case of hitting as described above. What is necessary is just to set it as the structure which determines the target production pattern using. In this case as well, the same operational effects as the above-described hitting case can be achieved.

  Although not shown, in the effect lottery table corresponding to the above-mentioned case of loss, one or a plurality of types of effect modes related to the variation pattern designation command related to the loss are defined like the effect lottery table related to winning. One or more types of effect lottery tables are provided. Thereby, the appearance of the effect in the symbol variation display game is realized by the effect selection process related to the variation pattern at the time of losing.

<S-2. About reach fluctuation pattern during ST>
Further, in the present embodiment, different types of reach effects can be displayed in the first half of ST and the second half of ST. 36 and 37, in the first half of ST, a single “reach D during ST” is selected as the reach variation pattern, and in the second half of ST, reach E during ST, reach F during ST, and reach G during ST. Any reach variation pattern can be selected. That is, more reach effects can appear in the second half of the ST than in the first half of the ST. In this way, by configuring so that different types of reach effects appear in the game period in the first half of the ST and the game period in the second half of the ST, even if the internal game state is the same probability variation state, the symbol variation display game The type of notice effect can be switched dynamically according to the number of times of execution. As a result, even when the same internal gaming state continues for a predetermined number of games, the notice effect can be varied and the game can be enjoyed.

<S-3. About Loss Fluctuation Pattern>
In this embodiment, the loss variation pattern includes the following characteristic elements. This will be described with reference to the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 33, the normal loss variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 35, and the ST variation variation pattern distribution table of ST of FIG.

  First, the normal loss variation pattern will be described. Referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table in FIG. 33, during normal operation (variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) = 00H), the special figure 2 side does not depend on the loss type, but the variation pattern distribution table “ FH12 "is selected.

  With respect to the loss variation pattern distribution table “FH12”, referring to the normal loss variation pattern distribution table in FIG. 35, only “normal variation 12 s (variation time 12 seconds)” is selected. In detail, in the case of “normal”, it is “no electric support”, and in the case of a loss winning in this no electric support state, the special figure 2 side is in a reach state regardless of the type of loss and the operation holding ball. Only the “normal variation pattern” type for non-reach production that does not go through is specified.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the case of a game state with a “no electric support” state such as “normally in progress”, the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is established, so The target prefetch determination is prohibited. When the fluctuation pattern on the special figure 2 side is determined in the “no electric support” state, the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH12” in which only the normal fluctuation pattern is selected is selected and the special figure is selected. Although it has the feature of prohibiting the pre-reading determination for the two-operation holding ball, the reason for such determination is as follows.

  For example, only three special figure 1 operation holding balls with normal fluctuation patterns are held, and in this state, there is a winning at the upper start port 34, and a pre-reading advance notice for the fourth special figure 1 operation holding ball is made. The case where the production has started will be described as a representative example (in this embodiment, whether or not the pre-reading notice production is performed is lottered on the condition that there is no reach variation pattern in the old operation holding ball, or the old operation holding is performed. If there is a reach variation pattern in the ball, whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is performed is selected by lottery, but the probability that the pre-reading notice effect is executable is determined to be zero). Here, the above-mentioned “fourth special figure 1 operation holding ball” which has been a target of the pre-reading notice effect will be referred to as “notice target holding ball”.

  In the state where the above-mentioned noticeable holding ball has not yet been digested, when the lower start opening 35 has won a prize and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated, the special fluctuation function generated later will give priority to the special figure 2 operation holding ball. Digested. At this time, if the variation pattern related to the special figure 2 operation holding ball is determined to be a “reach loss variation pattern”, the loss that has no relevance to the pre-reading notice effect for the above-mentioned notice target holding ball is lost. No. “Reach production” is intervening, and the pre-reading notice production is cut off in the middle. As a result, there is a fear that the function of the pre-reading notice effect is not sufficiently exhibited, and the effect of the effect cannot be fully utilized.

  In view of the above problems, first, when the winning result in the “no power support state” is “lost”, only the “normal variation pattern” is designated as the variation pattern on the special figure 2 side. Thereby, the said problem can be solved. However, with this alone, a series of 'pre-reading determination' processing related to the winning time processing is executed for the special figure 2 operation holding ball that occurred later, and the control load of the pre-reading notice effect still increases. End up.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, as described above, the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is established in the state without the electric support, and the “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition” is in the state with the electric support. "Condition" is established, and the section (prefetch prohibition state) in which prefetch determination on the special figure 1 side and special figure 2 side is prohibited is switched according to the gaming state. Thereby, the control burden regarding the prefetch notice effect can be reduced. Note that if the special figure 2 holding ball that was generated later happened to be a big hit (including a small hit), the fluctuation pattern on the special figure 2 side was selected as the fluctuation pattern on the side of the special figure, and the above notice subject The “reach effect” will be intervened during the pre-reading notice for the holding ball, but in this case, it will be a big hit as it is, and it will not cause any disadvantage to the player, and the pre-reading notice will be broken. In such a case, since it is possible to add an unexpected performance such as winning a big hit, it is considered that there is no particular problem.

  Even if there is no electric support, there is a possibility that multiple winnings of the lower start opening 35 may occur if a long-term release of the ordinary electric open game is won. Even in this case, the symbol fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 side can be executed a plurality of times before the symbol fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 side. In this case, if the fluctuation pattern on the special figure 2 side is selected as the “normal fluctuation pattern”, particularly, only a single normal fluctuation pattern is selected, the following advantages are obtained.

  If the effect time of the symbol variation display game on the special figure 2 side is made different depending on the number of suspended balls and the type of loss, the effect time of the symbol variation display game is being digested during the game of the symbol variation display game on the special symbol 2 side. Because it can change, it may be difficult to continuously develop closely related effects (for example, narrative effects tailored to a story) across multiple symbol variation display games. It is done.

  Moreover, if there is no electric support, there is a very high possibility that the number of the operation holding balls when the symbol variation display game of this special figure 2 side starts and the number of the operation holding balls when the game ends ( If the special symbol variation pattern changes according to the number of reserved balls, the time for the next symbol variation display game will be displayed. Cannot be predicted.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of the length of the production time as much as possible, the symbol variation display game on the side of the special figure 2 in the state without the electric support is irrespective of the number of suspended balls and the type of loss. A single “normal variation 12s” is selected so that the narrative effect as described above can be easily developed. In this way, when a loss is won, only “normal fluctuation 12s” having the same fluctuation pattern can be selected each time regardless of the number of suspended balls and the type of loss. As a result, as long as the game continues to win, the game progresses while the execution time of the symbol variation display game for each time, that is, the production time has the same time width, so in developing the narrative-like production, Is preferred. In the case of a big win, a specific effect (see FIG. 34) specified by the hit fluctuation pattern can be generated. For example, an epilogue effect that puts an end to the story development as part of the narrative effect, etc. When the special performance is generated, it is possible to notify the big win winning decision. In addition, the above “story-style production” is, for example, a “combat production (fighting production where the enemy falls when winning a big hit. Defeat production that receives an attack from the enemy when winning a win)” ”Or“ Storyline production (when the big hit is won, the final story production of the last story of the story, and when the loser is won, the story continues) ” Gives a predetermined command to the player every time the game is executed. “Direction effect (for example, with a button notice effect,“ Press the frame effect button 13 to defeat the enemy! ”) Achievement effect. When win is lost, there is no particular limitation as long as some story development is made, such as an instruction unachieved effect in which the enemy remains).

  Next, the loss variation pattern during ST will be described. Referring to the variation pattern allocation table selection table in FIG. 33, both the first half of ST and the second half of ST (variation pattern allocation designation numbers (Tcode) = 01H, 02H) are special during ST. On the side of FIG. 1, the variation pattern distribution table “FH7” is selected regardless of the type of loss.

  With respect to this loss variation pattern distribution table “FH7”, referring to the ST variation variation pattern distribution table during ST, only “normal variation 8s (variation time 8 seconds)” is selected. In detail, when “ST” is in the state of “with electric support”, in the case of a loss winning in this electric support state, the special figure 1 side is “normal” regardless of the type of loss and the operation holding ball. Only the “variation pattern” type is specified.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the case of a game state with a “electric support state” such as “during ST”, the “special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition” is established. The target prefetch determination is prohibited. In the present embodiment, “right-handed” is recommended in the “with electric support” state, so there is almost no winning at the upper start opening 34. For this reason, when determining the fluctuation pattern on the special figure 1 side, a single fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH7” is selected regardless of the type of loss and the number of suspended balls. By prohibiting the pre-reading determination for the operation holding ball, the control burden is greatly reduced.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 14 again, when the processing of step S444 is completed, the variation time table of the special symbol is included in the timer management area of the RAM 203 with reference to the variation time table. Is set to “special symbol accessory operation timer” (step S445). In the “variation time table”, the variation time (basic variation time) of the special symbol when there is no pseudo-continuation is defined as the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Therefore, in the case of a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations, a variation time obtained by adding the illustrated addition time to the basic variation time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer. Thereby, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern is determined, and the game time of the current symbol variation display game (design game) is designated.

  In addition to the special symbol change time, a plurality of types of operation time related to the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are set in the special symbol accessory operation timer according to the processing state. That is, a plurality of types of operation time can be managed by one timer, and a game operation processing procedure is set up so that each operation time is not set to be duplicated in the timer. Thereby, in the RAM 203, the program area and work area can be reduced rather than providing a plurality of types of timer management areas corresponding to the respective timers.

  Next, a variation pattern designation command is created based on the command data acquired in step S444 (step S447), and is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 without being stored in the RAM 203 (step S448). As a result, the variation pattern of the current symbol variation display game is designated, and the production control unit 24 receives the variation pattern designation command, and based on the information contained therein, produces the necessary effects for the current symbol variation display game. An effect control process is performed for the appearance.

  Thus, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is exited, and the process proceeds to step S413 in FIG.

(C-2: List of change pattern designation commands: FIGS. 30 and 31)
30 to 31 show a list of the variation pattern designation commands. FIG. 30 shows a list of change pattern designation commands for hitting, and FIG. 31 shows a list of change pattern designation commands for lost.

  The variation pattern designation command of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of commands including hit variation pattern designation commands corresponding to the variation patterns A1 to A17 and loss variation pattern designation commands corresponding to the variation patterns H1 to H22. This variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and subsequently, the decorative symbol designation command is transmitted. Upon receiving these commands, the effect control unit 24, based on information included in each command, a notice effect for appearing in the current symbol variation display game, and a decorative symbol pattern (stop decorative symbol to be finally stopped). ) And the reach symbols that form the reach state, etc., and the production scenario is constructed, and the production of the current symbol variation display game is made to appear based on the production scenario. Since the variation pattern designation command includes at least winning result information and variation pattern information, the presentation control unit 24 uses the variation pattern designation command to produce the presentation mode and the like related to the current symbol variation display game. It is also possible to determine a stop decorative symbol and execute a symbol variation display game.

  Here, with reference to the list of loss variation pattern designation commands in FIG. 31, the characteristics of the gaming state focusing on the variation time defined in various variation patterns will be described.

  The normal variation pattern of this embodiment includes “normal variation 5 s (variation time 5 seconds)” (variation pattern H1), “normal variation 8 s (variation time 8 seconds)” (variation pattern H2), which can be selected during normal operation. And “normal variation 12 s (variation time 12 seconds)” (variation pattern H3), “normal variation 2 s during ST (variation time 2 seconds)” (variation pattern H17) that can be selected during ST, and “normal variation during ST” 8s (variation time 8 seconds) "(variation pattern H18).

(D-1: High-speed fluctuation state)
Of these normal variation patterns, attention is paid to “normal variation during ST 2 s”. This “normal fluctuation during ST 2s” is a fluctuation pattern in which a relatively short fluctuation time is defined, and in the present embodiment, a variation pattern in which the shortest fluctuation time is defined among all the fluctuation patterns. . Here, during “ST”, since there is a power support state, it is considered that a plurality of operation hold balls are held during each game. The “normal fluctuation during ST 2 s” is a normal fluctuation pattern that is selected when “losing A” has the highest winning probability among the types of loss. Therefore, in the case of a loss winning in “ST”, a high-speed fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time width of the special symbol is “2 seconds” is selected with high probability. In other words, during the ST, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game (the average time of the symbol variation display game per game or the time of the symbol variation display game per unit time) is relative to other probability variation states. It is placed under the “high-speed fluctuation state” that becomes shorter.

  Such “high-speed fluctuating state” is mainly useful in a gaming state in which importance is placed on the game characteristics such as “increase the average digestion speed of the game and increase the time efficiency regarding the progress of the game”. In particular, during the probabilistic state, the game state has been devised to improve the game digestion speed per unit time and make it easier to win big hits. Become. When placed under such a gaming state, there are many players who want to get a big hit faster than enjoying the production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “high-speed fluctuation state” is generated during the ST. If the “short time state” is configured to be generated, the lottery lottery probability is in a low probability state, but the lottery number improvement state becomes “electric support support state + special symbol short time state”. Also in this case, the “high-speed fluctuation state” may be generated as in the above-mentioned “during ST”.

(D-2: Low speed fluctuation state)
For the above "high-speed fluctuation state", multiple types of fluctuation patterns with relatively long fluctuation times such as "normal fluctuation 12s (fluctuation time 12 seconds)" and "normal fluctuation 8s (fluctuation time 8 seconds)" are selected. In a game state that is likely to be played, the game is placed under a “low-speed fluctuation state” in which the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game is relatively long. Under such a “low speed fluctuation state”, the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game is longer than that of the “high speed fluctuation state”, but instead, the production time can be made longer. It is useful in a gaming state where emphasis is placed on gameplay such as “enjoy”. In the gaming state where the probability of winning a big hit is low or the possibility is high, there are many players who want to enjoy the production while enjoying the production, contrary to the above-mentioned probability variation state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “low speed fluctuation state” is generated in the case of “normal”.

  In the present embodiment, the “high-speed fluctuation state” is generated in the first half of ST and the second half of ST. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first half of ST is set to “high-speed fluctuation state” and the second half of ST is “ You may comprise so that it may become a "low-speed fluctuation state." Conversely, the first half of the ST may be in a “low speed fluctuation state” and the second half of the ST may be in a “high speed fluctuation state”. Especially during the ST, the game is in a probable state, so many players want to enjoy the production while waiting for the big hit during the ST. Also, during the ST, the game is in a gaming state where a big hit can be expected, so there are many players who want the speed of the reed. In order to satisfy the needs of such a wide range of players, it is preferable to change the game digestion rate between the first half of ST and the second half of ST. In order to set the first half of ST or the second half of ST to the “low-speed fluctuation state”, for example, “normal fluctuation 12 s (variation time 12 seconds)” or “normal fluctuation 8 s” in the fluctuation pattern distribution table as in the normal state. What is necessary is just to comprise so that the normal fluctuation pattern with comparatively long variation time, such as (variation time 8 second), may be selected with high probability.

(10-4. Special symbol variation processing: Fig. 15)
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S307) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

  In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory action timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol change time has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a “variation stop command” indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451). S452). With this change stop command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol change display game has ended after the change time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops and displays (decision display) the decorative symbol that is currently displayed in change. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated along with the termination of the special symbol variation display game.

  Next, as a setting process at the time of stoppage of the special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol determination signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol determination timer of the RAM 203, and the fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), The special symbol operation status is switched to “confirming (03H)” (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol changing flag (step S453). Exit the special symbol change process. The “special symbol determination signal output time” is an extra time for securing the output time of the special symbol determination signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been determined and displayed. It is. The “determined display time” is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol change display is finished and the special symbol is stopped.

  When the process of step S453 is completed, the special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 of FIG. 9 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special symbol display process of step S060 of FIG. Proceed to the electric accessory management process.

(10-6. Processing during special symbol confirmation time (variation stop processing): FIGS. 16A and 16B)
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 16A and 16B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG. 9, where FIG. 16A shows the first half and FIG. 16B shows the second half.

  In FIG. 16A and FIG. 16B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). The “determined display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S453 in FIG. 20). Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol movement status is switched to “standby (01H)”, assuming that the current special symbol fluctuation display game is over (special symbol action). (01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state determination number (YJ) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM 203 (step S473).

  Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big hit judgment flag is ON)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S475). Here, as various setting processes (pre-start process of the big hit game) at the time of the big hit symbol stop, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the big hit determination flag, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag, General power release extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, and special symbol variation count 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the counters, 00H (usually A is specified) is stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), and the game state notification LED (not shown) is turned on / off. 00H is stored in the status notification LED output number, and the process during this special symbol confirmation time is exited.

  The “gaming state notification LED” is state notification means for notifying current game state information. The gaming state notification LED (state notification unit) of the present embodiment is used to notify whether or not the special symbol time-short state is set. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the game state notification LED (state notification means) according to the game state notification LED output number. For example, if the gaming state notification LED output number is “00H”, it means that the current state is not the special symbol short state (gaming state notification LED: off state (non-special symbol short state notification), and “01H”. Now, it is informed that it is in the special symbol short-time state (game state notification LED: lighting state (special symbol short-time state notification).

(When the big hit judgment flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is OFF (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then whether or not the special symbol short time counter (remaining number of special symbol short time states) is zero Is determined (step S478). When the special symbol time counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short time counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol short time counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digest of the current fluctuation number, and the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S480).

  If the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of end times of the special symbol short time state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), the setting processing at the time short end is performed on the assumption that the number of end times of the special symbol short time state (84 in this embodiment) has been reached (step S480). S481). Here, 00H (OFF state) is changed for each of the utility power release extended state flag, the normal symbol time-short state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time-short state flag as setting processing at the time-short-time end. 00H is stored in the pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol time-short state designation) is stored in the gaming status notification LED output number. As a result, from the next game, the player is placed in a state without power support.

  When the setting process at the time-short end in step S481 is finished, a “short-time end command” indicating that the special symbol time-short state has ended (electric supportless state transition information) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command ( Step S482). Since the short end command is transmitted at the end of the current symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the next game is in the “no power support state” before the next game is started. it can.

  In the case of the present embodiment, since the transition from the electric support state to the no electric support state is the same as the transition from the probability change state (during ST) to the normal state (normal), the effect control unit 24 Upon receiving the “short-time end command”, for example, when starting the next decorative symbol variation display game, the background image (background effect) for the normal effect mode from the background image (background effect) for the second half ST effect mode. The effect control process under the effect mode can be performed. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect control process for causing a “fired position guidance effect (left-handed notification effect)” that instructs to aim at the leftward flow path 3b as the shooting position. Also, as described above, since the short time end command is transmitted at the end of the current symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 recognizes that the next game is shifted to the normal state (normally), and the next game Before the start, it is possible to switch to the background image (background effect) for the normal effect mode.

  When the processing proceeds to step S483, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S487. However, if the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S484) as the current variation variation of the special symbol (step S484). It is determined whether or not the counter is zero (step S485).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), since the specified number of STs (84 times) has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S487 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), the special symbol variation count reaches 84 times of the specified ST count (ST termination count), and setting processing at the end of probability variation is performed ( Step S486). Here, as a transition setting process to the normal gaming state at the end of the probability variation state, the utility model open extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol certain state variation flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol certain variation state 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the flags, 00H is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol time-short state designation) is stored in the gaming state notification LED output number. Thereby, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability is placed from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In the case of this embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number of 84 times, the setting process at the end of the short time in step S481 and the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486 are followed. As a result, the internal gaming state is shifted to the “normal state”, and the gaming state (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)) is set to “00H” designating normal.

  When the setting process at the end of probability change in step S486 is completed, the process proceeds to step S487. Here, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation number counter is zero, that is, whether the gaming state transition specified number of times (from “first half of ST” to “ It is determined whether or not the "second half of ST" transition: 77 gaming state transition prescribed times and the "normal" transition from "second half": seven gaming state transition prescribed times) is zero (step S487).

  If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S487: YES), the special symbol confirmation time is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S487: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S488) as the digest of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S489).

  If the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S489: NO), it is determined that the game state transition prescribed number has not been reached, and the processing during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation count counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), the variation pattern allocation designation number update processing is performed assuming that the special symbol variation count has reached the prescribed number of gaming state transitions (step S490).

  In this variation pattern allocation designation number update processing, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) necessary when the specified game state transition count is reached is updated. In the case of the present embodiment, the variation pattern distribution designation number update process is performed when (I) after the end of the big hit, the game state transition prescribed number of times set as the duration of the first half of the ST is digested 77 times ( II) This is a case in which after the end of the first half of the ST, the game state transition prescribed number of times set as the duration of the second half of the ST is consumed.

  In the former case (above (I)), the latter half of ST is designated from the current fluctuation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), that is, the fluctuation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode) “01H” designating the first half of ST. The variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is updated to the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) “02H”. This “02H” is a value set in “variation pattern allocation designation number 2” in the RAM 203 in the processing of step S592 in the jackpot end processing (FIG. 18) described later (the “variation pattern during the processing”). In this example, this value is acquired and “02H” is set (updated) in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode).

  The gaming state transition prescribed number of times “77” is set in the process of step S592 in the jackpot end process (FIG. 18) described later (refer to the description of “special symbol variation number counter ← 77 times” in the process). Is the value to be As a result, the selection condition for the variation pattern of the special symbol is changed. Specifically, the variation pattern selection condition is specified so that the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the first half of ST is selected before the gaming state transition prescribed number of times reaches 77 times. When the specified number of game state transitions is reached, the selection condition is changed so that the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the latter half of ST is selected.

  In the latter case (described above (II)), normal is designated from the current fluctuation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), that is, the fluctuation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode) “02H” designating the latter half of ST. The variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is updated to the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) “00H”. The gaming state transition prescribed number of times of 7 is a value set in later-described step S491 (special figure fluctuation number counter updating process). Here, the variation pattern selection conditions are specified so that the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the latter half of ST is selected before the prescribed number of game state transitions reaches seven times. When the specified number of state transitions is reached, the selection condition is changed so that a special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal state is selected.

  The above-described step S490 process serves as a selection condition change control means for changing the selection condition of the special symbol variation pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined selection change condition.

  Next, when the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number update process in step S490 is completed, a special figure fluctuation number counter update process is then performed (step S491). Here, after the game state transition regulation number of 77 times in the first half of the ST is consumed, “7 times” is set in the special symbol fluctuation number counter as the duration of the second half of the ST. This “seven times” is a value set in the “special symbol variation number 2 counter” in the RAM 203 in the processing of step S592 in the jackpot end processing (FIG. 18) described later (the “special symbol during the processing”). Here, this value is acquired and “7 times” is set (updated) in the special symbol fluctuation number counter. In the present embodiment, the first half of ST and the second half of ST are managed by the processing of steps S487 to S491.

  Next, a “game state designation command” including the game state information of the transfer destination is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S492), and the special symbol confirmation time out process is exited. With this “game state designation command”, the production control unit 24 ends “first half of ST” in the current game and “second half of ST” from the next game, or “second half of ST” ends. Know that the next game will be “Normal”. Thereby, when starting the decorative symbol variation display game to be performed next, the effect control unit 24 switches to the background image (background effect) for the effect mode corresponding to the gaming state to be the transition destination, and under the effect mode. The effect control process is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described gaming state designation command is transmitted before the variation pattern designation command relating to the next symbol variation display game is transmitted. For this reason, when receiving the game state designation command, the production control unit 24 produces an effect for the current production mode (for example, before the variation pattern designation command related to the next symbol variation display game is sent). , Background effects) can be switched to effects for other effect modes. That is, before the variation pattern designation command related to the next symbol variation display game is sent, an effect related to the other variation mode appears, in other words, before the next symbol variation display game, The production related to the production mode can be made to appear. As a result, the player can perform the effects related to the next symbol variation display game even if there is no operation holding ball when the current symbol variation display game ends (when the next symbol variation display game is not started). The mode can be grasped in advance.

  As described above, when the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is exited, the special symbol display data update processing in step S309 in FIG. 9 is performed, and then the special symbol management processing is exited, and the special electric equipment management in step S060 in FIG. Proceed to processing.

<11. Special Electric Property Management Process: Fig. 17>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S060) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S060.

  In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the condition device operation flag (step S501). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH) and is not in the big hit game, so do nothing Exit the special electric property management process.

  When the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S501: = 5AH), processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S502: special electric accessory status branching process). . The “special electric accessory operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable prize winning device 52. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM 203. Is done.

  In the special electric accessory operation status branch process in step S502, a process corresponding to the special electric accessory operation status value is called and executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special electric accessory is “starting process (00H)”, the big hit start process (step S505) is performed. In the case where the accessory actuating start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory actuating process (step S507) is in effect. In the case where the accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) is “ending process (04H)”, the jackpot end process (step S509) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 52 related to the big hit game is controlled. Here, “being started (00H)” indicates that the player is in a standby state before the jackpot game starts, and “operation start process (01H)” is that the player is in a standby state before starting the round game. “In operation (02H)” indicates that a round game is being executed, and “Continuing determination (03H)” indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. “Big jackpot end process in progress (04H)” indicates that the big hit game is ending. When one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is completed, the special electric accessory management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

  Below, the jackpot game control process (steps S505 to S509) will be described.

<Big hit game control processing (steps S505 to S509)>
First, the big hit starting process (step S505) will be described.

(11-1. Big hit start processing)
At the start of the big hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to “starting process (00H)” of the initial status value. Therefore, when a big hit is made, the big hit starting process is first performed.

  Here, as a setting process at the time of starting the big hit game necessary for starting the big hit game, 5 AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to “operation start process”. "Middle (01H)" (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and 01H is stored in the continuous number counter. The above-mentioned “actual accessory continuous actuating device operation flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the accessory continuous actuating device. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the accessory continuous actuating device is operating. This indicates that the round game can be continued, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is inactive (round game cannot be continued). The “continuous number counter” is a counter for managing the number of continuous executions of the round game, and the current round number is stored here. Since “01H” is set in the continuous number counter here, the current round number indicates the 1Rth.

  Next, a “big hit start setting table (not shown)” in which the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) and round display LED numbers according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type) is determined is acquired. Referring to this jackpot start setting table, each data corresponding to the special symbol determination data of this time is stored in the storage area of the corresponding RAM 203, and "start interval time" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer To do. The above “start interval time” means that after the special symbol fixed display time elapses and the jackpot is fixed (see step S 471 in FIG. 14 and step S 471 in FIG. 15A), the special variable winning device 52 is activated. , Which is a time interval that defines an interval in which the opening effect is performed (first effect time before the first round game is performed). The “round display LED number” is data specifying the notification mode of the round number display device 39b (round number display means), and indicates the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) of the current big hit game.

  Next, a “hit hit command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the process goes to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG. In addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, the “big hit start command” includes information that can specify the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, and the effect control unit 24 side It is also used when determining a series of winning effects (opening effects, round effects, round end effects, ending effects, etc. corresponding to each jackpot type) developed during the game.

(11-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the special electric accessory operation start process (step S506) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. In this special symbol accessory operation timer, “interval time before starting round game” is set. As the interval time, in the first round (1R), the “start interval time” set in the jackpot start process (step S505) is monitored. When passing (step S506), “interval time before opening (interval time set in special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) described later)” is monitored. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory action timer is zero, that is, if the interval time before opening (in the case of the first round (1R), the start interval time) has elapsed, the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the current round The opening / closing operation pattern of the special winning opening 50 according to the number is set (large winning opening / closing operation setting process). Specifically, the special prize opening / closing operation time for opening the special prize opening 50 (for example, 29.8 seconds for the long opening time, 0.1 seconds for the short opening time) is used as the special symbol accessory. The solenoid control data for controlling the special winning opening solenoid 52c is set in the operation timer. As a result, the special prize opening solenoid 52c is operated, and the special prize opening 50 is opened with the upper prize opening / closing operation time as an upper limit. In response to the start operation for opening the big prize opening, a “big prize opening command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This “big prize opening release command” includes round game start information (round production start instruction information) and current round number information, and when the production control unit 24 causes a round production corresponding to the number of rounds to appear. Used for When the special prize opening / closing operation setting process is completed, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Active (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. The process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

(11-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the special electric accessory operating process (step S507) will be described.

  Here, first, the number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50 is counted, and it is confirmed whether or not the number of winning balls has reached the maximum winning number (large winning opening maximum winning number confirming process), and the maximum winning number is reached. If you do, clear the special symbol accessory operation timer. As a result, the timer value set in the special electric accessory operation start process (step S506) is forcibly set to zero, and the open large winning opening 50 is closed when the maximum winning number is reached. It has become. Until the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (until the opening time of the big prize opening expires or the maximum number of winnings is reached), this special electric accessory operating process is performed without doing anything. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (when the maximum number of winnings has been reached or the opening time for the special prize opening has elapsed), the special electric accessory action status is determined as the end of the current round game. Switch to “Continue judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), the remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1980ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operating process The process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 in FIG.

(11-4. Special electric equipment operation continuation determination process)
Next, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time after closing the big prize opening is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see the special electric accessory operating process (step S507)), this remaining ball discharge time is set. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is terminated without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time elapses), the continuous number counter is acquired to determine whether the current number of rounds has reached the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). judge. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added to the continuation counter (+1) as the process for continuing the round game, and the “interval before opening” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. The object operation status is switched to “operation starting process (01H)” (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). As a result, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

  When the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, the “end interval time” is stored in the special symbol accessory action timer, and then the special electric accessory action status is “finished” as various setting processes at the end of the round game. “Processing (04H)” (04H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). The above “end interval time” is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and defines the section where the ending effect is performed. Refers to the time span.

  Then, a “big hit end command” for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the process exits the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process and proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG. . This “hit end command” includes information that can specify the gaming state after the end of the big hit game (for example, the current big hit type, the gaming state at the time of the big hit (the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and / or Information regarding internal game state information), and is also used when determining the effect mode after the big hit game on the effect control unit 24 side. Therefore, this “hit end command” has a role as a game state designation command for designating a game state since it can specify a game state after the end of the big hit game in addition to the role of instructing the start of the ending effect. Yes. The effect control unit 24 determines the effect mode based on the information included in the jackpot end command, so that the game state after the end of the jackpot can be matched with the effect mode related to the game state. It has become.

  The jackpot end command may be a single command or a plurality of commands. In the case of a plurality of commands, for example, information that can identify the current jackpot type is included in one jackpot end command, and the game state at the time of winning the current jackpot can be specified in another jackpot end command Information can be included and these commands can be transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Further, not only the above-mentioned jackpot end command but also when a plurality of types of information are included in the effect control command and transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the information is included in a single effect control command and the effect control unit 24. The above-mentioned single effect control command is divided into an effect control command including one information and an effect control command including other information among a plurality of types of information. May be in the form of a command that is shared by a plurality of effect control commands.

(11-5. Big hit end processing: FIG. 18)
Next, the big hit end process (S509) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit end process.

  In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the above-described end interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined whether or not the end interval time has elapsed in the determination process of step S591. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S591: NO), the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (the end interval time has elapsed) (step S591: YES), the value of each transition state buffer is stored in each state flag as part of various settings at the time of jackpot end ( Step S592). Specifically, each value of the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process in step S411 (see step S411 in FIG. 12, see FIG. 14 showing the details) during the special symbol variation start process is used as the game state. To specify the utility power open extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, It is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number, the variation pattern allocation designation number 2, the special symbol variation count counter, the special symbol variation count 2 counter, and the special symbol variation count 2 counter, respectively. Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit game is designated.

  Subsequently, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are performed (step S593). Here, as various data used during the big hit game control processing, the condition device operation flag, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, the continuous number counter, the maximum number of rounds (the specified number of rounds), the normal electric goods open extension state buffer Normal symbol short transition buffer, normal symbol probability transition buffer, special symbol short transition buffer, special symbol transition transition buffer, special symbol short counter buffer, special symbol variable counter buffer, variation pattern allocation specification number 1 buffer, change pattern allocation designation number 2 buffer, special figure change count 1 counter buffer, special figure change count 2 counter buffer, round display LED number, and game state judgment number (YJ) are cleared respectively (00H is stored) , Switch the operation status of the special electric accessory to “Starting process (00H)” Store 00H to the electric won game action status).

  Note that the special symbol determination data is used for final display on the special symbol display device until the symbol variation display game is started after the big hit game, so it is not a clear target in the process of step S593. . This special symbol determination data is stored in the RAM 203 (special symbol) when the special symbol creation process (step S410 in FIG. 15) during the special symbol variation start process is performed after the current big hit game is finished. There is no problem because the determination data storage area) is overwritten. In this way, the amount of program required to clear the special symbol determination data at the end of the big hit game can be reduced. Of course, if necessary due to processing, the special symbol determination data is cleared in the processing of step S593, and when the new special symbol determination data is generated, the generated special symbol determination data is stored in the RAM 203. You may store in (special symbol determination data storage area).

  Each transition state buffer may be configured not to clear the value of each transition state buffer in the process of step S593. In this case, after the current big hit game ends, when the game state transition preparation process of step S411 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 15 is performed, a process of overwriting the new transition state buffer value may be performed. This is because each transition state buffer is only used in the process of step S592. In this way, the amount of program required to clear each transition state buffer at the end of the big hit game can be reduced.

  Next, a game state notification information update process for updating the game state notification information is performed (step S594). In the present embodiment, in order to notify whether or not it is in the special figure short time state by the gaming state notification LED, in the game state notification information update process, the special symbol short time state flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) or in the OFF state. (≠ 5AH) is confirmed, and in the case of the ON state, 01H is stored in the gaming state notification LED output number for designating the special state short time state as data for lighting the gaming state notification LED.

  When the jackpot ending process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed. After exiting the big hit end process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<12: Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 19 to 26>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 26, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the side of the production control unit 24 mainly includes predetermined main processing (production control side main processing: FIG. 19) and timer interruption processing (production control side timer interruption processing: 21).

<13. Production control side main processing: FIG. 19>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the main process (effect control side main process) on the effect control unit side. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 19 when the gaming machine main body is turned on from the outside.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S071). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, moving object starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of CPU internal register values including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process in step S71 is completed, the main loop process in steps S073 to S078 is performed every predetermined time as a process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is repeated.

  In the process of step S072, the CPU 241 refers to the counter value for main loop update period and determines whether or not the main loop update period that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 21) during an effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until this main loop update period arrives (step S72: NO), various effect lottery random numbers are updated (step S079: various effect soft random number update processing).

  When the main loop update period has arrived (step S072: YES), the CPU 241 performs a received command analysis process (step S073). In this received command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read and the effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command is read. I do. This effect control command includes the already described hold addition command, hold subtraction command, variation pattern designation command, decorative symbol designation command, variation stop command, and the like.

  For example, when at least a variation pattern designation command is received and stored in the reception buffer, one or more types of effects are generated based on information (variation pattern information and winning category information) included in the command in the command analysis process Determine the pattern. The effect pattern determined here works as a “part effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario. Next, determine the time schedule for how and at what timing the production pattern (parts production) determined above will appear, and compose the production scenario. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Various production patterns (part production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing an “production scenario” in a broad sense.

  When the received command analysis process in step S073 is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, the time within the variation period (decoration symbol variation period) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is within the same period as the variation period (special symbol variation period) in which the special symbol is variably displayed. On this axis, a time schedule for what kind of production pattern is made to appear in the production means with what time width is managed by this timer. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an LED data update process (step S075) and an effect agent control data update process (step S077) which will be described later. Here, this production scenario timer is monitored, and when the production time of one production comes, the sound data for the speaker 46 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243, respectively. . The LED data for the light display device is created by an LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by an after-mentioned effect actor control data update process (step 077). The

  Next, LED data update processing is performed (step S075). In this LED data update process, LED data for a light display device such as a decorative lamp unit 45 or an LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 21) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, sound output processing is performed (step S076). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S074 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

  Next, a production accessory control data update process is performed (step S077). In the effect accessory control data update process, control data of the movable object accessory motor 61 is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in a director action operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 21) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, noise countermeasure management processing for monitoring malfunction of the sound source LSI or the like is performed (step S078). If the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer expires and the CPU is automatically reset to recover from the runaway state. Thereby, the main loop process is terminated, and the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is performed until the next main loop update period comes.

<14. Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 20>
Next, a command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing on the effect control side. This command reception interrupt process is executed with higher priority than an effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) described later when an effect control command is received from the main control unit 20.

  First, when an interruption based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs during execution of the main process shown in FIG. The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S082), and the saved register contents are restored (step S083). Thereby, the command reception interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the effect control unit side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until an interrupt based on the next strobe signal is generated. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, this command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

<15. Production control timer interrupt processing: FIG. 21>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the timer interrupt process on the production control side will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the effect control-side timer interrupt process. This production control side timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1 ms) from the CTC, and is executed by interruption during execution of the production control side main process.

  In FIG. 21, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S091), and then performs an effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, whether or not an operation (ON operation) detection signal is input from the frame effect button 13 is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. To store. This information is used for the button notice effect.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S074) in the effect control side main process of FIG. 19, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Thus, image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. Thereby, the image production along the production scenario is realized.

  Next, directing action operation management is performed (step S094). In this stage actor operation management, a control signal is output to the movable body accessory motor 61 through the drive control unit based on the motor control data for the movable body accessory created in the stage actor control data update process (step S077). To do. Thereby, the visual production | presentation by the movable body accessory along a production | presentation scenario is implement | achieved.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S095). In this effect LED management, based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075), the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and blinked through the light display control unit. Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, a main loop update process for managing the main loop update period is performed (step S096). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by increment processing, for example.

  After the processing of steps S091 to S096 is completed, the saved register contents are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interruption process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Contents of Received Command Analysis Process: FIGS. 22 to 26>
FIGS. 22 to 26 show processes closely related to the present invention among the processes executed in the received command analysis process (step S073 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, a case where a “winning command”, a “variation pattern designation command”, a “hit end command” and a “decorative symbol designation command” are received will be described.

<16. Command reception process when winning: FIG. 22>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a winning command is received. The winning command handled here is an effect control command transmitted in step S321 of the special figure 1 start opening check process of FIG. 10 or in step S341 of the special figure 2 start opening check process of FIG.

  In FIG. 22, when receiving the winning command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the contents of the winning command and acquires prefetch determination result information (step S710). Here, the acquired information is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 203. In the pre-read information storage area, the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2) as in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 A pre-read information storage area corresponding to the side). In addition, these pre-read information storage areas are provided with a hold 1 pre-read information storage area to a hold n pre-read information storage area (in this embodiment, n = 4) corresponding to the number of active hold balls. Prefetch determination result information for the number of balls can be stored.

  Although not shown, since the pending addition command transmitted in steps S321 and S341 (FIGS. 10 and 11) has already been received and stored, the content of the pending addition command is analyzed and the number of pending balls is also obtained. Obtain (step S711).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a prefetch prohibition period (step 712). In the period in which prefetching should be prohibited, the remaining number in the first half of the ST is less than 4 (ST71 to 77th rotation) and the remaining number in the second half of the ST is 7 to 1 (ST81 to 84th rotation). If a pre-reading notice effect occurs during a specific effect mode related to these sections, there is a possibility that a contradiction or a sense of incongruity may be brought about between the effect in the specific effect mode and the pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, while the game state stays in these sections, it is configured to bypass the pre-reading notice lottery process, and there is no inconsistency or discomfort between the effect made under the specific effect mode and the pre-reading effect notice. Like that. That is, if it is a prefetch prohibition period (step S712: YES), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S719 described later.

  When it is not the prefetch prohibition period (step S712: NO), the process proceeds to step S713, and it is determined whether or not the “continuous notice counter” is zero (step S713). The “continuous notice counter” is a counter for setting a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of the pre-read notice effect. Specifically, when the current operation-holding ball is set as the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect by the pre-reading notice lottery in step S714 described below (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the current operation-holding ball is digested. This is a counter for preventing the newly generated operation holding ball from being subject to execution of the pre-reading effect until it is subjected to the variable display operation. In the “continuous notice counter”, the current value of the number N of active suspension balls is stored for the reason described above (see step S717 described later).

  If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S713: NO), it is determined that the prefetch notice lottery is prohibited, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

(16-1. Prefetching effect lottery processing: S714 to S715)
If the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step S713: YES), prefetch notice lottery processing is performed assuming that the prefetch notice lottery is permitted (step S714). This pre-reading effect lottery process determines whether to perform the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading variation pattern type specified by the winning command as a result of pre-reading the variation pattern type to be determined at the start of variation. Is. The “winning command” in the present embodiment is a form that includes information relating to each of the look-ahead variation pattern type and the special symbol type. Therefore, the information regarding the prefetch variation pattern type among these pieces of information is used for the lottery opportunity of the prefetch effect lottery. However, when the information regarding the number of pending movement balls, the look-ahead variation pattern type, and the special symbol type is carried in the hold addition command, the control command including the information regarding the look-ahead variation pattern type in the form is received. The pre-reading effect lottery will be performed.

  Here, there are two types of “prefetching notice effects”. One is a multiple-time design of a winning change system or a starting change system notice effect that occurs when a starting ball is won at the starting port and the starting condition is satisfied (that is, when the winning condition or the starting condition is satisfied). It is a pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) by executing it in a variable display game (multiple symbol change display operations), and in this embodiment, the notice effect of the hold display change system (appearance of color change hold) is continued. In other words, this is a pre-reading notice effect performed by shifting the display position. The other is a pre-reading notice effect by displaying a change start notice effect that occurs when the symbol change display game is executed (that is, at the start of change) across multiple symbol change display games. (Continuous notice effect), and in the present embodiment, it is a continuous notice effect performed by continuing the notice display effect (lightning appearance) of the image display change system. Therefore, the lottery for the pre-reading notice effect includes a lottery for determining whether or not to perform a change-based notice effect at the start of fluctuation, and a lottery for determining whether or not to perform a notice-based effect for changing type at the start of change. Do it independently. However, when lottery of both is performed together (a form in which the pre-reading notice effect and the change notice notice effect at the start of change are related to one lottery result) and winning the lottery of the pre-reading notice effect, It may be configured to win a lottery for a notice effect of change system at the start of change.

  In the prefetching effect lottery process, a prefetching notice effect is determined by referring to a prefetching effect lottery table (not shown) based on the prefetching variation pattern type specified by the winning command (step S714), and the result of the prefetching effect lottery Effect information (information related to the prefetch effect lottery result) is set (prefetching advance notice operation status setting process: step S715). This effect information is used when a prefetch notice effect appears. The effect information set here includes (i) information for designating a pre-reading notice effect of change system at the time of winning, for example, information related to a hold display (designating a hold display mode by a hold color or an icon image) ( ii) Information specifying both the above-mentioned (i) winning change announcement effect and the following (iii) change start change announcement effect, and (iii) specifying the change start change announcement effect Information (for example, type of lightning production (strong lightning production (high expectation of winning), medium lightning production (medium of expectation of winning), weak lightning production (low expectation of winning))), (iv) pre-reading production lottery Non-winning information (information indicating that the pre-reading notice effect of the change system at the time of winning is not executed) is included.

  In the case of this example, when only the pre-reading notice effect of the winning change system in (i) is performed, the pre-reading operation status is set to “01H”, and both the winning change system and the change start changing system in (ii) If the pre-reading notice status is to be performed, “02H” is set as the pre-reading action status, and if only the pre-reading notice effect of the change start at the above (iii) is performed, “03H” is set as the pre-reading action status. If any of the pre-reading notice effects is not executed, “00H” is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 (step S715).

  When the prefetch effect lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S716, and the prefetch determination operation status is determined. If the pre-reading operation status is “00H” (step S716: = 00H), the pre-reading notice effect is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

  On the other hand, when the pre-reading operation status is other than “00H” (step S716: ≠ 00H), the current value of the number of reserved balls (1 to 4 or 1 to 8) is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S717). . As a result, the pre-reading notice lottery for a new operation holding ball is prohibited for a certain period. Note that this counter value is decremented by one each time the old action holding ball generated previously is digested in the decorative symbol designation command receiving process of FIG. 25 described later.

  By setting the value of the number of reserved balls existing when winning the pre-reading effect lottery as described above to the “continuous notice counter” (step S717), during the number of symbol fluctuations corresponding to the value of the number of reserved balls, Even if a new winning ball is generated, a lottery for a pre-reading notice effect is prohibited (step S713: NO route). For example, when the current number of reserved balls is three, lottery of the pre-reading notice effect is prohibited during the three symbol changes corresponding to the number of reserved balls, thereby preventing the occurrence of the pre-reading notice effect. The “continuous notice counter” described above can also be used as information related to the pre-fetch notice winning. In other words, if the “continuous notice counter” is zero, it is determined that the pre-reading notice is not selected (pre-reading notice non-execution state), and if the value is other than zero, it is determined that the pre-reading notice is selected (pre-reading notice execution state). it can.

  When the process proceeds to step S718, a process of setting a continuous notice effect scenario that does not include the results of the prefetch notice lottery process, the prefetch notice operation status setting process, and the continuous notice counter setting process is performed (step S718).

  When the processing proceeds to step S719, hold addition display processing is performed (step S719). In the hold addition display process, a liquid crystal control command (liquid crystal side hold ball number information command) including the operation hold ball number information is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit side. Thereby, the number of icon images corresponding to the number of reserved balls is lit on the liquid crystal display screen. The command transmission of the number of reserved balls is transmitted for all of the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2.

  Further, in the process of step S719, in addition to the liquid crystal-side reserved ball number information command, the production information is confirmed, and the liquid crystal control including, for example, information related to the hold display (information specifying the hold display mode) as the information related to the pre-reading notice effect. A command (liquid crystal side prefetch information command) is also transmitted. Therefore, if the pre-reading notice lottery regarding whether or not to implement the pre-change notice effect of the winning change system (the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display changing system) is won, it is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit in step S718. Based on the liquid crystal side pre-read information command, the liquid crystal control side as the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display change system, the hold display mode related to the hold memory won this time (hold icon: “white” in normal times when the winning expectation per win is low ) For a dedicated display color (for example, “blue”, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “D pattern” or “rainbow”) Or, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen so as to be in a special on-hold display mode using a special icon different from normal.

  Thus, for example, if there is a third holding memory that has been won this time, the third holding memory, that is, the icon of the game running hold K is placed on the icon of the seat M as shown in FIG. Until the symbol variation display game (design variation display operation) is used, the special on-hold display mode can appear continuously. In other words, in this process, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, when receiving the winning command, the “dedicated hold display (for example, white, blue) , Yellow, green, red, D-pattern, or rainbow-colored hold display) ”is performed, and the presentation control process (dedicated hold display process) is performed, and the pre-reading notice lottery is not won An effect control process (normal hold display process) for controlling the appearance of the normal hold display is performed (see FIGS. 5 and 6). In the present embodiment, it has been described that the liquid crystal side reserved ball number information command and the liquid crystal side prefetch information command are transmitted (a plurality of commands are transmitted). A liquid crystal control command including information on the number of balls and information on the hold display may be transmitted.

  Further, in the process of step S719, as part of the pre-reading notice effect, that is, as an effect accompanying the reserved color change notice effect, for example, a sound effect (special sound effect) using a special sound that is different from a normal sound and / or light using special light is used. An effect scenario (special hold effect scenario) for controlling the appearance including the effect (special light effect) is set. Thus, for example, if the current on-hold storage is the third one, the special game-holding K is placed on the icon of the seat M until it is used for the symbol variation display game. The pre-reading notice effect can be displayed by the sound effect and the special light effect. In addition, during the period until the reserved memory is used for the symbol variation display game (for example, when the held display is a shift display (at the time of holding shift) or when a new reserved memory is generated), Special light effects can be displayed.

  In addition, the hold color and the icon image of the hold display can be changed (hold display change effect) during the period until the hold memory is used for the symbol variation display game. Specifically, in the middle of the hold shift, the hold color (the color element display mode of the hold display) can be changed to the hold color having a higher winning expectation. For example, when the winning color is displayed in normal “white”, but the held display is shifted, the reserved color with a higher win expectation than that (for example, blue, yellow, green, red) , D pattern, etc.). In such a configuration, even when the reserved color is white at the time of winning, that is, when the pre-reading notice effect of the changing system at the time of winning is not shown, the reserved memory is used in the period until the symbol change display game is used. In the period until the reserved color changes, that is, the pre-reading notice effect of change system at the time of winning, or the reserved memory is used for the symbol variation display game, the expected winning expectation degree is more clearly notified. Means that you can. In this way, the pre-reading notice effect mode (direction scenario) of the winning change system in which the holding color changes in the middle is displayed as it is during the period until the holding memory is used for the symbol variation display game. As compared with the pre-reading notice effect such as being continued, the effect modes are more diverse and the variation of the effect can be made richer. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the reserved color at the time of winning a prize may change to a reserved color having a higher winning expectation level, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the process of step S719, although not shown in the drawing, it is confirmed whether or not the hold special effect effect information is included, that is, whether or not the hold special effect is being executed, and the hold special effect is being executed. If not, set a scenario for a normal reserved winning tone. As a result, a new on-hold memory is generated, and when the on-hold special effect is not being executed at this time, a normal on-hold winning sound is generated instead of the special winning sound. Thereafter, the command receiving process at the time of winning is exited. On the other hand, when the production information of the hold special effect is included, the hold special effect is being executed. In this case, the sound effect related to the pre-reading notice effect is generated based on the scenario of the special hold effect. Therefore, nothing is done here, and the command receiving process at the time of winning is left as it is.

(16-2. Hold sound production)
In the present embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won when the on-hold storage occurs (at the time of winning), a sound production (sound effect) mode different from normal (when the pre-reading notice is not won), for example, a winning sound (special winning sound) To inform that the pre-reading notice lottery has been won. Here, if the winning sound in the normal time (when the pre-reading notice is not selected) is “normal winning sound” and the winning sound in the case of winning the pre-reading notice lottery is “first special winning sound”, the color display mode of the hold display ( If the hold color at the time of winning the prize is “white” as a hold-indication change-type look-ahead notice effect), a “normal winning sound (normal sound effect)” will be generated, and any of “blue, yellow, green, red” If it is, the “first special winning sound (first special sound effect)” different from the normal winning sound is generated. Further, when the reserved color at the time of winning a prize is “D pattern color”, the “second special winning sound (second special sound effect)”, which is different from the first special winning sound, is a unique sound, that is, a special special for D pattern. A sound (D-pattern exclusive sound) is generated (see the hold change notice effect a in FIG. 51).

  Further, regarding the D pattern dedicated sound production, when the color element display mode of the hold display changes from white, blue, yellow, green, or red to “D pattern color” during the hold shift, In this case, “D pattern dedicated as a sound production mode (second special prize sound) different from the sound production mode (first special prize sound) when a reserved color change occurs in any of blue, yellow, green, and red Thus, the player can audibly know the occurrence of the D symbol (D pattern hold display) even if he / she has not seen the display area of the pre-reading notice effect. it can.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice lottery about whether or not to implement the pre-reading notice effect (lightning effect) of the change system at the start of change is won, when the reserved memory is sequentially digested, the symbol change display game is executed. In the continuous notice effect processing described later (step S743 in FIG. 25 and step S753 in FIG. 26), a lightning effect-presenting process is executed. Will appear.

  Further, in the process of step S719, although not shown in the drawing, it is confirmed whether or not the hold special effect effect information is included, that is, whether or not the hold special effect is being executed, and the hold special effect is being executed. If not, set a scenario for a normal reserved winning tone. As a result, a new on-hold memory is generated, and when the on-hold special effect is not being executed at this time, a normal on-hold winning sound is generated instead of the special winning sound. Thereafter, the command receiving process at the time of winning is exited. On the other hand, when the production information of the hold special effect is included, the hold special effect is being executed. In this case, the sound effect related to the pre-reading notice effect is generated based on the scenario of the special hold effect. Therefore, nothing is done here, and the command receiving process at the time of winning is left as it is.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, the pre-reading notice effect for a new hold is prohibited. Therefore, if the “prefetch prohibition counter” is zero, the hold special effect is not being executed. If it is determined that it is not zero, it may be determined that the hold special effect is being executed. Further, when the pre-reading notice effect is being executed (the hold special effect is being executed), the above-mentioned normal hold winning sound is not generated, but the winning sound itself is not generated when the hold memory is generated, or when the hold occurs It is possible to generate only a winning light effect (a normal winning light effect or a special light effect) at the time of occurrence of a hold without generating a winning sound.

(17. Effect mode setting process at the end of hitting: FIG. 23)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a hit end command is received. The jackpot end command is an effect control command transmitted in the jackpot end process during the special electric utility management process.

  In FIG. 23, when the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the winning end command, it first analyzes the content of the command (step S721), and the current winning information as the content and the gaming state information at the time of winning. Based on the above, the effect mode to be shifted after the winning game is set (step S722: effect mode setting process at the end of winning).

(18. Fluctuation pattern designation command reception processing: FIG. 24)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a variation pattern designation command is received. This variation pattern designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S412 of the special symbol variation pattern creation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 24, when receiving the variation pattern designation command, the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the content of the command (step S731), acquires the variation pattern information of the special symbol as the content, and the RAM 243. In the predetermined area (step S732). The effect scenario during the symbol variation display game is not yet determined at this point, and is determined when the decorative symbol designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received. That is, an effect scenario in the symbol variation display game (decoration symbol variation display game) is determined based on the variation pattern information stored here and information (special symbol determination data information) included in the ornament symbol designation command. It has become.

<19. Decoration symbol designation command reception processing: Fig. 25>
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a decorative design designation command is received. This decoration symbol designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S415 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. Here, based on the variation pattern information obtained by the variation pattern designation command reception processing of FIG. 24 and the information obtained by the decoration symbol designation command, effects (various notice effects) and decoration symbols in the symbol variation display game are displayed. Display modes (temporary stop symbols, reach symbols, stop decoration symbols, etc.), a notice effect by a movable object, etc. are determined, and an effect scenario relating to the current variable display game is configured. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 side transmits a hold subtraction command, a variation pattern designation command, and a decoration symbol designation command to the effect control unit 24 in this order (step S404 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 12, When the final decoration designating command is received, the production control unit 24 performs reception processing of the decorative design designation command in FIG.

  In FIG. 25, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the contents of the decorative symbol designation command and acquires the contents (step S740).

  Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S741). In this decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process, the left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol (decoration) to be finally stopped based on the variation pattern information obtained in step S732 and the winning type information included in the decorative symbol designation command The symbol stop symbol combination) is determined by lottery. For example, when the content of the variation pattern is a hit variation pattern designated for reach production and the winning type information is 15R long open probability variable big hit, the stop display mode of the decorative symbol related to the 15R long open probability variable big hit should be determined. First, the left symbol is determined by lottery, then the left symbol and the decorative symbol that can be reached are determined as the right symbol (reach symbol determination), and the left symbol and the right symbol are determined based on the right symbol. , The middle symbol is determined so that the decorative symbol sequence (hit symbol) related to the 15R long open probability variation jackpot is finally stopped. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol variation display game is completed is determined. The determined decorative symbol data is stored and used in the decorative symbol data storage area of the RAM 243.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S742, and it is determined whether or not the prefetch operation status set in step S715 of FIG. 22 is “00H: No prefetch notice effect is executed” (step S742). When the pre-reading operation status is not “00H”, that is, “01H: execute only hold pre-reading notice”, “02H: execute both hold pre-reading notice and background (lightning) pre-reading notice”, “03H: execute only background (lightning) pre-reading notice ”, The process proceeds to step S743, and a continuous notice effect process is performed (step S743).

  In the pre-reading notice effect process (step S743), an effect process is performed for causing the “variation start change system” continuous notice effect to appear in the current symbol change display game. Here, when the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is won in the pre-reading effect lottery process in step S714 (FIG. 22) (the pre-reading operation status is “02H” or “003”), a dedicated notice image ( Lightning effect production data by display of lightning (simulating lightning) is created and stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Thereby, the lightning effect by the lightning image display appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (see FIG. 6B).

(19-1. Continuous notice effect processing: FIG. 26)
FIG. 26 shows the details of the continuous notice effect processing. Referring to FIG. 26, in this continuous notice effect processing, first, a pre-reading operation status is acquired and its content is determined (step S751). If the pre-reading operation status is neither “02H” nor “03H” (step S751: ≠ 02H, 03H), the continuous notice effect processing is exited without doing anything.

  When the pre-reading operation status is “02H” or “03H” (step S751: = 02H, 03H), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step S752). If the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step S752 = YES), the continuous notice effect process is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the value of the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S752 = NO), since the lightning continuous notice effect is executed, the process proceeds to step S753 and the lightning effect presence effect process is executed (step S753). In this lightning effect-presenting process, a lightning-continuous notice effect is executed according to the continuous notice effect scenario set in step S718. For example, if a continuous notice effect scenario expresses the lightning intensity level, one lightning effect is selected from multiple types of lightning effects including a lightning effect of a lightning strike, a lightning effect of a lightning strike, and a lightning effect of a lightning strike. In the case of the continuous notice effect scenario determined by lottery, the determined lightning effect is displayed according to the continuous notice effect scenario.

  This lightning effect has an attribute used for making it possible to distinguish and generate a plurality of types of lightning effects. Lightning display patterns such as lightning pattern, lightning intensity, and lightning color elements (white, blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern color) characterize the lightning image. It becomes one of the characteristic attributes. To determine what kind of lightning effect type has to be generated, refer to, for example, a “lightning effect selection table (not shown)” associated with a look-ahead variation pattern when setting a continuous notice effect scenario in the process of step S718. To be determined. In this lightning effect selection table, the selection rate of the lightning effect type is determined so that the expectation level for winning a big hit tends to be high due to the relationship “lightning lightning <medium lightning <strong lightning”.

  In the background prefetching notice setting process, the same value as the value of the continuous counter is set as the number of executions of the background prefetching notice effect (the value of the continuous counter is stored in the background notice execution counter), and the prefetch operation status is switched to “00H”. As a result, when it is determined that the background pre-reading notice effect is to be executed when the one hold addition command is received, the background pre-reading notice setting process is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the oldest action-holding ball generated first. When another subsequent hold addition command is received, this background prefetching notice setting process is not performed unless the continuous notice counter is zero and the prefetching operation status is “02H”. In other words, in the present embodiment, unless the operation holding ball that is the target of the prefetching notice effect is digested, a new prefetching notice effect is not generated, and the generation of duplicate prefetching notice effects is prohibited.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S754, where 1 is subtracted from the continuous notice counter as the digestion of the current operation-reserved ball (step S754), and the value of the continuous notice counter after subtraction is checked (step S755). If the value of the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S755: NO), since the continuous notice has not ended, the process of step S756 is skipped and the continuous notice effect process is exited. Thereafter, when the predetermined number of reserved balls are consumed and the value of the continuous notice counter reaches zero (step S755: YES), the process proceeds to step S756, and the prefetch operation status is set to “00H” where the prefetch notice effect is not performed. Return (step S756), this continuous notice effect processing is exited.

  This “variation start change system” continuous notice effect is executed until the “continuous notice counter” counter reaches zero, and the value of this “continuous notice counter” is shown in FIG. 26 every time the symbol variation display game is performed. In S754, 1 is subtracted. For example, if the pre-reading notice lottery winning hold is the third hold, when entering the processing of FIG. 26, the counter value of the continuous notice counter is set with the number of held balls N = 3, and “N = 3”. It has become. The continuous notice will be performed until all the three reserved memories are consumed.

(Modification)
However, the symbol variation display game in which the hold memory that triggered the occurrence of the continuous notice effect is placed on the seat M as the hold K during the game execution is a game in which the result of the prefetch notice effect appears, and the symbol variation display In games, it is no longer necessary to present a pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, the following form may be adopted. Up to “N-1th”, which is just before the value of the continuous notice counter reaches N = 3, that is, the symbol variation display game up to the first and second reserved memories when the third held The lightning effect is developed in the first to second symbol variation display game that is the subject of the notice effect. Then, when the N-th hold is digested (the state where the game-in-progress hold K is placed on the seat M in FIG. 5), the process skips the continuous notice effect processing (FIG. 26) and proceeds from step S743 to step S744. In this embodiment, the process proceeds to the process of S745, and an effect corresponding to the variation pattern is generated in the same effect notification process as in the case of the normal symbol variation display game in which the pre-reading continuous notification is not generated. Under this form, the first to second on-hold game is a predictive symbol variation display game, and the third symbol variation display game on hold has a symbol variation display game about reserved memory (this book) Fluctuation). In this case, when the continuous notice effect processing in step S753 is completed, the continuous notice counter is decremented by 1 (step S754), and as a result, the value of the continuous notice counter is N−1. (Step S755 = YES), the prefetch operation status is set back to “00H” (step S756).

(19-2. Expected advance notice lottery process: steps S744 to S745 in FIG. 25)
Returning to FIG. 25, an expected advance notice lottery process is then performed (steps S744 to S745). In this lottery process, a notice effect (expected notice effect) to be displayed is determined by lottery based on the current effect mode and the contents of the variation pattern.

  First, in the process of step S744, referring to a branch lottery table by effect mode (not shown), a notice effect lottery table designation table (see FIG. 43 described later) is determined based on the current effect mode and the variation pattern (see FIG. 43 described later). Production mode branch lottery processing: Step S744).

(T-5: notice effect lottery table designation table: FIG. 43)
FIG. 43 shows a notice effect lottery table designation table (G_TBLA to G_TBLE) selected by the branch lottery table classified by effect mode.

  In the notice effect lottery table designation table of this embodiment, an expected notice effect type to be a lottery target is determined. More specifically, for example, in the notice effect lottery table designation table “G_TBLA”, a notice effect lottery table (pre-notice effect 1_TBL) for determining a notice effect (effect numbers 1 to 5: see FIG. 44) belonging to the previous notice effect 1 is shown. ) And a notice effect lottery table (pre-notice effect 5_TBL) for determining a notice effect (effect numbers 21 to 25: see FIG. 44) belonging to the previous notice effect 5 is defined. Note that the notice effect lottery table designation tables “G_TBLC” to “G_TBLF” can be selected in the case of the reach variation pattern type, and these notice effect lottery table designation tables are notified after they appear during the reach effect. The effect type is included as a lottery target (see the column of G_TBLC to G_TBLF in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the notice effect lottery table designation tables “G_TBLA” and “G_TBLB” can be selected in the case of the normal variation pattern type, and these notice effect lottery table designation tables are displayed after reaching the reach effect. The notice effect type is excluded as a lottery target (see columns of G_TBLA and G_TBLB in FIG. 43).

(T-6: Notice effect lottery table)
In the above notice effect lottery table (pre-notice effect 1_TBL to previous notice effect 5_TBL, rear notice effect 1_TBL to later notice effect 2_TBL: not shown), the contents of the variation pattern and the notice effect are defined in association with each other. Specifically, based on the contents of the variation pattern and a predetermined effect random number (notice effect determination random number), a plurality of types of notification effects belonging to one or more types of expected notification effect types (see FIGS. 44 and 45). One of the notice effects is decided by lottery. Although not shown, in the notice effect lottery table, notice effects (effect numbers 1 to 35) belonging to each expected notice effect type (pre-notice effects 1 to 5 and subsequent notice effects 1-2) are shown in FIG. The selection rate (appearance rate) is determined according to each variation pattern so as to achieve the winning winning expectation shown in FIG. In addition, the range in which the rank of the winning winning expectation degree of the notice effect belonging to each expected notice effect type shown in FIG. 44 to FIG. In the range), the selection rate of each notice effect may be changed, and the winning expectation degree may be changed.

(When the notice effect lottery table designation table “G_TBLA” is selected)
Returning to the description of the processing of step S745 again, the CPU 241 refers to the notice effect lottery table specified by the notice effect lottery table designation table, and determines the notice effect to appear during the current symbol variation display game by lottery. I will do it. Specifically, for example, when the notice effect lottery table designation table “G_TBLA” is selected, the notice effect lottery tables designated thereby are “preliminary notice effect 1_TBL” and “preliminary notice effect 5_TBL”. First, the CPU 241 refers to the “preliminary notice effect 1_TBL” and determines one of a plurality of types of notice effects (effect numbers 1 to 5) belonging to the previous notice effect 1 by lottery. Then, when the lottery based on the “preliminary notice effect 1_TBL” is finished, the lottery based on the “preliminary notice effect 5_TBL” is not performed immediately, and the high-reliability notice effect suppressing process in step S746 to the effect information setting process in step S747 are executed. Then, it is determined whether or not all the notice lottery processes specified by the notice effect lottery table designation table this time have been completed (step S748). Here, since the lottery process based on the “preliminary notice effect 5_TBL” has not yet been executed, the determination result in step S748 is “NO”, and the notice effect lottery process in step S745 is executed again.

  When entering the notice effect lottery process in step S745 again, the CPU 241 then executes a lottery process based on the “preliminary notice effect 5_TBL”, and includes a plurality of types of notice effects (effect numbers 1 to 10) belonging to the previous notice effect 2. Decide one out from home. This completes the notice lottery when the notice effect lottery table designation table “G_TBLA” is selected. Next, the processing from step S746 (high reliability advance notice suppressing process) to S747 (effect information setting process) is executed again to determine whether or not all the notice lotteries have ended (step S748). At this time, when the determination process of step S748 is passed, since all the lotteries related to the notice effect have been completed, the determination result is “YES”, and the effect scenario setting process of step S749 described later is executed.

  In the case where the above-mentioned notice effect lottery table designation table “G_TBLA” is selected, lottery by a total of two kinds of notice effect lottery tables is sequentially performed, and any of the effect numbers 1 to 5 belonging to the previous notice effect 1 is selected as the notice effect. , And any one of the production numbers 21 to 25 belonging to the previous notice production 5 will appear during the symbol variation display game. However, depending on the type of variation pattern, it may be a lottery subject for the notice effect, but the selection rate is 0%, that is, the selection is not included. For example, in the “preliminary notice effect 1_TBL”, a specific image having a rainbow color element is displayed as a notice effect (premium effect) for notifying the winning of a big hit, “background rainbow color wisteria pattern character (rainbow color) notice In the case of adding “effect” as an option, if the change pattern is a normal change pattern in the “previous notice effect 1_TBL”, the selection rate of the background iridescent wisteria pattern character (rainbow color) notice effect is set to “0%”. (The same applies to the previous notice effects 2 to 4 and the subsequent notice effects 1 to 2).

  The same processing procedure is used when another notice effect lottery table designation table is selected. For example, when the notice effect lottery table designation table “G_TBLE” is selected, the notice effect lottery table designated by this is “the previous notice effect 2_TBL, the previous notice effect 3_TBL, the previous notice effect 5_TBL, and the later notice effect 1_TBL, and This is “post-notice effect 2”, and lottery based on these five types of notice effect lottery tables is sequentially performed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery order based on the notice effect lottery table designation table is from the top to the bottom of the figure. For example, when the notice effect lottery table designation table “G_TBLA” is selected, when the notice effect lottery table designation table “G_TBLD” is selected in the order of “previous notice effect 1_TBL → previous notice effect 5_TBL”, The lottery process related to the notice effect is performed in the order of the effect 1_TBL → the previous notice effect 4_TBL → the previous notice effect 5_TBL → the later notice effect 1_TBL → the later notice effect 2_TBL (for other notice effect lottery table designation tables). The same).

  The above-described lottery order is the same as the start timing order for each expected notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lottery order may be different between the one notice effect lottery table designation table and the other notice effect lottery table designation table while maintaining the relationship narrowed down to the side, and the order may be changed as appropriate. can do.

(19-3. High reliability notice effect suppression processing)
In FIG. 25, when the notice effect lottery process of step S745 is completed, a highly reliable notice effect suppressing process is then performed (step S746). In this highly reliable notice effect suppressing process, when a highly reliable notice effect (for example, a notice effect relating to the D symbol) is determined in the notice effect lottery process in step S745, the highly reliable notice effect of the D symbol is determined. The number of appearances is limited to a predetermined number or less (here, 2 or less), and it is determined whether or not the high-reliability notice effect is to be displayed. Therefore, when the notice effect drawn in the process of step S745 corresponds to the highly reliable notice effect, the number of highly reliable notice effects is counted by the “suppression counter”.

  When the effect information setting process in step S747 is completed, it is determined whether or not all the lottery processes based on the notice effect lottery table specified in the notice effect lottery table designation table have been completed (step S748). If all the notice effect lottery processes have not been completed (step S748: NO), the process returns to step S745, and the lottery process based on the remaining notice effect lottery tables is performed.

(19-4. Production information setting process)
When the high-reliability notice effect suppressing process in step S746 is completed, an effect information setting process is then performed (step S747). In this effect information setting process, the suppression counter is cleared, and the effect information related to the notice effect determined through steps S744 to S746 is set. Here, effect information (for example, information that can specify the type of the determined notice effect) that is necessary when an effect scenario is constructed in the effect scenario setting process in step S749 described later is set.

(19-5. Production scenario setting process)
On the other hand, when all the notice effect lottery processes are completed (step S748: YES), an effect scenario setting process is then performed (step S749).

  In the effect scenario setting process of step S749, based on the effect information, an effect effect scenario to be displayed in the current decorative symbol variation display game is constructed. Each notice effect has a predetermined timing in the symbol variation display game and a period (effect time width) in which the effect appears. The notice effect determined through steps S744 to S746 and the current change This decorative symbol variation display game based on the contents of the pattern (variation time, presence / absence of reach production, type if there is reach production, presence / absence of pseudo-ream, number of pseudo-reams if there is pseudo-ream) Production scenarios for various performances to be developed are built. The effect scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243.

  In addition, when accompanied by a pseudo-ream, a notice effect related to the main change is determined, and a notice effect related to the pseudo change is determined based on the notice effect. That is, when performing pseudo-variation, the effect mode related to the notice effect in this change is determined as the notice effect at the time of pseudo-change. Then, by displaying these determined notice effects, corresponding notice effects are realized during the pseudo change and the main change of the symbol change display game.

  In the effect scenario setting process, various setting processes required to start the decorative symbol variation display game are also performed, including a hold display control process related to the hold display of the operation hold ball. In the hold display control process, the hold display data storage area (hold 2 display data storage area, hold 3) corresponding to the hold display data n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) as the decorative symbol variation effect is started. Display data storage area and hold 4 display data storage area) are overwritten on the hold display data storage area corresponding to 'n-1', respectively, and an empty area is provided in the hold 4 display data storage area. . Since the hold display effect data is not stored in the hold display data storage area which is an empty area, in this case, the hold display effect is not performed, and the corresponding display location is displayed as an unlit state. As a result, the CPU 241 refers to the on-hold display effect data stored in the on-hold display data storage area, and performs an effect display in which the position of the existing on-hold display unit is shifted to the old storage position as a whole. At the start of the decorative symbol variation display game, the hold display expressing the state where the operation hold ball is digested is performed.

  When the effect scenario setting process of step S749 is completed, the decoration symbol designation command receiving process is exited, and thereafter, the decoration symbol variation display game based on the effect scenario is started.

(19-6. Advance notice effect by moving object: FIGS. 38 to 40, FIG. 40A)
With reference to FIG. 38 to FIG. 40 and FIG. 40A, one aspect of the effect process for determining the notice effect according to the present embodiment will be described. Here, as one of the notice effects, an effect process when a specific notice effect (a “moving object effect” by the second movable object 90) is displayed by the movable object when the winning combination is won. Will be described representatively. In addition, about the effect process which determines the other notice effect including the notice effect in case of losing, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted suitably in order to avoid duplication description.

  FIG. 38 shows an accessory movement effect lottery table A for “15R probability variation big hit”, FIG. 39 shows an accessory movement effect lottery table B for “10R probability variation big hit”, and FIG. Table C is shown. FIG. 40A shows an accessory movement effect lottery table D for “losing”. These accessory movement effect lottery tables A to C are effect lottery tables that define one or more types of effect modes related to the hit variation pattern designation command, and the accessory movement effect lottery table D is related to the loss variation pattern designation command. It is an effect lottery table that defines one or more types of effect modes. In the case of the present embodiment, by selecting any one of these accessory movement effect lottery tables A to D, the “basic effect pattern” of the accessory movement effect is determined, and based on this, “Detailed effect patterns (effect patterns to be displayed in the current symbol variation display game)” are determined in the accessory action mode lottery table including the hierarchical processes of FIGS. 41 to 42 described later. Here, the “basic effect pattern” is referred to as “detailed effect pattern (displayed in the current symbol variation display game) in the accessory action mode lottery table composed of the hierarchical processes of FIGS. This is because the production pattern) is determined.

  38 to 40, in the “actual object movement effect lottery tables A to C”, in relation to each variation pattern designation command (variation pattern type), in any effect section, an accessory movement effect (details will be described later). However, in the present embodiment, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display an accessory movement effect by the second movable object accessory). Specifically, in the production section of any one of “reaching title”, “in SP reach”, and “after symbol temporary stop (during symbol temporary stop state)”, which are the degree of production progress (kind of action timing) It is determined by lottery whether or not to display an accessory movement effect. Further, when “None” in the figure is selected, it is determined that the accessory movement effect is not displayed (the same applies to the accessory movement effect lottery table at the time of losing in FIG. 40A). Further, as shown in the figure, the selection rate of the accessory action timing type is determined to be different depending on the winning type (winning type) even if the variation pattern type is the same.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, if the variation pattern types are the same, the effect mode (in this case, the accessory moving effect accessory by the second movable object accessory) The operation timing type) is common to each hit type, but the selection rate of the production mode differs depending on the hit type. As a result, it is possible to bring about a change in the appearance rate of the production between the case where one win is won and the other win. This means that, as a result, the appearance mode that appears can be made different depending on the hit type.

  If it is decided to generate an accessory movement effect in this accessory movement effect lottery table, “detailed effect pattern”, which is a “detailed effect pattern” in the effect lottery tables of FIGS. The operation mode of the movable body accessory "and" specific generation timing "are determined, and the accessory movement effect mode to appear in the current symbol variation display game is determined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the effect lottery tables of FIGS. 38 to 40 and FIG. 40A, in the case of a specific reach type having a “SP reach” timing as an accessory action timing type (SP reach) Type and / or reach type during ST), and the appearance rate of the accessory movement effect in the “reach title” in which the appearance timing precedes in time series is set to a low probability (in this embodiment, zero (not selected)). The appearance rate of the accessory movement effect “at the time of SP reach” and “after the temporary stop of the symbol” that appear later than that is set at a higher probability than that. The reason for this is as follows.

  For example, when the SP reach appears, the effect is such that the effect of “reach title” → “SP reach (during ST reach)” → “design temporary stop” occurs in time series, but “reach title” “SP reach” that occurs later, that is, reach production, is usually provided with a relatively long production range (for example, about 60 seconds to 180 seconds) in order to raise the player's expectation of winning. The content is directed to greatly enhance the player's winning expectation. However, the appearance rate of the “moving reach” title is assigned with a high probability, and the appearance rate of the “moving reach” or “after temporary stop” is assigned with a lower probability. If there is no action movement effect during “Reach Title”, the expectation of winning will be reduced by itself, and the contents of “SP Reach” will be developed after “Reach Title” There is a risk that the player will not be able to greatly win the player's expectation of winning. In addition, the “design temporary stop state” after the end of the reach effect is an effect section in which the game result is derived and displayed. Therefore, if the losing display mode is derived in the “design temporary stop state”, the player recognizes that the current symbol variation display game result is losing, and is disappointed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the accessory movement effect is set at a high probability in “SP reach” and “after symbol temporary stop” that appear later than “during reach title”. In addition, in the relationship between “SP reach” and “after temporary stop of symbol”, only in the case of winning, there is an impact that has an impact among the movement mode types of the movable body accessory after “after temporary stop of symbol”. A movement effect is made to appear ("both" is made to appear among movable body combination operation mode types of a second movable body accessory 90 described later). As a result, when the reach effect is revealed, the symbol movement display game is finished, leaving the possibility of the effect moving effect appearing even in the “design temporary stop state” where the game result can be derived and displayed. Until then, the player's sense of winning can be sustained. In particular, in the case of winning, after temporarily displaying the “lost display mode” during the temporary stop state of the symbol, the decorative symbol display mode is changed from the lost display mode to the hit display mode, and there is an impacting object. A movement effect is made to appear, so that the final game result is derived and displayed. Such a production mode (resurrection production) can be expected to have a high production effect that strikes the player's intention. Note that the “special reach” is a reach effect that can notify the jackpot winning when it appears, so there is little need to present an accessory movement effect. For this reason, the selection rate of “none” is 100%.

  In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, during normal times, the SP reach type having a relatively high expectation of winning winning is more useful for “after symbol temporary stop” than “in SP reach”. The appearance rate of the object movement effect is set high. This is because a reach production with a relatively high level of expectation of winning wins shows a production mode with high resurrection. This is because the player who is amazed by the above-mentioned revival effect has a higher degree of wonder and can expect a higher effect that strikes the player's intention. On the other hand, during the ST, contrary to the normal, the ST move reach type with a relatively high winning expectation expectation produces an effect moving effect “after the symbol temporary stop” rather than “SP reach”. Probability is set low. This is because the probability of winning the win is high during the ST, so that the player's winning expectation is higher than the normal reach when the reach effect occurs during the ST. In the case of an ST reach type with a relatively low expected expectation, the player will be more surprised if the revival effect appears in the “post-design temporary stop” followed by the appearance timing. It is possible.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, when the variation pattern type is the SP reach type (in the case of the variation patterns A3 to A12 and A14 to A17), the selection rates of “none” and “medium reach title” are zero (selected) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and “None” and / or “In Reach Title” are selected with a predetermined probability in all SP reach types or in a specific SP reach type. Can be determined.

  As a case where any one of the above-mentioned accessory movement effect lottery tables A to C is selected, as a result of winning a big hit during normal times, a route determined by referring to the normal middle hit fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. As a result of winning a big hit during the ST game mode of the first half of ST or the second half of ST, there is a route determined by referring to the ST middle fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. In any case, the route is selected based on at least the information obtained by the variation pattern information obtained by the variation pattern designation command (in this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command).

(19-6-1. In case of big hit during normal)
When a big win is won during normal times, the target fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the normal middle hit fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. In this case, when the jackpot won in normal time is the 15R probability variable jackpot with the highest profit, the variation pattern distribution table “FB1” is selected based on the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. A target variation pattern is selected based on “FB1”. When the 10R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit is selected, the common variation pattern table “FB2” is selected for both, and the target variation pattern is selected based on this “FB2” (the variation pattern designation in FIG. 33). (See column of distribution number “00H” (normally), see FIG. 34). That is, when the profit is a relatively small bonus, the common variation pattern table “FB2” is selected. This means that, when winning 10R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit having a relatively small profit, one hit variation pattern is selected from “exactly the same” per variation pattern type. Therefore, if no processing is performed, when winning 10R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit, one hit variation pattern will be selected from “exactly the same” variation pattern type. In determining the contents of the performance, it is impossible to estimate the winning type (here, the winning jackpot type).

  Here, for convenience of explanation, if the hit fluctuation pattern selected in the normal middle hit fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. 34 is “normal middle SP reach A (fluctuation pattern designation command: A103H)”, the main control unit 20 side From this, this variation pattern designation command “A103H” and the winning type information by the decorative symbol designation command are transmitted. On the side of the effect control unit 24, the current variation pattern and the winning type are grasped by the changing pattern specifying command “A103H” and the decorative symbol specifying command for specifying the winning type.

  Here, if the decorative symbol designation command of this time is the decorative symbol designation command “B505H or B605H” that designates “10R probability variation big hit” (see FIG. 32), the effect control unit 24 side will display the symbol variation display game of this time. In this case, “normally SP reach A and 10R probability variation big hit” is grasped, and the corresponding production is selected with reference to the accessory movement production lottery table B (10R probability variation big hit) in FIG. Similarly, if the decorative symbol designation command this time is the decorative symbol designation command “B506H or B606H” that designates “4R probability variation big hit” (see FIG. 32), the effect control unit 24 side will display the symbol variation display game this time. In this case, “normal SP reach A and 4R probability variation big hit” is grasped, and the corresponding production is selected with reference to the accessory movement production lottery table C (4R probability variation big hit) in FIG. In this way, even when a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern distribution table “FB2” common to the 10R probability variation big hit and the 4R probability variation big hit, “10R probability variation big hit” or “4R probability variation big hit” Depending on which one of them is assigned to another corresponding accessory movement effect lottery table B or C.

  That is, even if the winning type is different on the main control unit 20 side, the “variation pattern is selected using the common variation pattern distribution table (in this example,“ FB2 ”), and the production control unit 24 side The effect is selected including the winning type grasped from the decorative symbol designation command. For this reason, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the common variation pattern distribution table (in this example, “FB2”), but for the effect, an effect corresponding to the winning type can appear. For example, as shown in FIG. 38 to FIG. 40, among the big hit types, the higher the profit type is the big hit type, the higher the proportion of the effect moving effect that appears in “SP reach”. In addition, the rate at which the accessory movement effect appears in “after the temporary stop of the symbol” followed by the appearance timing is set low. Therefore, since the selection rate of the generation timing type of the accessory movement effect differs depending on the winning type, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by giving the player an inference element for estimating the winning type from the standpoint of the effect. The effect that it can be produced. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, on the main control unit 20 side, the operational effect that the control burden when selecting the variation pattern can be reduced, specifically, the variation pattern distribution table is “10R probability variation big hit” and “ Combined with “4R probability variation big hit”, the effect of reducing the ROM capacity by that amount can be obtained. Furthermore, while using a common variation pattern distribution table, 10R probability variation big hit and 4R probability variation Different effects can appear depending on the big hit, so that the effect of enriching the effect types can be obtained without obstructing the way to enrich the effects.

(19-6-2. Big hit during ST)
When a big win is won during the ST, the target variation pattern is determined with reference to the ST variation pattern distribution table in FIG. Here, paying attention to the “first half of ST (refer to the column of fluctuation pattern designation distribution number“ 01H ”)” in the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. The variation pattern distribution table “FB3” is selected for all of the big hits, and the target variation pattern is selected based on this “FB3” (the variation pattern designation distribution number “FIG. 33”). “01H” (first half of ST), see FIG. 36). Also, focusing on “second half of ST (refer to the column of fluctuation pattern designation distribution number“ 02H ”)” in the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. For each big hit, a different variation pattern distribution table “FB4”, “FB5”, “FB6” is selected, and based on any one of the variation pattern distribution tables “FB4” to “FB6” A variation pattern is selected (see the column of variation pattern designation assignment number “02H” (second half of ST) in FIG. 33, FIG. 36).

  Therefore, in the first half of ST, when the hit is 15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, the common variation pattern table “FB3” is selected. The relationship in the latter half of ST is the same as when winning 10R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot, which is relatively less profitable in normal times, and one hit variation pattern is selected from among “exactly the same” variation pattern types. Will be. If no processing is performed, if a big win is won in the second half of ST, it is impossible to estimate the type of the big hit that was won.

  However, this inconvenience in the first half of the ST is also eliminated in the same way as in the case of winning the 10R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit during the above-mentioned normal. That is, a variation pattern is selected using a variation pattern type “FB3” common to all jackpots. On the side of the effect control unit 24, “B504H, B505H, or B605H” when the decorative symbol designation command is the special symbol 1 is used. , Or “B604H, B605H, or B606H” in the case of special symbol 2 (see FIG. 32), the winning type is ascertained, and depending on the winning jackpot, FIG. 38 to FIG. Forty performance lottery tables are selected, and an effect corresponding to the winning jackpot appears.

  For this reason, while selecting the variation pattern in the first half of the ST using the common variation pattern distribution table (in this example, “FB3”), it is possible to produce an effect corresponding to the winning type. it can. In addition, since an effect according to the winning type appears, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by giving a guessing element for estimating the winning type from the effect to the player. Therefore, on the main control unit 20 side, the variation pattern distribution table is used for both the 15R probability variation jackpot, the 10R probability variation jackpot, and the 4R probability variation jackpot, and there is an effect that the ROM capacity can be reduced by that amount. Furthermore, with regard to production, while using a common variation pattern distribution table, different productions can appear for 15R probability variation big hits, 10R probability variation big hits, and 4R probability variation big hits. In addition, it is possible to obtain an effect that the production types can be enriched.

<Modification 1>
In the present embodiment, for the effects that are executed in relation to the variation pattern type (variation pattern designation command), if the variation pattern type is the same, the common aspect in each hit type is a lottery target, Although the selection rate differs depending on the hit type, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be configured as follows (Modification 1).

  For the effects executed in relation to the variation pattern type (variation pattern designation command), if the variation pattern type is the same, the hit and other hits (or all hit types may be used) It is possible to determine that at least a part (all or a part) of the production mode to be a lottery object is a different production mode.

  Specifically, with respect to the effects executed in relation to all of the variation pattern types or one or more variation pattern types of a plurality of variation variation types that can be selected at the time of a hit, Depending on the case and the other wins, it is possible to configure different rendering modes as the lottery targets. For convenience of explanation, typically, the “moving material effect drawing lottery table A” in FIG. 38 referred to in the case of 15R probability variation big hit and the “actual material moving effect in FIG. 39 referred to in the case of 10R probability variation big hit. This will be described with reference to “lottery table B”.

  In the above embodiment (first embodiment), as shown in the figure, in the accessory movement effect lottery table A and the accessory movement effect lottery table B, “in SP reach” and “after symbol temporary stop (design temporary stop) It is determined by lottery whether or not the same accessory movement effect (in the above embodiment, the movable object effect by the second movable object accessory 90) appears in any one of the effect sections. However, in this modification, it is configured such that whether or not to display different accessory movement effects in the accessory movement effect lottery table A and the accessory movement effect lottery table B is determined by lottery. be able to. That is, even if it is the same variation pattern type, it can be set as the structure which can appear a different production | presentation aspect according to the hit type.

  Specifically, in the case of the accessory movement effect lottery table A, for example, in the “SP reach” and / or “after temporary stop of symbol”, the second movable object 90 and the second object as the accessory movement effect. It is possible to make a lottery as to whether or not the “movable body effect by the combined operation” by the 3 movable body accessories (the rotating lamp 62) is displayed. For example, with respect to the accessory movement effect lottery table A, “in SP reach” is an effect mode that is executed in relation to all or part of the variation patterns A1 to A17 (for example, variation patterns A9 to A12). And / or it can be configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not the “movable body effect by the combined operation” appears in the effect section “after the temporary stop of the symbol”.

  Further, in the case of the accessory movement effect lottery table A, for example, “1 during SP reach” and “2 during SP reach” are provided as the operation timing types of objects to be selected, and “1 during SP reach” is selected. In such a case, as the accessory movement effect, the same movable object effect by the second movable object accessory 90 as in the above embodiment is displayed, and when “SP reach 2” is selected, It can be configured to display a movable body effect by an action. In this case, for “2 during SP reach”, an accessory action timing type that does not exist in the accessory movement effect lottery table B is a lottery target. In this modified example, even with the same variation pattern type, the rendering mode itself that is the lottery target itself can be different depending on the winning type (winning type). As a result, it is possible to define an effect mode that can appear in the case of one hit type but does not appear in the case of another hit type.

  In the case described above, in the accessory movement effect lottery table A, it is possible to define “movable body effect (specific effect mode) by composite operation” that does not exist in the accessory movement effect lottery table B. As a result, for example, when a “movable body effect by composite operation” appears, in other words, when an accessory movement effect that does not appear at the time of 10R probable big hit, an effect mode is generated. Therefore, it becomes possible to notify that the 15R probability change big hit has been won, and the variation of the production can be enriched, and the fun of the game can be improved. In addition, although the said accessory movement effect lottery table A was demonstrated above, it can be set as the same structure also about another accessory movement effect lottery table.

<Modification 2>
As another modified example (modified example 2), a plurality of types of accessory movement effect lottery tables corresponding to one hit type can be provided. Specifically, the accessory movement effect lottery table described in the first modification (in the above, a modification of the accessory movement effect lottery table A) and the accessory movement effect lottery table (the first embodiment) ( 38 can be configured so that any one of the accessory movement effect lottery tables can be selected by a predetermined lottery (effect lottery table selection lottery). For example, when a 15R probability variable big win is won, one of the two types of effect lottery tables, the accessory movement effect lottery table A described in the above modification and the accessory move effect lottery table A shown in FIG. The production lottery table can be selected. The lottery probability can be determined as appropriate.

  In the configuration of the second modification, when the accessory movement effect lottery table A of FIG. 38 is selected, the movable object effect (specific effect mode) by the above-described combined operation is not displayed, and the accessory A player can be provided with an inference element for guessing the hit type from the appearance rate of the movement effect, and on the other hand, when the accessory movement effect lottery table A of the above modification is selected, the movable body by the combined operation Depending on the selected effect lottery table, an effect may appear, and if a movable object effect due to this combined action appears, a winning decision can be notified at 15R probability variation big hit. Different effects can be achieved. Even with the same variation pattern type, different production modes appear according to the selected production lottery table, so that variations in production can be made rich.

  In the first and second modifications, the movable body effect has been described. However, the present invention can also be applied to the effect control of the sound effect, the light effect, and the image display effect.

  This embodiment can be configured as follows. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Game control means (main control unit 20) for comprehensively controlling game operation processing related to the progress of the game;
A symbol display means (liquid crystal display device 36) for executing a stunning symbol variation display game accompanied by a game symbol variation display operation and deriving and displaying a display result;
Production control means (production control unit 24) for comprehensively controlling the production operation processing related to the production including the variation display operation of the game symbol with respect to the design display means,
After a specific display result is derived and displayed on the symbol display means, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous manner for the player,
The game control means includes
Based on predetermined execution conditions, lottery means (S311 to S314 in FIG. 10, S331 to 334 in FIG. 11, S409 and S410 in FIG. 12) for performing a lottery for multiple types of hits,
With respect to a variation pattern related to a variation display operation of the game symbol executed in relation to a lottery result by the lottery means, one or a plurality of types of hit variation patterns corresponding to the case where the winning is lottered by the lottery means A hit variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 34 and 36), and a shift variation pattern distribution table (FIG. 35, FIG. 35) that defines one or a plurality of types of loss change patterns corresponding to the case where the winning means is not selected. 37), a plurality of types of variation pattern distribution tables including
One of the plurality of types of variation pattern distribution table is determined, and a variation pattern determination means (FIG. 12) determines the variation pattern based on the determined variation pattern distribution table. S412, FIG. 14, FIG. 33, FIG. 34 to FIG. 37), and
The production control means includes
A hit effect selection table in which one or more types of effects related to the hit variation pattern are defined for the effects (effect mode) executed in relation to the change pattern determined by the change pattern determining means (FIGS. 38 to 38). 40) and a plurality of types of effect selection tables (FIG. 40A) that define one or more types of effects related to the loss variation pattern,
An effect mode determining means (FIG. 25) for determining an effect selection table from among the plurality of types of effect selection tables and determining an effect based on the determined effect selection table;
Effect execution control means (FIGS. 19, 21, and 25) for executing and controlling the effect determined by the effect mode determining means,
The variation pattern determining means includes
When at least the first hit (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) of the plurality of types of lotteries is drawn by lottery by the lottery means and when the second hit is lottery (for example, 4R probability variation big hit) It is configured to determine a common hit variation pattern distribution table (for example, columns of variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) = 00H (normal), 01H (first half of ST) in FIG. 33))
The production mode determining means includes
When the first winning or the second winning is drawn by lottery by the lottery means, the winning effect selection table corresponding to each of the first winning and the second winning, A gaming machine A, which is configured to determine an effect selection table corresponding to a lottery win (FIGS. 39 to 40).

  In the gaming machine A, the winning effect selection table (for example, FIG. 39) corresponding to the first winning and the winning effect selection table (for example, FIG. 40) corresponding to the second winning are the effects. A common effect can be determined (selected) for the same hit variation pattern by the mode determining means, and the ratio (selection rate) at which the effect is determined (selected) can be determined to be different (for example, FIG. 39 and (See the column of fluctuation pattern A3 (normal SP reach A) in FIG. 40). In this configuration, it is possible to determine a common effect for the same hit variation pattern (selection target), and only the ratio (selection rate) at which the effect is determined (selected) is different. Design becomes easy, and the burden of rendering control processing can be reduced without impeding the degree of freedom of rendering variations.

(19-6-3. Movement mode lottery of movable object (first layer): FIG. 41)
The effect patterns determined in FIGS. 38 to 40 are basic effect patterns (major divisions of occurrence timing of accessory movement effects), and detailed effect patterns (detailed divisions of occurrence timing of accessory movement effects) are These are determined through the effect lottery tables of FIGS. Here, according to the effect lottery tables of FIG. 41 to FIG. 42, not only the specific generation timing of the accessory movement effect, but also the operation mode of the movable object related to the accessory movement effect, as the accessory movement effect mode, The specific generation timing is determined.

  Specifically, the effect pattern determined in FIGS. 38 to 40 is a process for determining a basic effect pattern (first hierarchical process), and FIGS. 41 to 42 are for determining a detailed effect pattern. (In this embodiment, the second hierarchy process (FIG. 41) and the third hierarchy process (FIG. 42) for determining a detailed effect pattern) are executed in order from the first hierarchy. One or a plurality of types of effect random numbers (for example, a first effect random number for the first layer, a second effect random number for the second layer, and a third effect random number). The third production random number) is used to determine the operation mode (FIG. 41) and the specific generation timing (FIG. 42) of the movable accessory relating to the accessory movement production, Production pattern (of the movable object that should appear in this design variation display game Out pattern) is adapted to be determined.

  FIG. 41 shows a lottery table of operation mode types (movable body combination operation mode types) of the second movable body accessory 90. The movable body combination operation mode type of the second movable body accessory 90 includes a combination of a drop movement of the first movable body 91 located above and a protruding movement of the second movable body 92 located on the right side. , “Up”, “Right”, “Up → Right”, “Right → Up”, “Both”. First, the operation mode type of the second movable body accessory 90 will be described.

  FIG. 41 shows the operation of the two movable bodies constituting the second movable body accessory (flower-type accessory) 90, that is, the first movable body 91 (with the flower crown A2 disposed around the flower heart A1) and the second. It shows about the combination (movable body combination operation | movement aspect) of the operation | movement of the movable body 92 (what made the heel B1 and the stem B2 movable to the left-right direction) (refer FIG. 2).

  In the movable body combination operation mode type shown in FIG. 41, the “upper” shown in the figure is an operation mode in which the first movable body 91 (flower heart A1 and flower crown A2) positioned on the upper side facing the liquid crystal screen operates (falls and moves) alone. Show.

  “Right” in the figure shows an operation mode in which the second movable body 92 (the ridge B1 and the stem B2) positioned on the right side facing the liquid crystal screen operates independently (projects and moves in a direction approaching the center of the liquid crystal screen).

  In “Up → Right”, the first movable body 91 (flower heart A1 and corolla A2) moves first (falls and moves along the stem B2), and then the second movable body 92 (萼 B1 and stem B2) moves. An operation mode is shown in which the operation (projecting and moving to the center of the liquid crystal screen integrally with the flower core A1 and the flower crown A2 of the first movable body 91) is shown.

  On the “right → up”, the second movable body 92 (the heel B1 and the stem B2) operates first (projects and moves toward the center of the liquid crystal screen), and then the first movable body 91 (the flower heart A1 and the flower crown A2) operates. An operation mode of (falling and moving along the stem B2) is shown.

  “Both” means the operation of the first movable body 91 (flower heart A1 and corolla A2) (falling movement along the stem B2) and the operation of the second movable body 92 (萼 B1 and stem B2) (the center side of the liquid crystal screen). An operation mode in which the operation of projecting and moving) occurs simultaneously. This “both” operation mode is a movable body effect that has more impact than the above “up” “right” “up → right” “right → up” operation mode.

  Of the movable body combination mode types of the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 described above, “Up”, “Right”, “Up → Right”, and “Right → Up” are the production timing types “Reach Title Medium”. And “during SP reach (during ST reach)” are subject to lottery and occur at a predetermined winning ratio shown in the table of FIG.

  In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, in the above “reach title”, the selection rate (occurrence rate) of the “upper” movable body alone is the highest at 50%, and then the “right” movable body. The selection rate of the single operation is 40%, and the selection rate of the movable body composite operation of “up → right” and “right → up” is decreasing in order of 5%. That is, the generation ratio decreases in the order of “up”, “right”, “up → right”, or “right → up”. In comparison between the single operation of the movable body and the combined operation, the selection rate of the movable body combined operation of “Up → Right” and “Right → Up” is lower than that of the “Up” and “Right” movable body. ing. In addition, when the “right” and “upper” movable bodies operate independently, the “upper” movable body operates independently rather than the “right” movable body operates independently. The rate is high.

  On the other hand, in the case of “in SP reach”, that is, when the SP reach or ST reach appears, the rate of appearance of the accessory movement effect is 50% in the selection ratio of the “right → up” movable body combined action. Next, the selection rate of the “upper to right” movable body composite operation is 30%, and the selection rate of the “upper” and “right” movable body single operation is 10%. That is, the selection ratio decreases in the order of “right → upper”, “upper → right”, “right” (or “upper”). In addition, in the comparison between the single operation of the movable body and the combined operation, the selection rate of the movable body combined operation of “Up → Right” and “Right → Up” is higher than the selection rate of the “Up” and “Right” movable body single operation. Is high. In addition, in the case of a combined operation of “Up → Right” and “Right → Up” movable bodies, the “Right → Up” movable body alone operation occurs more than the “Up → Right” movable body alone operation. The ratio is high.

  Accordingly, in the example of FIG. 41, if the movable object actuates more during the SP reach that follows as the appearance timing than in the reach title that precedes the appearance timing, As for the selection rate of the movable body combined operation of “up → right” and “right → up”, it is more likely to occur during the SP reach than during the reach title. If a movable body composite operation of “→ right” or “right → up” appears, this increases the expectation of winning.

  On the other hand, as for the movable body combined operation mode “both” movable body combined operation, the selection rate in “after symbol temporary stop” is 100%, and only after “after symbol temporary stop”. It happens to be a lottery target. 41 is referred to, and the movable body combination mode type of the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 (related to the basic effect pattern determined in FIGS. 38 to 40) is referred to. Detailed classification of the timing of occurrence of movable body effect) is defined.

(19-6-4. Operation timing of movable body accessory (second layer): FIG. 42)
FIG. 42 shows that after the reach title is generated and the SP reach is generated when the movable body combination operation mode type of the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 constituting the second movable body accessory 90 is determined in FIG. The lottery table shows the timing at which the operation has elapsed since each time after the symbol temporary stop state occurs, that is, how many seconds later the operation is performed.

  Here, “in the reach title” in the column of the operation timing type shown in the figure is a column for how many seconds after the start of the reach title production, the second movable object 90 is operated, and “in the SP reach” This is a column indicating how many seconds after the start of the reach production, the second movable body accessory 90 is operated, and “after the temporary stop of the symbol” is the second movable body after the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol is started. This is a column for operating the accessory 90. Specifically, “During Reach Title” is a column indicating how many seconds after the start of reach title production the trigger (trigger) is to activate the second movable object 90, and “During SP Reach” The second time after the end of the title production period or the reach production start timing (the start timing of the reach production developed after the completion of the reach title production (for example, the start of the image display production related to the reach production)) This is a column for determining whether or not the movable object 90 is to be operated. “After temporary stop of the symbol” indicates that the second movable object 90 is operated after how many seconds from the start of the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol after the end of the reach effect. It is a column of whether or not

  As this operation timing type, in this example, as shown in FIG. 42, a total of 10 types of operation modes are defined that are divided every second from 1 second to 10 seconds later. Any one of the sections from 1 second to 10 seconds later is selected, and the movable body 1 and / or the movable body 2 operate at the selected operation timing. Which category is subject to the lottery depends on whether the stage of progress of the production (type of accessory action timing) is “During Reach Title”, “During SP Reach”, or “After Temporary Stop of Symbol”. In “reach title”, each stage (elapsed time division) from 1 second to 4 seconds later is a lottery object, and at these operation timings, the movable body 1 and / or the movable body of the second movable body accessory 90 2 may operate in the operation mode of FIG. Further, in “SP reach”, each stage (elapsed time division) after 2 seconds to 10 seconds is a lottery object, and the movable body 1 and / or the movable body of the second movable body accessory 90 at these operation timings. 2 may operate in the operation mode of FIG. Also, after “design temporary stop”, each stage (elapsed time division) from 1 second to 3 seconds later is subject to lottery, and these short-time operation timings after the design temporary stop of 1 second to 3 seconds later. In FIG. 41, the movable body 1 and / or the movable body 2 of the second movable body accessory 90 may operate in the operation mode of FIG. In the case of the present embodiment, “after temporary stop of symbol” is a lottery target only in the case of winning according to the SP reach type or the ST reach type (see FIGS. 38 to 40). As described above, in the case of winning, in the case of winning, after temporarily displaying the “lost display mode” in the symbol temporary stop state, the decorative symbol display mode is changed from the lost display mode to the hit display mode. At the same time, it is for the purpose of producing a high-impact effect that brings out the effect of moving the actors with impact, and thus displays and displays the final game result.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when handling a plurality of movable bodies,
(Α) a mode in which any one of the plurality of movable bodies operates independently;
(Β) When a plurality of movable bodies are combined to operate, one of them operates first and the other operates later,
(Γ) An “operation mode type” is defined for a combination of movable body operations such as a mode in which a plurality of movable bodies operate simultaneously (first layer processing: FIG. 41).
And, in the relationship between the operation mode type and the occurrence timing during the symbol variation display game, the reach title effect before the start of the reach effect in the symbol variation display game, the reach effect after the reach title, after the reach effect ends, The operation timing at which the movable body accessory is to be activated is determined from a predetermined timing such as after the symbol temporary stop before the confirmation display (second layer processing: FIG. 42). For this reason, compared to the case where the operation timing of the movable body accessory is fixed for one motion mode type, the variation of the appearance type and the appearance rate of the effect is abundant, and the degree of freedom of the effect is increased and a deep effect is performed. Will be able to.

  In this embodiment, the “basic effect pattern” is determined in the first hierarchy, and the “detailed effect pattern” that is the specific content is determined in the second hierarchy and thereafter. However, it can also be configured as follows. For example, a “basic effect pattern” as a major division is determined in the first hierarchy, and in the second hierarchy, a higher-order effect pattern type (for example, “left” in FIG. 'Right' and 'Right' are grouped as 'variation pattern types of the same system'. The “second basic effect pattern” type and the like are determined, and in the third hierarchy, if the effect pattern type included in the higher-level effect pattern type (for example, “first basic effect pattern” type) “Right” and “Left”) are determined, and in the fourth layer, a “detailed effect pattern” that is the operation timing of the movable object relating to the effect type determined in the third layer is determined. Hierarchy processing It is possible to use. In the case where such a hierarchical process has a wide variety of types of production patterns, the production process becomes complicated if the production process becomes complicated if the decision is made with only one type of variation pattern random number. It is effective for. In addition, compared to the case where the operation timing of the movable object is determined for one type of movement, the types of production and the variations in the appearance rate of those productions are abundant, the degree of freedom of production increases, and deep production is performed. It is also suitable in that it can be performed.

  In the above, as one of the notice effects at the time of winning, the explanation processing representatively determining the notice effect (moving material moving effect) by the movable object in the case of winning has been explained, but other movable object effects Of course, the same effect process can be performed for the notice effect (for example, light effect, sound effect, image display effect, etc.) by other effect means. In addition, although the effect lottery table related to the win is described above, the effect operation corresponding to the case of the lose can be realized by the effect lottery table (for example, FIG. 40A) related to the lose as well in the case of the lose. .

Second Embodiment: FIGS. 46 to 47A and 47B
In the first embodiment described above, the color element restriction (first color element restriction) of the notice effect is provided in the case where a plurality of notice effects are generated during one symbol variation display game. That is, when the previous notice effect 3 is used, the effect numbers 12 to 15 (yellow, green, red, D pattern) are used, and when the previous notice effect 4 is used, the effect numbers 17 to 20 ( One notification effect type is selected from four types (yellow, green, red, D pattern) and used. The number of types of the four types of preliminary announcement effects (the range of options) is the five types of preliminary announcement effects (white, yellow, green, red, D, etc.) with the previous preliminary announcements 1-2 having the current timing before that as an option. There is one less relationship. For this reason, for the player who knows in advance that the color elements are narrowed from five types including “white” to four types not including “white”, the previous notice effect 1 is followed by the previous notice effect 1. It is possible to speculate that the winning expectation level has been increased only by the existence of the fact that the event has occurred. Similarly, the same relationship is regulated between the previous notice effects 3, 4 and the later notice effect 1, and between the later notice effect 1 and the later notice effect 2. Therefore, it is regulated that the number of the notice effect types (the range of options) decreases as the appearance timing is later, and the notice effect types are shifted to the high expectation side (first color element regulation). For a player who knows this in advance, the fact that the post-notice effect 1 or the post-notice effect 1 and the post-notice effect 2 have occurred in succession after the pre-notice effect 3 or the pre-notice effect 4 It is possible to guess that the winning expectation level has increased more than just the presence.

  However, the present invention is not limited to the case where a plurality of notice effects are generated during one symbol variation display game. A color element restriction (second color element restriction) of the notice effect can be provided between the pre-read notice effect of the hold display change system and the notice effect during the symbol variation display game.

  46 to 47A show an embodiment in which the second color element restriction is provided. 46. The numbers “a” to “e” of the on-hold change notice effect in FIG. 46 deal with “the pre-read notice notice effect on the hold display change system (change system at the time of winning)” preceded by the appearance timing in time series. , Yellow, green, red, D pattern ”are handled. In other words, except for the case of a rainbow color in which the big hit is fixed, the six colors of “white, blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern” are selected as the reserved color changes in the pre-reading notice of the winning change system. On the other hand, the prior notice effects 1 and 2 in FIG. 46 exclude “white” having the lowest expected expectation of these, and “yellow, green, red, D pattern” having a higher expectation than that. Only four types are defined as selectable ranges. This is a color element restriction between the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display change system and the notice effect during the symbol variation display game, and corresponds to the second color element restriction.

  A player who knows in advance that the color element has been narrowed from five types including “white” to four types not including “white” by this second color element regulation is pre-read for the pending display change system. In addition to the occurrence of the notice effect, it is possible to infer that the winning expectation level is further increased only by the presence of the fact that the previous notice effect 1 or 2 has occurred. That is, when the hold color in the pre-reading notice effect is “red” and the previous notice effect 1 or 2 is “yellow character notice”, the color element is changed from “red” to “yellow” as before. Rather than thinking that the winning expectation was lowered because it changed, the fact that the previous notice effect 1 or 2 occurred in addition to the reserved color change occurred without being distracted by such downgrading of the color element Therefore, it can be judged that the degree of expectation for winning has increased, and the tension of self can be maintained.

  In FIG. 46, between the previous notice effects 1, 2 and the previous notice effects 3, 4, the previous notice effects 3, 4 from the four types (yellow, green, red, D pattern) of the previous notice effects 1, 2 are used. Then, the color element type of the notice effect is reduced to three types (green, red, and D pattern), and the first color element regulation described above is provided. 47A, in the post-notice effect 1 and the post-notice effect 2, the post-notice effect 1 has two types of color elements (red, D pattern) and the post-notice effect 2 has one type (D Pattern). Therefore, between the previous notice effect 3, 4 (FIG. 46) and the later notice effect 1 (FIG. 47A), and between the later notice effect 1 (FIG. 47A) and the later notice effect 2 (FIG. 47A), There is a relationship that the first color element regulation which is a notice color element regulation in the same variation display game is provided, the number of color elements is sequentially reduced, and the notice effect type is shifted to the high expectation side. Has been built. Therefore, for a player who knows in advance the existence of this relationship (first color element regulation), the fact that the post-notice effect 1 has occurred after the pre-notice effect 3 or the pre-notice effect 4 or the pre-notice effect 3 or It is possible to infer that the winning expectation level has increased further by using only the existence of the fact that the subsequent notice effect 1 and the subsequent notice effect 2 have occurred sequentially after the previous notice effect 4 has occurred.

  In FIG. 47A described above, a relationship is established between the post-notice effect 1 and the post-notice effect 2 in which the number of color elements is sequentially reduced and the notice effect type is biased toward the high expectation side. However, as shown in FIG. 47B, it is assumed that the post-notice effect 1 and the post-notice effect 2 have the same number of color element types (here, two types of red and D patterns). Any one of these may be selected alternatively. Even under such a configuration, the second color element restriction and the first color element restriction are established in the relationship between FIG. 46 and FIG. 47B, and this relationship (second color element restriction and For a player who knows in advance the existence of the first color element regulation), the fact that the previous notice effect 1 or 2 has occurred after the pre-read notice effect (effect numbers a to e) of the hold display change system, The fact that the previous notice effect 3 or the previous notice effect 4 occurred after the previous notice effect 1 or the previous notice effect 2, or the fact that the later notice effect 1 or the subsequent notice effect 2 occurred after the previous notice effect 3 or the previous notice effect 4 In such a case, it is possible to estimate that the winning expectation level has been increased by using only the existence of the fact as a guide.

<20. Explanation of color element regulations between notice productions>
The color element restriction between the notice effects is simply described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 48 is a simplified example of the first color element restriction between the notice effects, and FIG. 49 is a simple example of the second color element restriction between the notice effects. It has become. The details of the example contents are different from the first embodiment of FIGS. 44 to 45 and the second embodiment of FIGS. 46 to 47A and 47B.

(20-1. First Color Element Regulation: FIG. 48)
In the present embodiment, including the cases of FIGS. 44 to 48, the color elements or special patterns corresponding to the winning expectation degree are displayed on the object to be displayed as the notice image (for example, the character in the case of the previous notice effect 1). Display in the display mode you have. Here, the “display mode having color elements or special patterns” is a concept including the following four modes (a) to (d).

  (A) When displaying “a part” of an object to be displayed as an image with a color element or a special pattern (for example, red or D pattern (danger pattern) is applied only to a kimono of a character image). In the present embodiment, the D pattern is handled as one of color elements comparable to white, blue, yellow, green, red, and the like. It is called “color”. However, the D pattern is a color pattern in which a black stripe is applied to the yellow of the ground and DANGER characters are arranged in the black stripe band, and strictly speaking, the pattern is divided by color. If attention is paid to the fact that the color of the D pattern color is given, the D pattern belongs to the “color element” side, and if the attention is paid to the fact that the D pattern has a pattern (pattern divided by color), “ It belongs to the “special pattern” side. Therefore, in the case of “color element or special pattern”, it may or may not include the D pattern. The “special pattern” in the case of not including the D pattern refers to the design. Is understood to be included on either side of the “color element” or “special pattern”.

  (B) When “all” of the object to be displayed as an image is displayed as a color element or special pattern (for example, red or D pattern is applied to the entire character image).

  (C) When displaying an image of “all or part of the object and its surrounding area or the entire liquid crystal screen” as a color element or a special pattern (for example, including a character image and its surrounding area or background image) The whole or the entire LCD screen is displayed in red or D pattern).

  (D) “Liquid crystal screen and related display” including “all or part of the object and its surrounding image or the entire liquid crystal screen” and “related display device outside the liquid crystal screen (frame lamp etc.)” When the “entire device” is displayed with a color element or a special pattern (for example, the entire liquid crystal screen including the character image and its background image is displayed in red or D pattern including the frame lamp of the gaming machine).

  When an object to be displayed as an image is displayed in a display mode having a color element or a special pattern corresponding to the expected winning degree, during one symbol variation display game (during one variation display operation (one variation)) At the appearance timing that precedes in time, it is displayed in one display mode selected from the display mode types of a predetermined number of color elements or special patterns that have a higher expectation than normal, and later in time At the appearance timing, two or more or most or most of the display mode types of the color element or special pattern at the preceding appearance timing are common, but at least the winning expectation degree of the display mode types at the preceding appearance timing From the display mode types of color elements or special patterns that have a small number of display mode types, so as not to include the lowest, that is, in a form that is shifted to the high reliability side, To display in-option was one of the display mode. In the present specification, this one during the symbol variation display game (during one variation) is referred to as “first color element regulation”.

  Here, there are yellow, green, red, and D pattern color element types as the display mode types having “color elements or special patterns” corresponding to the winning expectation, and in this order, that is, yellow <green <red <It is assumed that the winning expectation increases in the order of the D pattern color. However, as a whole gaming machine, the display mode type having “color element or special pattern” corresponding to the winning expectation degree is white, blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern color, rainbow color element There are types, and in this order, that is, in the order of “white <blue <yellow <green <red <D pattern color <rainbow color”, the expected winning degree is assumed to increase. Under this premise, it is assumed that the preceding appearance timing is “at the start of change”, that is, before the reach effect, and the subsequent appearance timing is “reach end stage”, that is, during the reach effect. At the start of the change (before the reach effect), the character image of “pre-notice effect 1” appears, and at the end of the reach (during the reach effect), the enlarged character cut-in image of the “post-notice effect 2” appears. Shall be issued. It should be noted that the character image of the front notice effect 1 and the enlarged character cut-in image of the back notice effect 2 are objects to be displayed as the notice image, respectively, and all or part of the display image has the above color elements or special patterns. It is assumed that it is displayed in the display mode.

  FIG. 48 exemplifies the range (number of types) of display modes of the color elements or special patterns that can be selected at the appearance timings at the start of the change (before the reach effect) and at the end of the reach (during the reach effect). It is. A character image of a ninja is displayed as “preliminary notice effect A” at the timing before the reach effect (see “cut-in at the start of change” in FIG. 48). In this case, all or part of the character image of the ninja figure is displayed with the above-described color elements or special patterns, and the display mode type is “yellow, green, Four types of “red / D pattern” are set as selectable color element types. In this example, “yellow, green, red, D pattern” belongs to the reliability notice effect, and the winning expectation increases in the order of “yellow, green, red, D pattern”. Here, “Red / D pattern” belongs to the high-reliability notice effect, and “Yellow / green” belongs to the low-reliability notice effect, but “Yellow” is the color element type with higher expectation than usual. The above is taken into consideration because, when a “yellow” notice effect is generated, it is determined that the development is more than the reach effect.

  In addition, during the reach production which is the later appearance timing than the above, the cut-in display of the ninja's eye cut-in image (character enlargement image) is displayed as “post-notice production B” (see “Leach end cut” in FIG. 48). In "). Then, three types of “green, red, and D pattern” are set as selectable color element types as the display mode types of the eye cut-in image. That is, in the case of “post-notice effect B”, the display mode of “yellow” is excluded from the range of the options, and the range of options as the color element display mode type of the eye cut-in image is set to “green / red / D pattern”. The display is set to be selected from the three types of display modes of “green, red, and D pattern” that are narrowed to the higher expectation side.

  In the above configuration, the character color elements or special patterns that can be selected in the preview image display of the previous preview effect A and the subsequent preview effect B are four types of “yellow / green / red / D pattern” and “green”.・ There are three types of red and D patterns, and in all cases, except for the display mode of “white” in the normal state, they are biased toward those with a reliability of “yellow” or higher, where the reach effect is determined. . Therefore, both the previous notice effect A and the later notice effect B are limited to display modes that are biased toward the reliability level where the reach effect or more is determined with respect to color elements (more precisely, color elements or special patterns). For this reason, a player who knows this relationship can be regarded as having a hot notice effect mode with a higher degree of expectation of winning than usual, only when the previous notice effect A or the later notice effect B occurs. .

  In addition, if the relationship is narrowed down to the display mode that is biased toward the reliability level, for example, the character color elements or special patterns that can be selected in the preview image display of the previous preview effect A and the subsequent preview effect B are displayed. There are 4 types of “yellow / green / red / D pattern” and 2 types of “green / D pattern” and 3 types of “yellow / red / D pattern” and 2 of “green / D pattern”. It may be a kind of relationship. More specifically, the color element display mode type in accordance with the winning expectation order of “green / red / D pattern” of yellow or higher compared to that of the post-notice effect A is the display mode selection target in the post-notice effect B Is not necessarily selected based on the expected expectation order, but the red color such as “green / D pattern” is not the selection target. A specific color element display mode type may be selected.

  The above-mentioned “tooth missing state (specific color missing state)” configuration is also established between the types of occurrence before reach (preliminary notice effects 1 to 4) and between the types of occurrence after reach (post-notice notice effects 1 to 2). Yes. For example, if “post-notice effect 1” and “post-notice effect 2” in FIG. 45 are described, the display mode type as a selection target is “green (petal green notice) / red (petal red) in the post notice effect 1. 3 types of “notice” and “D pattern (petal D pattern notice)”, and “red (petal red notice)” is “green (petal green notice)” and “D” pattern (petal D pattern notice). ) ". In this case, “green (petal green notice)” is a color element that is selected in common in the after notice effect 1 and the after notice effect 2, and the selection object is the after notice effect 2 than the after notice effect 1. Although it is not of the color element type that is biased toward the side where the expected expectation is relatively high, the D pattern (petal D pattern notice) is the selection object when viewed as the entire selection object in the post-notice production 2 Thus, it can be said that the post-notice effect 2 has a relationship narrowed down to the display mode that is closer to the reliability side than the post-notice effect 1. This can also be established between other advance notice effects, for example, the previous notice effect 1 and the previous notice effect 3, or between the previous notice effect 2 and the previous notice effect 4. In addition, between the notice effect types related to the second color element regulation described later (for example, three of the hold change notice effect a and the previous notice effect A, the hold change notice effect a, the previous notice effect A, and the later notice effect B) ) But it can also hold.

  In addition, between the previous notice effect A and the later notice effect B, the number of types of the notice subject to be selected is four types of “yellow, green, red, and D pattern” in the previous notice effect A, There are three types of “green, red, and D pattern” (first color element regulation). In the post-notice effect B at the subsequent appearance timing, the selection type of the character color element or the special pattern is displayed in four types of “yellow / green / red” in the previous notice effect A at the preceding appearance timing.・ Three types with the number of selection types reduced so that the “D pattern” except for the “yellow” character with the lowest winning expectation level, that is, the one with the higher expected winning expectation level remains The display mode is “green / red / D pattern”, and the character image is displayed in one display mode selected from the display modes.

  The number of selection target types is smaller in the later notice effect B than the previous notice effect A, and the “yellow” character image that may have appeared in the notice image in the previous notice effect A is the later notice effect. Since the relationship that does not appear in the preview image of B (first color element regulation) is ensured, the notice effect of the character that appears at a later timing in one symbol variation display game is the earlier timing. The object of the notice image appears in a display mode of a color element or a special design having a high expectation rather than the notice effect of the character appearing in. Therefore, when the two-stage notice of the previous notice effect A and the later notice effect B occurs, the expectation of winning the winning is higher than when only one stage of the previous notice effect A or only the latter notice effect B appears. It will be accepted as.

  In the present embodiment, the relationship of the first color element regulation is only applied to the preview images of the preceding notice effect A and the following notice effect B, but the notice effect lottery table designation in FIG. It is also possible to apply between the previous notice effects 1-5 that are supposed to appear in the table selected at the table, and between the previous notice effects 1-5 and the later notice effects 1-2. it can. Therefore, a relationship is established in which a notice effect that appears later during one symbol change occurs in a color element or a special symbol display mode that is biased toward the side where the winning expectation is higher.

  In contrast to the above, unlike the above, the object for displaying the preview image is the same among the five types of characters “white / yellow / green / red / D pattern” in both the previous notice effect A and the subsequent notice effect B. Assuming that the configuration is one selected from the above, or the configuration is alternatively selected from six types of characters of “white, blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern”, in these cases: Therefore, “white” having a low winning expectation level as usual is displayed in one display mode selected from the selection target types included in the selection range. In addition, in recent ball game machines, even in the case of a loss, there are many cases where a flashy notice effect is performed, which is inferior to that in the case of a win. Under a configuration in which characters may also appear, for example, a “green” character appears in the previous notice effect, but a “white” character appears in the later notice effect, which reduces the winning expectation Therefore, there is a tendency to give the player a cold sensation or sensibility that “the character appearance notice effect has occurred earlier but will not hit anyway”.

  However, as described above, 4 types of “yellow / green / red / special pattern (D pattern)” are selected for the front notice effect A, and 3 types “green / red / special pattern (D pattern)” are selected for the back notice effect B. If it is determined as a possible range, “the notice effect that appears later in one symbol variation display game (during one variation) occurs in a display mode of color elements or special symbols that have a higher expectation of winning winning” For a player who knows the relationship, it can be estimated that the expectation of winning the winning has increased only when the subsequent notice effect B is generated after the previous notice effect A. In the previous notice effect A, for example, a red character of “Ninja figure” appears, and in the later notice effect B, a green character cut-in image of “magnification enlargement” is displayed in advance, and the winning expectation of winning is lowered in terms of color elements. Even if it is a case, it can be estimated that the winning prediction expectation level has been increased only by the subsequent notice effect B following the previous notice effect A. For this reason, even if the rank of the winning expectation level falls due to color elements, it is possible to maintain the tension to the game, and it is possible to eliminate the tendency to give the player the cold feeling or sensitivity described above. .

  In the above, the object to be image-displayed at the preceding appearance timing and the subsequent appearance timing in one symbol variation display game are both the same character appearance notice effect, and in the previous notice effect A, for example, a green character of “Ninja figure” is displayed. It appears that a red character cut-in image of “up of eye area enlargement” is displayed in advance notice in the subsequent notice effect B. However, the object to be displayed as the notice image can have the same shape and size. For example, the preceding green character cut-in notice effect and the subsequent red character cut-in notice effect have the same face-up shape. It can also be configured to appear in However, as described in relation to the previous notice effect A and the later notice effect B, the shapes and sizes of the objects that display the notice image at the preceding appearance timing and the subsequent appearance timing may be different. . For example, the green character “Ninja” may appear in the front notice effect A, and the red character “face up” may be displayed in the cut notice notice in the rear notice effect B.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a predetermined portion of an appearing character image (for example, all or part of the character image) is displayed with color elements or special patterns has been described. However, the portion to be displayed with color elements or special patterns is not limited to all or a part of the character image, but the entire character image (the entire sky, the entire ground, etc.) or the entire rectangular area (for example, the character is displayed) It may be configured to display a rectangular or circular image area) in a special manner.

  This embodiment can be configured as follows. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Acquisition means (S311 to S314 in FIG. 10, S331 to 334 in FIG. 11) for acquiring predetermined game information due to a predetermined switch signal (a detection signal from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 35a);
Based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means, lottery means (S409, S410 in FIG. 12) for performing a winning lottery to determine whether or not to generate a winning game;
A symbol display means (liquid crystal display device 36) capable of displaying a symbol variation display game for performing a game symbol variation display operation and reflecting the lottery result;
Production control means (production control unit 24) configured to be able to control the appearance of the announcement effect (for example, the announcement effect shown in FIG. 44 to FIG. 45) for notifying the degree of expectation that the winning game will occur,
As a result of the symbol variation display game, after a specific symbol display mode is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, the gaming machine configured to generate the winning game,
The notice effects include a plurality of kinds of notice effects (for example, FIG. 44) belonging to a plurality of kinds of notice effects (for example, the previous notice effects 1 to 4 in FIG. 44 and the subsequent notice effects 1 to 2 in FIG. 45). 44 of the previous notice effects 1 and 4 and the notice effects belonging to the latter notice effects 1 and 2 in FIG. Are set differently,
Further, the plurality of types of notice effects are configured as notice image display effects including a notice effect image capable of notifying the difference in the degree of expectation according to display mode types with different colors and / or patterns,
The production control means includes
Preliminary image effect determining means (S744 to S749 in FIG. 25) for determining the notice image display effects to be displayed based on the lottery result by the lottery means for a plurality of types of the notice effect types;
About the notice image display effect determined by the notice image effect determining means, the notice image display effect at the predetermined timing belonging to the first notice effect type displayed at the predetermined timing, and the specific timing later than the predetermined timing. A plurality of types of notice effects including a notice image display effect at a specific timing belonging to the second notice effect type that appears at times are displayed on the image display means. Control unit (liquid crystal control unit)),
The number of types of the notice image display effects at the specific timing is determined to be smaller than the number of types of the notice image display effects at the predetermined timing (FIG. 48).
The display mode type of the preview effect image related to the preview image display effect at the specific timing is the same as the display mode type of the preview effect image related to the preview image display effect at the predetermined timing and the display mode having the same level of expectation. A display mode type having a relatively high expectation degree among display mode types of the preview effect image related to the preview image display effect at the predetermined timing (FIG. 48).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  For example, the “preliminary notice effects 1-2” and the previous notice effects 1-4 shown in FIG. In the relationship between the post-notice effects 1 and 2 in FIG. 45, the “pre-notice effect 1 to 4” in the relationship between the post-notice effects 1 and 2 in FIG. In relation to the notice effect B, it corresponds to “pre-notice effect A” or the like. Further, the “preliminary notice display effect at the specific timing” is, for example, “pre-precise notice effects 3-4” in the relationship between the previous notice effects 1-2 and 3-4 in FIG. 44, and the previous notice effects 1-4 in FIG. In the relationship with the post-notice effects 1-2 in FIG. 45, “post-notice effect 1-2” in the relationship between the post-notice effects 1-2 in FIG. 45, and the post-notice effects A and B in FIG. This corresponds to “post-notice effect B”.

(20-2. Second Color Element Regulation)
Relationship between the number of display types of color elements or special patterns defined between objects displayed as a notice effect at the preceding appearance timing and subsequent appearance timing during the above-described symbol variation display game (during one variation) (first) The color element regulation of “No. 2” also applies to the “second notice effect” that occurs during the symbol change display operation and the “prefetching notice effect” of the hold display change system that occurs at the time of winning in connection with this. Color element regulation ”, and the same effect can be obtained.

  In the “second color element regulation”, an object displayed as a notice image during a symbol change display game (during one change) is stored on hold before that (pre-read notice effect related to hold storage). ) Or the display based on the occurrence of the reserved storage, there are the following two forms (a) and (b).

  (B) The display mode of the hold display change performed in the pre-read notice effect of the hold display change system and the period during which the hold display change is being performed (while the hold memory whose hold display change has not been digested remains) The display mode of both color elements or special patterns between the occurrence of the reserved memory and the display mode of the object displayed in the notice effect during the symbol variation display game executed “irrelevantly” The relationship between the number of types (second color element regulation) is defined.

  (B) The display mode of the hold display change performed in the pre-read notice effect of the hold display change system and the period during which the hold memory display is being performed (while the hold memory whose hold display has changed is not digested) The display mode type of both color elements or special patterns between the display mode of the object displayed in the notice effect during the symbol variation display game executed “based” on the occurrence of the reserved memory Define the number relationship (second color element regulation).

  This will be specifically described. There is a new winning in a state where there is a pending storage 0 that is currently being digested, an unsettled pending memory 1 and a pending memory 2, a reserved memory 3 is generated, and the display mode of the reserved memory 3 is changed to “ Consider a case where the display changes to “red” (for example, as a hold display mode, the hold color is displayed as “white (normal color) white red (dedicated hold display)”). In this case, the above (A) considers the notice effect during the symbol variation display game that occurs regardless of the red color change in the reserved memory 3. That is, among the pre-reading notices of “change system at winning” and “change system at start of change” won when a new holding memory 3 is born, the “pre-winning change system” that causes a change in hold display is pre-reading notice effect. In this case, the lottery was won, but the lottery for the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation start change system” that causes a continuous notice (lightning notice) was not won. A notice effect different from the pre-reading continuous notice (lightning light notice) shows the display mode of the color element or the special pattern for the object (for example, the cut-in image of the face) displayed on the image display during the symbol variation display game, The relationship between the number of display mode types (second color element regulation) is defined between the color element or the special pattern display mode in the “notice”.

  In addition, the above (b) is not only for the above-mentioned holding memory 3 to win the pre-reading notice effect lottery of “change system at winning” and change red, but at the same time, to the pre-reading notice lottery of “change system at start of change” This is a case where a “lightning image” is generated as a continuous notice across the hold memories 1 and 2 after winning. That is, it is generated by winning the pre-reading notice lottery of the “change system at winning” out of the pre-reading notices of “changing system at winning” and “change system at start of change” won when the new hold memory 3 was born The display mode of the color element or special pattern of “hold display change” and the pre-reading advance notice lottery of “change start time change system” are won, so that the hold memories 1 and 2 are sequentially provided to the symbol change display game. The relationship between the number of display mode types (second color element regulation) is defined between the “lightning image” of the continuous notice that occurs each time and the display mode of color elements or special patterns.

  When the second color element restriction is performed, (a) the first color element restriction regarding the display mode type of the notice effect that appears during the symbol variation display game (during one variation) is performed, and this is suspended. A combination of (a) and (b) or one of them may be adopted in consideration of the relationship with the display mode type of the change look-ahead notice effect, and (b) the first color element regulation is not performed. Alternatively, it is possible to adopt a form in which only the second color element restriction in the form of (A) or (B) is implemented alone. Any of the above combinations (a) and (b) may be employed.

(20-2-1. Relationship with pending notice: Fig. 49)
Here, as an example, when the first color element restriction is performed and the second color element restriction of the form (A) is combined with this (the combination form (a)), that is, during the symbol variation display game ( The case where the notice effect that appears during (1 change) is not a lightning notice will be described.

  In the case of this example, prior to displaying the object to be displayed as an image during the symbol variation display game (during one variation) in a display mode having a “color element or special pattern” corresponding to the winning expectation degree, In other words, at a timing that precedes the symbol variation display game, a hold notice occurs, and the display mode of the hold memory changes to a “color element or special pattern” that has a higher expectation than usual. . In the “pending display change” that occurs at the preceding appearance timing, display is performed in a display mode having “color elements or special patterns” selected from among a predetermined number of “color elements or special patterns” display mode types. Target to be displayed as a subsequent notice effect image when one notice effect is generated or a plurality of notice effects are generated at different timings in the symbol variation display game that is later in time than the “hold display change” The object is performed under the second color element regulation. That is, the display mode type of the object displayed as the notice effect image is two or more or most or most in common with the display mode type of the color element or special pattern in the “hold display change”. The color element selection type of the notice effect image display object is shifted to the high reliability side so that it does not include at least the one with the lowest winning expectation level among the color element selection types. Or, it is determined in a restrictive relationship of selecting from among display forms of “special pattern”.

  FIG. 49 shows an example of the second color element restriction. In the “hold change notice effect a” (pre-read notice effect of the hold display change type) that occurs before the change, the normal “white” is shown. 5 types of “blue, yellow, green, red, and D pattern” are set to be selectable as color element types to be selected for the color elements or special patterns that change from 1 to 4. The color element is different from the first color regulation in FIG. 48 in that it also includes “blue” in which it is unknown whether or not a reach effect occurs. In addition, regarding the display mode of the color element or the special pattern of the object displayed as an image during the symbol variation display game (during one variation), the “pre-notice effect A (cut-in advance notice at the start of variation” may occur before the reach effect. In “Produce”, four types of “yellow, green, red, D pattern” are selectable color element types. In other words, “Yellow / Green / Red / D pattern”, which is the reliability announcement effect that determines the reach effect or higher, has the highest expectation of winning in the order of “Yellow / Green / Red / D pattern”. Further, in FIG. 49, in “post-notice effect B (reach end cut-in notice effect)” that can occur during the reach effect, three types of “green, red, and D pattern” are selectable color element types. .

  In this way, in any of the pending change notice effect a, the previous notice effect A, and the subsequent notice effect B, when the display mode of those color elements or special patterns changes in the effect display means, the normal “ Since only “color elements” or “special pattern” display modes that are likely to generate more than a reach effect are selected, the notice effect mode with a higher expected win rate than normal has appeared. As perceived.

  In addition, between the pending change notice effect a and the previous notice effect A, the number of types to be selected is five types “blue / yellow / green / red / D pattern” in the hold change notice effect a, and the previous notice effect In A, there are four types of “yellow, green, red, D pattern”. In other words, there are five types of “blue / yellow / green / red / D pattern” in the pending change notice effect a that appears first, but the previous notice effect A Is composed of the same selection types, but the “Blue” color element with the lowest expected winning expectation is deleted from the five selected types, and the higher the expected winning expectation is There are four types of “yellow, green, red, and D pattern” in which the number of selection types of color elements is reduced so as to be offset, and the character is cut-in displayed in one display mode selected from these . The prior notice effect A after the hold change notice effect a has a smaller number of selection target types, and “blue” that may have appeared in the hold change notice effect a is a subsequent previous notice effect. In A, the relationship of not appearing (second color element regulation) is secured.

  In addition, a relationship similar to the color element regulation described in FIG. 48 is established between the previous notice effect A and the later notice effect B in the symbol change display game. Configured with common color element selection types, but with the remaining color element types except “yellow”, which has the lowest winning expectation expectation, that is, the color element type on the higher expected expectation side The three types of “green, red, and D pattern” are set so that the number of selection types is small. This means that a relationship (first color element regulation) is established in which a “yellow” character that may appear in the previous notice effect A does not appear in the later notice effect B.

  As a result, among the three parties of the hold change notice effect a, the previous notice effect A, and the later notice effect B, the notice effect that appears later occurs in a display mode of a color element or special symbol with a high degree of expectation. The relationship (second color element restriction + first color element restriction) is established. Therefore, when the notice effect is generated in multiple stages of the hold change notice effect a, the previous notice effect A, and the later notice effect B, the hold change notice effect a is changed to the previous notice effect A, and the previous notice effect A is changed to the later notice effect. Each time the stage progresses to B, the player is perceived as having the notice effect appearing in an effect mode with a higher expectation of winning than the previous time.

(Modification of color element regulation)
The relationship between the color element or the special pattern display mode defined between the objects displayed at the preceding appearance timing and the subsequent appearance timing in the above-described symbol variation display game is the same between consecutive notices of different symbol variation display games. Thus, the same operation and effect can be obtained. For example, when a lightning image is displayed continuously as a preview effect image across multiple symbol variation display games as a look-ahead notification effect of “variation start change system”, the color element or special pattern display mode for displaying the lightning image The selection target type is determined so that the one with the highest expectation of winning wins remains, and the one with the highest expectation of winning wins is gradually removed as the number of consecutive notices increases from the first to the fourth. The number of target types can be decreased so as to be shifted toward the high reliability side. For example, the color element or special pattern display mode type that can be selected as the display mode of the lightning image is selected from five types of “blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern” for the first continuous notification, and the continuous notification is performed. For the second time, select from 4 types of “yellow, green, red, D pattern”. For the 3rd continuous notice, select from 3 types of “green, red, D pattern”. It can be determined to select from two types of “red, D pattern”.

  44 to 45 (first embodiment), FIGS. 46 to 47B (second embodiment), FIGS. 48 to 49 (summary of the first embodiment), and FIGS. 50 to 51 (described later). In relation to the sound production), an example in which the preview image is displayed (appears) on the symbol display means (liquid crystal display device 36) is shown as an example, but one or more other provided separately from the liquid crystal display device 36 The notice image may be displayed on the image display means (for example, similar to the liquid crystal display device 36). That is, using one or more image display means, a hold display image (including a pre-reading notice effect by a hold display mode), an image of a previous notice effect, and a subsequent notice effect are displayed, and at least one of these displays One display and the display of the decorative symbol variation display game on the liquid crystal display device 36 may be displayed separately. For example, in this symbol variation display game, one notice effect (for example, at least one of the previous notice effect, the subsequent notice effect, and the hold display image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and another notice effect ( For example, at least one of the previous notice effect, the later notice effect, and the hold display image) is displayed on one or more other image display means provided separately, and the effect during the game appears by these image display means. Can be made. In addition, one preview image is displayed across the screens of two or more image display means, for example, an image displayed on one image display means and an image displayed on another one or more image display means. In addition, it is possible to display so that one image is formed (to display one image display effect that is grouped as a whole). The hold display can be displayed as an image by the image display means, or can be displayed by using a light effect means such as a full color LED.

  In the present embodiment, the preliminary announcement effects 1 to 5, the preliminary announcement effects 1 and 2, and the preliminary announcement effects belonging to the D type of the preliminary announcement effect type of the pending change announcement effect (the pre-reading announcement effect of the change system at the time of winning) are included. However, the following configuration is possible. For example, at least two of the plurality of types of notice effect types are classified into a specific notice effect image (D pattern) having a relatively high winning expectation degree during a plurality of types of notice effects belonging to each notice effect type. The object of the present invention can also be achieved by including a notice effect related to the notice image). That is, it is configured such that at least two notice effect types include a notice effect that causes a notice image related to the D pattern to appear. Specifically, it can be configured as follows.

(A) If the embodiment deals with “pre-notice effects 1 to 5 and post-notice effects 1 and 2 of FIG. 45” in FIG. At least two of them,
(B) In the embodiment dealing with “hold change notice, previous notice effects 1 to 4, FIG. 47A after notice effect 1-2” in FIG. 46, “hold change notice, previous notice effects 1 to 4, FIG. 47A” At least two of the following notice effects 1-2 "
(C) In the embodiment dealing with “hold change notice, previous notice effects 1 to 4, FIG. 47B after notice effect 1-2” in FIG. 46, “hold change notice, previous notice effects 1 to 4, FIG. 47B”. At least two of the whole of the "after-notice effects 1-2"
(D) In the embodiment dealing with “pre-notice effect A and post-notice effect B” in FIG.
(E) In the embodiment dealing with “hold change notice a, previous notice effect A, and later notice effect B” in FIG. At least two of the
(F) In the embodiment dealing with “pre-prediction effect A and post-prediction effect B” in FIG. 50, two of “pre-prediction effect A and post-notice effect B” (same as in the case of (d) above),
(G) In the embodiment in which “holding change notice a, previous notice effect A, and subsequent notice effect B” in FIG. 51 are handled, out of the entire “hold change notice a, previous notice effect A, and subsequent notice effect B”. At least two of them (similar to the case of (e) above).

<21. Explanation of Danger Pattern Exclusive Sound: Fig. 50 to Fig. 51>
50 to 51 show examples of sound effect mode types (sound effect types) that appear in association with the notice effect according to the present embodiment.

(21-1. Danger pattern exclusive sound 1: Fig. 50)
FIG. 50 shows a sound effect mode (“sound effect type” in the figure) for the notice effect that occurs during the symbol variation display game (during one variation), and the rainbow color is added as an example of the color element type. Except for this point, it is the same as the first color element regulation described in FIG. Therefore, the sound effect type of the sound production here is the color element or special color corresponding to the expected winning degree in the notice image related to the color element in one symbol variation display game (one symbol variation display operation). On the premise of being displayed in a display mode having a pattern, the type of sound effect that appears in association with the notice image is shown.

  Specifically, as the display mode type of the preview image, the previous preview effect A includes yellow, green, red, and D patterns, including a rainbow color with a winning expectation of 100%. In this order, that is, “yellow <green < The winning expectations are higher in the order of red <D pattern <rainbow color. In the post-notice production B, there are green, red, and D patterns, including a rainbow color with a winning expectation of 100%. In this order, that is, in the order of “green <red <D pattern <rainbow”, the winning expectation increases. ing. The rainbow color is also taken into consideration here as the whole gaming machine has the types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, and rainbow color elements. This is because the rainbow color may appear as one of the notice effects that occur during the symbol variation display game, although there are no restrictions. This is different from the case of FIG. 48 in that this rainbow color is also taken into consideration.

  In the notice image effect of each color element belonging to the previous notice effect A, a predetermined sound effect and / or light effect is generated along with the specific image (specific image display of the object) related to the color element. As for the sound effect and the light effect, if the sound effect is representatively described, the color image of the notice image of each color element belonging to the previous notice effect A is a yellow, green, red, D pattern, or rainbow color notice image. The sound effects that appear in association with each other are the same for each of the notice effects except for the case where the color elements are “rainbow color” and “D pattern”. The “sound effect” generated in relation to the notice image of each color element is “normal sound” when the color element of the notice image is “yellow, green, or red” as the sound effect type. Is generated. That is, the sound effect related to the “yellow, green, or red” notice image is determined to be a common sound effect (sound effect). In the case of the present embodiment, among the notification images related to the plurality of types of notification effects belonging to the previous notification effect A, a specific notification image with a relatively high win-winning expectation degree (here, especially in the high reliability notification effects) When a notice image related to “D pattern” or “rainbow color”, which is an effect with a high degree of expectation of winning, appears, a plurality of other kinds of notice images having a lower winning expectation than the specific notice image ( Here, the sound effect (in this case, the normal sound) related to the “Yellow”, “Green” or “Red” notice effect (which is lower than the “D pattern”) is expected to be won. Sound: D pattern dedicated sound, premium sound) is generated, and the sound effects related to the other types of other notice images are common sound effects (normal sounds).

  Similarly, also in the post-notice effect B, the sound effect that appears in association with the notice image of which the color element is yellow, green, red, D pattern, or rainbow color, the color elements are “rainbow color” and “D pattern” Except for the case of "", the notice effects are the same. The “sound effect” generated in connection with the notice image of each color element has a common effect when the color element of the notice image is either “green” or “red” as its sound effect type. When the “normal sound” that is a sound is generated and the color elements of the preview image are “rainbow color” and “D pattern”, different “premium sound” or “D pattern dedicated sound” is generated. This “normal sound” is the same as that in the previous notice effect A.

  As a first case where the sound effect type is not “normal sound”, when the color element of the preview image of the previous notice effect A or the subsequent notice effect B is “rainbow color”, the normal sound is used as the effect sound type. A “premium sound” that is a special sound different from the above is generated. If the color element is a “rainbow” notice image effect, the color element effect is not only a specific image in the liquid crystal screen, but also a special background effect or decoration lamp 45 / LED, etc. A premium effect can be produced by a light effect or the like. For example, a display mode in which the entire liquid crystal screen and the entire frame of the gaming machine are colored in rainbow colors can be employed.

  Further, as a second case where the sound effect type is not “normal sound”, when the color element of the notice image of the previous notice effect A or the later notice effect B is “D pattern”, as the effect sound type of the sound effect, A “unique sound (D-pattern dedicated sound)” that is a special sound different from the normal sound and the premium sound is generated. If the color element is the “D pattern” preview image effect, the color element effect is not only the character image and character surrounding area image in the liquid crystal screen, but also the D pattern background effect and the decoration lamp 45 LED. A special effect for the D pattern, such as a light effect for causing the D pattern to be developed, can be displayed. For example, a display mode in which the entire liquid crystal screen and the entire frame of the gaming machine are colored in a D pattern can be employed. As the “display mode in which the entire frame of the gaming machine is colored in the D pattern”, for example, a form in which the frame of the gaming machine moves in a predetermined direction along the frame with the yellow stripe on the yellow background.

  In this way, in the preview image effects of the previous notice effect A and the subsequent notice effect B, when the color element is the notice image effect of “D pattern”, a “D pattern dedicated sound” different from the normal sound or premium sound is generated. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a character image or a cut-in image having a D-design color element has appeared as a notice target image, as distinguished from the notice effect of other color elements. It will be. Therefore, even if the player looks aside and overlooks the appearance of the notice image of FIG. D from the sight, the notice image of the figure D appears from above the auditory sense by sound (D pattern dedicated sound). It becomes possible to recognize that.

(21-2. Danger pattern dedicated sound 2: Fig. 51)
FIG. 51 shows sound effect types for sound production in the second color element regulation (FIG. 49). Therefore, the case of FIG. 50 is different from the case of FIG. 50 in that the hold change notice effect a is added to the previous notice effect A and the subsequent notice effect B. The hold change notice effect a has white, blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, and rainbow colors as display mode types having color elements or special patterns corresponding to the winning expectation degree. Winning expectations are higher in the order of white <blue <yellow <green <red <D pattern <rainbow color>. Of these, five types of color elements of “blue, yellow, green, red, and D pattern” are second between the four types of “yellow, green, red, and D pattern” of the previous notice effect A. Color element regulations are provided. The first color element regulation is provided between the four types of “yellow, green, red, D pattern” of the previous notice effect A and the three types of “green, red, D pattern” of the subsequent notice effect B. ing.

  Regarding the “sound effect” related to the notice effect of each color element of the hold change notice effect a, when the color element is “yellow, green, red” as the sound effect type, this white, blue, yellow, A “normal sound” that is a sound common to the green and red notice image effects is generated. Regarding the “sound effect” related to the notice effect of each color element of the previous notice effect A, when the color element is “yellow, green, red” as the sound effect type, the notice image effect of those color elements A “normal sound” that is a common sound is generated. Similarly, regarding the “sound effect” related to the notice effect of each color element of the post-notice effect B, when the color element is “green” or “red”, the sound common to the notice image effect of those color elements The “normal sound” is generated.

  In the first case where the sound effect type is not “normal sound”, when the color element is “rainbow color” in the notice effect of the hold change notice effect “a”, the previous notice effect “A”, and the subsequent notice effect “B”, the effect As a sound type, a “premium sound” that is a special sound different from the normal sound is generated. In the second case where the sound effect type is not “normal sound”, when the color element is “D pattern” in the notice effect of the hold change notice effect a, the previous notice effect A, and the subsequent notice effect B, As the sound effect type, “original sound (D-pattern dedicated sound)” which is a special sound different from the normal sound and the premium sound is generated.

  In the previous notice effect A and the later notice effect B, “normal sound” means the type of sound effect (effect sound type) that is normally employed in the notice effect in the gaming machine, and has only one type of occurrence. Including the case of multiple types. The “normal sound” may be the same sound effect type in the previous notice effect A and the subsequent notice effect B, or may be different sound effect types. Also, the premium sound when the color element is “rainbow” may be the same sound effect type in the hold change notice effect a, the previous notice effect A, and the later notice effect B, or different sound effects. It may be a type. However, when the color element is “D pattern”, the D pattern dedicated sound is a sound effect type common to the hold change notice effect a, the previous notice effect A, and the rear notice effect B, and the same special sound is used as the D pattern dedicated sound. Adopted.

  Thus, in the notice effects of the hold change notice effect a, the previous notice effect A, and the subsequent notice effect B, when the color element is the notice effect (icon image or hold memory display lamp) related to the “D pattern”, the normal sound or Since “D pattern exclusive sound” that is different from the premium sound is generated, a D pattern color appears as a reserved icon image, or a character image or cut-in image having a D pattern color element appears as a notice target image This can be made intelligible to the player in distinction from when the notice effect of other color elements occurs. Therefore, even if the player looks aside and overlooks the appearance of the D-pattern hold icon image or the character notice image, the sound (D-pattern dedicated sound) is used to hear D It becomes possible to recognize that the notice image in the figure has appeared.

(21-3. Modification)
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, when the notice effect with the color element “rainbow color” occurs in the hold change notice effect a, the previous notice effect A, and the later notice effect B, the premium sound different from the other effects. It was described as occurring. However, in the hold change notice effect a, when a notice effect with a color element of “rainbow color” occurs, the same as when a hold change notice having a color element of blue, yellow, green, or red occurs, You may comprise so that the "1st special sound" which is a normal look-ahead warning sound may be generated. Similarly, in the previous notice effect A and the later notice effect B, when a notice effect having a color element of “rainbow” is generated, a notice effect having a color element of blue, yellow, green, or red is generated. The same “normal sound” as that of the case, that is, a normal notice effect sound may be generated.

  This embodiment can be configured as follows. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Acquisition means (S311 to S314 in FIG. 10, S331 to 334 in FIG. 11) for acquiring predetermined game information due to a predetermined switch signal (detection signal from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 35a); ,
Based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means, lottery means (S409, S410 in FIG. 12) for performing a winning lottery to determine whether or not to generate a winning game;
In a gaming machine B provided with production control means (production control unit 24) configured to be able to appear and control a notice production for announcing the expected degree of occurrence of the winning game,
The notice effects include a plurality of kinds of notice effects (for example, FIG. 44) belonging to a plurality of kinds of notice effects (for example, the previous notice effects 1 to 4 in FIG. 44 and the subsequent notice effects 1 to 2 in FIG. 45). 44 of the previous notice effects 1 and 4 and the notice effects belonging to the latter notice effects 1 and 2 in FIG. Are set differently,
Further, the plurality of types of notice effects are configured as notice image display effects including a notice effect image capable of notifying the difference in the degree of expectation according to display mode types with different colors and / or patterns,
The production control means includes
Preliminary image effect determining means (S744 to S749 in FIG. 25) for determining the notice image display effect to be displayed based on the lottery result by the lottery means for one or more types of the notice effect types;
Image display control means (display control unit (liquid crystal control unit)) for executing and controlling the notice image related to the notice image display effect determined by the notice effect display image determining means;
Sound production control means (S744 to S749 in FIG. 25, FIG. 50) for executing and controlling the sound production related to the notice image display production decided by the notice image production decision means. ,
The sound production control means is
When a preview image display effect related to a specific notice effect image having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed among the plurality of types of notice effect, the expectation is higher than the notice image display effect related to the specific notice effect image. It is configured to execute and control a sound effect (original sound: D pattern dedicated sound) different from the sound effect related to other types of other notice image display effects of low degree (FIG. 50),
The sound effects related to the other types of other notice image display effects are defined as common sound effects (FIG. 50).
A gaming machine B characterized by that.

  The gaming machine B can also be configured as follows.

In the gaming machine B provided with the lottery means and the effect control means,
The notice effect includes a plurality of kinds of notice effects belonging to a plurality of kinds of notice effect types with different contents of the effect, and the expectation degree of one notice effect and the other notice effects belonging to the same kind of notice effect Each is defined differently,
Further, the plurality of types of notice effects are configured as notice image display effects including a notice effect image capable of notifying the difference in the degree of expectation according to display mode types with different colors and / or patterns,
The effect control means includes the preview image effect determination means, the image display control means, and the sound effect control means,
At least two of the plurality of types of notice effect types have a relatively high expectation degree as a notice effect having colors and / or patterns common to the notice effects belonging to the notice effect type. A specific notice image display effect (a notice effect related to the D pattern) related to a high specific notice effect image (the D pattern notice image),
The sound production control means is
When the specific notice image display effect is executed, a sound effect (original sound: D) different from the sound effect related to the other kinds of other notice image display effects having a lower expectation than the specific notice image display effect. It can be set as the structure which can carry out execution control (FIG. 50). In this case, it is preferable that sound effects related to a plurality of types of other preview image display effects having a lower degree of expectation than the specific preview image display effect are determined as a common sound effect.

  In each of the embodiments described above, a pachinko gaming machine that uses a game ball as a game medium has been described. For example, a revolving game machine that can use a game medal or a game ball may be used, or an electromagnetic recording (an electronic method, a magnetic method, or a recording that is not recognized by human perception) It may be a gaming machine that uses a gaming medium that uses a computer provided for information processing by an electronic computer). Further, as a gaming machine using a game medium using electromagnetic recording instead of a real game medal or a real game ball, for example, a so-called “enclosed game machine” may be used. Also, in each of the embodiments described above, the configuration can reduce the game operation control burden, and can reduce the control burden while enriching the variations of the performance without impairing the freedom of the performance. The effect that it can be assumed can be produced.

  The present invention is useful for a game machine using a game ball or a game medium corresponding thereto.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame,
3 Game board,
3a gaming area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guide rail,
6 Glass door,
7 Front operation panel
8 Upper tray unit,
9 Top saucer,
11 Ball rental button,
12 Card return button,
13 Frame production button,
14 Ball release button,
15 Launch control handle,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 Main control unit,
21 External terminal board for frame,
24 production control unit,
28 Launch control board,
29 payout control board,
31 power supply board,
32 launcher,
34 Upper starting port,
34a Upper start sensor,
35 Lower starting port,
35a Lower start sensor,
36 liquid crystal display devices,
37 Normal design starting port,
37a Normal design start sensor,
38a, 38b Special symbol display device,
39c LED display for holding composite display,
39a Normal symbol display device,
39b Round number display device,
40, 50 Big prize opening,
41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
42,52 Special variable prize device,
42a, 52a Big prize opening sensor,
42b, 52b open door,
42c, 52c
43 General prize opening,
43a General prize opening sensor,
44 Windmill,
45 Decorative lamp,
45a optical display device,
46 speakers,
46a sound generator,
47 Movable wing pieces,
48 Center decoration,
49 Out mouth,
61 Movable body accessory motor,
62 Revolving light (third movable object)
80 Clock-type accessory (first movable object accessory)
90 Flower-type character (second movable object)
91 1st movable body,
92 second movable body,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 Production control CPU,
242 Production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (1)

Game control means for comprehensively controlling game operation processing related to the progress of the game,
A symbol display means for executing a stunning symbol variation display game accompanied by a game symbol variation display operation and deriving and displaying a display result;
Effect control means for comprehensively controlling the effect operation processing related to the effect including the change display operation of the game symbol with respect to the symbol display means,
After a specific display result is derived and displayed on the symbol display means, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous manner for the player,
The game control means includes
Lottery means for executing lottery for a plurality of types of hits based on predetermined execution conditions;
With respect to a variation pattern related to a variation display operation of the game symbol executed in relation to a lottery result by the lottery means, one or a plurality of types of hit variation patterns corresponding to the case where the winning is lottery is determined by the lottery means. A plurality of types of fluctuation pattern distribution tables including a hit variation pattern distribution table and a loss variation pattern distribution table that defines one or a plurality of types of loss variation patterns corresponding to cases where the winning is not lottery by the lottery means. When,
A variation pattern determining means for determining any variation pattern distribution table from the plurality of types of variation pattern distribution tables and determining the variation pattern based on the determined variation pattern distribution table; ,
The production control means includes
For demonstration performed in connection with the variation pattern determined by the change pattern determination means, per effect selection table defining Starring unloading that are related to the per variation pattern, leaving Starring that relate to the loss variation pattern A plurality of types of effect selection tables including
An effect mode determining means for determining an effect selection table from among the plurality of types of effect selection tables, and determining an effect based on the determined effect selection table;
Production execution control means for executing and controlling the production determined by the production mode decision means,
The variation pattern determining means includes
The common hit variation pattern distribution table is determined when at least the first hit among the plurality of types of wins is drawn by lottery by the lottery means and when the second win is selected. Configured,
The hit production selection table is:
A first effect selection table defining a plurality of effects,
A second effect selection table including a specific effect in addition to effects common to a plurality of types of effects to be selected in the first effect selection table;
A third effect selection table configured to determine a common effect with a plurality of types of effects to be selected in the first effect selection table, wherein the proportion of the effects determined is different; Including,
The production mode determining means includes
When the first hit is drawn by lottery by the lottery means, the first effect selection table or the second effect selection table is determined by lottery,
The third effect selection table is determined when the second winning lottery is drawn by lottery by the lottery means .
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images